Home

SERVICE MANUAL, Rev. M

1.
2.
3.
4. ELECTRONIC ENCLOSURE USED DUAL PRINTERS ONLY USED DUAL PRINTERS ONLY l MEZZANINE CONN TO P2 ON HIB SHEET 1 MEZZANINE CONN TO P1 ON HIB SHEET 1 CN1212 1 2 3 4 5 20 25 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 3
5. TO MPC MODEM BOARD NOT USED HOST INTERFACE BOARD HIB Ji 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 CN1503 1 2 4 12 13 18 19 21 23 25 26 27 29 30 32 33 34 1 D D ry NU slk cls UE E E NINNIN AY At ou eo o a sel Rael se o o TAMIL co co ca ca co co ms na NN al alalalal ja a e Flr ron Dn re lt lt lt co co 0 m m 6 31815 5 tx lt ge el deee lel llos I ilo CIE a x jElacio ja QO lo12v LL Lj NAN N N N N N N N 5V 12V OD CO CO CO CO m M CO o NY N NY AY ON NY Nf N N L L L lt M m m m m a aj lt x lt a ajajaja xix nA oA o gt lt gt lt o E x x H Oye a 7 gt A FR DIE DUAL PRINTER FIBER INTERFACE BOARD NN NA Na VM P1 HOST DATA CN1501 5 VCC Pio oid poo id 5 VCC DATA 0 el tLe gt DS20 DS19 DS22 DS21 DA DATA 0 DS14 j OR DATA i a Al Fc 2 NY 3 dla a D m a co a lt x MOA ll ala eg Nw N AIO aa T x El 5 Joe El x DI moi DATA 4 He al EE alvecl o klvcc Ef 8 SE gt INET Se OPTICS MODULE l Do 5 ep Do 5 DIFF DATA 2 APSE KS A BULKHEAD gt ES gt rT Ha a DUART IMAGE DATA a 7 A dl CLK U22 CN1502 CN1006 CN701 DATA 3 K mil parao mog Loa 8 i i i i gl lo 20 DATA 20
6. DATA DATA CONFIG DATA XILINX CONFIG Appr CONTROL IPB INTERFACE ENABLE W DC POWER demm EPROMS vio u 2 V0c FILTER 12V a FILTER AN RESET AJ INT SERIAL LOGIC PORT Ge U15 CPU SERIAL PORT PAG C53 INT LOGIC 0 NA EPROMS U10 Ut1 L XTAL CLOCK THE FIBER INTERFACE BOARD FIB AND THE TRANSLATOR DAUGHTER BOARD FIBER TDB F SHOWN ABOVE ARE USED IN THE PLUS VERSION OF THE M8700 IN THE STANDARD VERSION OF THE SYSTEM THEY ARE REPLACED BY THE BOARDS SHOWN ON THE IMS INTERFACE FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM SHEET 3 e THE FIB IS REPLACED BY EITHER A DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD DIB A VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD VIB OR A SCSI INTERFACE SIB e THE TDB F IS REPLACED BY A TRANSLATOR DAUGHTER BOARD COPPER TDB C
7. N 1202688 P R Q A1 BANK 3 MASTER COMMAND B1 k amp MODEM PORT TO NMB CN1401 AG A Bo qt BANK 2 CNTL IPB SCB ae DRIVE SERIAL COMM CN1102 USER 1 y TO SCB CN1208 CN1109 BACK CHAN 1 BANK 1 USER 0 BACK CHAN qe BANKO USER 1 RECEIVE IMAGE DATA USER 0 TO CN1006 INPUT OUT ADDR ADDR ADDR RECEIVE BUFFER LATCH MUX1 MUX2 MUX2 Gu DC POWER DATA DATA TO MIB CN1302 IN OUT CONNECTORS FOR ADDITIONAL MDB s CN1108 IMAGE PROCESSOR B
8. 8 24 1202688 2001 May Rev M Item 2001 May Rev M Part Number 78 8094 5713 4 78 8094 9031 7 Not Available 78 8092 4074 6 78 8094 9033 3 78 8094 5689 6 78 8094 5690 4 78 8094 5439 6 78 8094 5440 4 78 8092 4097 7 78 8092 4096 9 78 8094 5777 9 78 8094 5853 8 78 8092 4090 2 78 8094 5932 0 78 8094 5933 8 78 8094 5946 0 78 8094 5950 2 78 8094 5951 0 78 8094 5954 4 78 8094 5956 9 12 7996 2818 0 78 8092 4006 8 26 1003 7121 5 Not Available 26 1011 6791 9 26 1011 6849 5 78 8161 3130 0 DY 1150 0028 2 26 1011 7198 6 78 8094 5904 9 1202688 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 4 Front Panel Assembly Description Qty FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY Kodak and OEM except GE 1 FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY GE only 1 AINE BA O GE 1 DOOR Cassette Kodak and OEM except GEI 1 DOOR Cassette GE only EE EE 1 BRACKET DOOP vi ae en ee EE E e 1 BRACKET Door Mounting ESS rss dE d dE EE RS RES SE 1 CLIP Mounting Right EE 1 CLIP Mounting Left ak aa A keen Paca ae ae et 5 s5 BRACKET GYIINdBr aaa sinus ba da gege deg Bea YA 1 BRACKET Rod Enis Bi KA TG Bic PAA ode the Mel et ered ds Binns vats 1 SPRING Torsion Rollback 1 PIN er 1 e
9. 2 1 2A 18 8094 5366 1 ROD E EEN 1 25 x 18 8094 5368 7 LOOK EEN 2 26 18 80945371 1 4 ROD Release nan nck Si a Biel ann Ware dives Lote Bagi irene ate 1 27 78 8094 5372 9 LINK Solenoid si uen ited evaded aa CEV 1 28 78 8094 5413 1 BRACKET Switch Power 1 29 78 8094 5428 9 BRACKET Slide 2 1 78 8094 5446 1 lt CHUTE Films EE 1 31 78 8094 5454 5 SLIDE Modified Transport 2 32 78 8094 5543 5 SUPPORT Bearing 2425424 dan thas patent Sige CREE la ede eles KEE 2 33 78 8094 5544 3 BRACKET Solenoid 1 34 78 8094 5545 0 BRACKET Switch cece iced eae Phil a a bee 2 35 78 8094 5547 6 COVER Bracket 4 EN NEE naa deeded awh bed wens heed web ees 2 36 78 8094 5587 2 SPACER Slide civic ici elias oka d dea Me ehh NEI ores a NEE SEX 1 37 78 8094 5588 0 HANGER Slide 0 Vd ora ENEE ER EIN ee EE ea ee on eee ed es 1 BB 78 8094 5644 1 PANEL Relay sis wa aadd LAAL whe NG RK NAN eee NEEN ae oe 1 39 78 8094 5645 8 BRACKET Cable 1 407 78 8094 5740 7 SHAFT aten EEN 1 41 78 8094 5754 8 RELAY Processor 24VDC K801 1 42 78 8094 5756 3 SWITCH POWE d sack a ARA Ried see Gon eee al eas an ee Reka a A 1 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 19 Service Manual Item No 44 45 46
10. KFEIB FIBER OPTIC FTSW a O KEYPAD DO A CH B CH E O a RCV Keypad Cable Figure 2 10 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 7 Service Manual 2 If an optional footswitch is to be used connect it to the KFEIB Refer to Figure 2 11 KFEIB FIBER OPTIC FTSW XMT Sima ACH B CH KEYPAD SiS o O elle RCV Footswitch Figure 2 11 3 Connect the fiber optic cable to the KFEIB Refer to Figure 2 12 4 Connect the fiber optic cable to the TDB F at the rear of the IMAGER Refer to Figure 2 12 KFEIB FIBER OPTIC Frsw YN o O A CH B CH KEYPAD ui oli Jo I RCV O o A Lead TDB F Fiber Ka Optic o Cable 0 WWOO B Lead Figure 2 12 5 Connect the KFEIB power cord For installations outside the U S and Canada the KFEIB is supplied with a harmonized power cord with no wall plug For these locations attach the proper type plug obtain locally The KFEIB uses a universal power supply that requires no modification for input voltages in the range of 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 2 3 3 Touch Screen Keypad to UKEIB to TDB C Caution The switches in the UKEIB must be set before any cables are connected to it Use only approved cables and ensure that the cables are connected to the proper connectors on the UKEIB If the switches are not set correctly when cables are connected o
11. 1 23 78 8094 5158 2 CABLE ASSEMBLY Motors 1 24 78 8094 5159 0 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal PDB SCB 1 25 78 8094 5160 8 CABLE ASSEMBLY External PDB SCB 1 26 Not Available HARNESS ASSEMBLY IPB SCB DC Power 1 27 Not Available HARNESS ASSEMBLY MIB DC Power 1 28 78 8094 5164 0 HARNESS ASSEMBLY Service Switch 1 29 78 8094 5484 2 CABLE ASSEMBLY IPB NMB 1 30 78 8094 5143 4 CABLE MOLDED External Optics Data I O Interconnect 1 31 78 8094 5145 9 CABLE MOLDED External Optics Control I O Interconnect 1 32 78 8094 5147 5 CABLE MOLDED External Optics Power I O Interconnect 1 33 78 8094 5149 1 CABLE MOLDED External Optics Atten I O Interconnect 1 34 78 8094 5153 3 CABLE MOLDED External Densitometer I O Interconnect 1 35 78 8094 5155 8 CABLE MOLDED External Local Panel I O Interconnect 1 37 Not Available CLAMP Nylon Ml ia Ba ane enn ere ond a ad paca EE 2 38 Not Available CLAMP Nylon DEE 4 39 26 1011 6847 9 SWITCH Push pull RESET 0 1 A 125 VAC
12. 1 97 78 8094 5959 3 ACTUATOR Solenoid Feed 1 98 78 8092 4080 3 LINK Solenoid Feed 1 99 78 8656 4001 1 RING Retaining External Eng 2 100 78 8010 7213 9 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 4 101 26 1001 0124 0 WASHER Metric Lock A3 2 ID X 6 0 OD X 8 External Tooth 4 102 78 8656 4000 3 RING Retaining External E Ring 2 103 78 8094 5833 0 BAR Film Release 1 104 78 8094 5834 8 PLATE Gate Extended 1 105 78 8094 5844 7 STOP Bar Release 1 106 26 1011 7155 6 SPRING External 188 OD X 024 Wire Dia X 2 500 1 107 26 1001 6361 2 WASHER Metric Lock A2 7 ID X 5 5 OD X A External Tooth 2 108 78 8092 4075 3 lt FLAG Lee nero cnn dene AG MD KA a a de Pen AS Ka A a 1 109 78 8185 5656 1 O RING 15625 ID X 28125 X 0625 1 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 47 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 8 48 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 13 Exposure Module Assembly 8 49 2001 May Rev M 1202688 Serv
13. 1 6 78 8094 5847 0 CABLE RESTRAINT 22222020200 1 7 78 8092 4165 2 HOST INTERFACE BOARD HI 1 8 78 8092 4145 4 MACHINE INTERFACE BOARD MIDI 1 9 78 8094 5116 0 POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD PDB 1 10 78 8092 4146 2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER BOARD SCB 1 12 78 8094 5141 8 CABLE ASSEMBLY MIB SCB 1 13 78 8094 5142 6 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Optics Data 1 14 78 8094 5144 2 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Optics Control 1 15 78 8094 5146 7 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Optics Power 1 16 78 8094 5148 3 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Optics Atten 1 17 78 8094 5150 9 CABLE ASSEMBLY BP MF 1 18 78 8094 5151 7 CABLE ASSEMBLY RF Tag 1 19 78 8094 5152 5 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Densitometer 1 20 78 8094 5154 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Local Panel 1 21 78 8094 5156 6 CABLE ASSEMBLY 24 VAC Uu 2 222 nnn enn aan nann nerean 1 22 78 8094 5157 4 CABLE ASSEMBLY Solenoids 1 23 78 8094 5158 2 CABLE ASSEMBLY Motors 1 24 78 8094 5159 0 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal PDB
14. 2001 March Rev L 1202688 Service Manual 4 10 3 Image Processor Board IPB A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 Remove the electronics enclosure cover 4 1 4 a eo Remove memory daughter boards Caution To avoid damage to sensitive electronic components always wear an anti static strap when handling PWAs or EPROMs Remove 4 Remove 5 Slide out 8700 102C 8 Disconnect cables 4 9 Remove screws 10 Figure 4 97 4 86 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 10 4 Memory Daughter Board MDB A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 3 Remove the electronics enclosure cover 4 1 4 Caution To avoid damage to sensitive electronic components always wear an anti static strap when handling PWAs or EPROMs Swing open 8700 103C Rock gently from left to rig
15. 4 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X0 7X12 0 1 WASHER Metric Plain M4 16 HOUSING Filter Power Module 1 HAN ASSEMBLY MOOT ite aa KAG EE aa 1 HAND E ti al ri na ANA DAL rend ABA ana 1 POWER SUPPLY PS1 5 17 24 css mpa a saad AA Lk KA AA 1 BRACKET Utility Power Module 1 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 8 0 4 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil M4 X 0 7 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 6 GROMMET NYION ad A e EA pe eure Paes BG AR HARNESS ASSEMBLY DC Power 901 1 HIE WRAP ienei See Lane Bieta nn Banig Dn a Beet eas aie eases 1 HARNESS ASSEMBLY AC Power 900 1 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil M3 X 0 5 X 16 Sems External Tooth 2 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil M4 X 0 7 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 7 NUT Mach Hex Metric M6 X 1 0 Keps 4 RELAY 24 VAC K901 Power Switch 1 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil 10 32 X 38 Sems External Tooth 2 NUT Mach Hex Metric M5 X 0 8 Keps 3 LABEL Earth Ground were HAAN coe cl cote aNG na el ced a 1 VARISTOR ASSEMBLY VIO Ds A AA 1 CAPACITOR 45 UF 240 VAC C901 1 MEWRAP est
16. 3 84 Not Available CLAMP Cable 2 86 78 8094 5962 7 SPRING Releases cia A AA ee ented 1 87 26 1011 6823 0 NUT Mach Metric M6 X 1 00 kens 2 88 Not Available CLAMP Cable 1 89 78 8094 5865 2 DETENT ASSEMBLY 0 0 0 0 teens 1 90 7 26 1011 7108 5 TARE FOAM eet der Se A we eh ee man AR 92 78 8005 1420 6 HOLE PLUG ieina a dede eee ue serrures 2 8 20 1202688 2001 May Rev M Item No 94 95 96 97 98 99 78 8095 9531 3 26 1011 7147 3 78 8094 5926 2 Not Available Not Available 26 1010 2067 0 Not Available 78 8092 4043 1 78 8092 4068 8 78 8092 4044 9 78 8092 4041 5 26 1011 7916 1 100 101 102 104 106 108 109 111 112 113 114 115 2001 May Rev M Part Number 78 8161 8389 7 78 8656 4000 3 78 8094 5879 3 Not Available POST Spring RETAINER Spring PROCESSOR STOP ASSEMBLY 78 8094 5616 9 Not Available 1202688 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly continued Description BEARING 2510 RING Retaining LEVER Interlock SHAFT Interlock LATCH Slam FD LATCH ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 5 FD MANUAL ASSEMBLY LABEL Zone Locations SHIELD EMI Suppressor SHIELD RFI BRACKET Swit
17. 1 7E2653 DISTRIBUTION BOARD 1 26 1011 8077 1 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M4 X 0 7 X6 2 26 1011 6809 9 WASHER Metric Lock M4 External Tooth 2 78 8094 5692 0 MOTOR Rollback 1 7E2646 COVER PG Boards lt da 8 na od ciel ele ee eee end 1 26 1008 5590 2 NUT MACH Keps Ext T M3 X 0 5 13 7E2831 RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD 1 7E2620 RE READER BOARD exe 024 kk GN a a kt AN na nao NG NA ALA hat Kk 1 7E2649 CABLE Distribution Board to RF Interface Board 1 7E2654 RETAINING STRAP Ribbon Cable 2 7E2842 CHP COAX Ant nna 55 Sec kek NE ae ak eS ds a tee 1 7E2839 CLIP RETAINING Flat cable 1 7E2634 RE TAG ANTENNAS maa steaks iden eka thee Ag e ANA e 1 26 1003 7777 4 SCREW MACH Sems Ext T M3 X 0 5 X 4 0 4 7E2841 RETAINER Coax antenna 1 26 1011 8161 3 SCREW Mach Sems Ext T M4 X 0 7 X 8 0 2 7E7347 SCREW Cap Button Head Hex M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 Included in items 7 and 10 7 1202688 Service Manual Figure 8
18. 1 8 78 8095 9445 6 COVER Top Processor XX a NNN EN diac NEIEN NNN NNN ENNEN wares NG 1 9 78 8095 9443 1 ROD Prop Processor 1 10 78 8095 9444 9 ROLLER Guide Prop Rod 1 11 78 8095 9446 4 HANDLE Grip Processor 2 12 78 8094 5650 8 INSULATION End 4 14 Not Available LUBRICANT Ou AR 15 18 8094 5575 7 PLATE Right Hand MER 2 16 78 8094 5576 5 PLATE Left Hand 2 17 78 8095 9366 4 GUIDE Shroud Processor 2 18 Not Available MOUNT Cable Tie 7 19 2 NotAvailabl 2 THE WRAP a a anse ee bended ee Ga KA DB PAN eR ae ve TR AG 8 20 26 1003 8126 3 BUSHING Nylon 4220204 de dant A A A AA 2 21 DY 1102 0683 5 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M4 X 0 7 X 16 2 22 26 1007 2397 7 NUT Mach Hex Metric M4 X 0 7 Keps 8 23 26 1008 9102 2 WASHER Metric Plain MA 2 24 DY 1142 0683 1 WASHER Metric Lock 4 1 ID X 7 6 OD X 0 9 B4 2 25 26 1009 7376 2 WASHER Metric Lock M12 1 26 26 1008 9207 9 NUT Mach Hex Metric M12 X 1 75 1 27 26 1011 7766 0
19. Supply Door g Mechanical Release Filament Tape Left Side Door Mechanical Release Figure 2 2 2 2 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 15 Use a 4 mm ball end Allen wrench to remove the three shipping screws that secure the exposure module to the frame There are two screws on the left side and one on the right front Discard the screws Shipping Screws Figure 2 3 16 Remove the filament tape from the pickup arms 17 Pull the pickup arms down and remove the foam block located above the pickup assembly Foam Block Filament Tape Figure 2 4 18 Remove the filament tape from the rollback handle 19 Remove the filament tape from the wood block that is located between the frame and the transport assembly then remove the wood block 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 3 Service Manual 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 4 Rollback Handle Filament Tape Wood Block Figure 2 5 Remove the yellow caution tag from the handle on the transport assembly Release the processor latch and slide it to the right Grasp the handle on the front of the processor exit assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Remove the filament tape from both ends of the processor cover Filament Tape Both Ends Figure 2 6 Ope
20. 2 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M5 X 0 8 X 8 4 BUSHING NON vada ENEE Meridien ra kee Eee ee 1 ADHESIVE EE AR SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 8 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 3 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil M4 X 0 7 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 18 67 Not Available TIE WRAP Cable 11 69 Not Available TIE WRAP Cable 3 70 26 1007 0054 6 MOUNT Cable Tie Adhesive Backed 9 71 26 1007 2397 7 NUT Mach Hex Metric M4 X 0 7 6 74 26 1008 5460 8 WASHER Metric Lock M6 External Tooth 4 75 78 8094 5948 6 WASHER Transports sc lato del Panlahat eg 8 76 26 1011 6202 7 SWITCH Interlock 16A 250 VAC SW802 SW803 SW804 3 TP Not Available TIE WRAP ax wee ben ta A a DANGAN ad AE ee DAP ae 2 80 26 1011 8007 8 SCREW Shoulder Hex Socket 6 0 DAX10M5X0 8TH 1 81 Not Available CLAMP Cable 4 82 26 1011 6808 1 WASHER Metric Lock M5 External Tooth 1 83 Not Available CLAMP Cable
21. Figure 4 17 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 13 Service Manual 4 2 8 Processor Thermal Fuses A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the processor drum 4 2 1 Caution The drum must be laid on its side in order to remove the thermal fuses To prevent damage to the surface of the drum lay the drum on a soft lint free object for example a folded cloth towel covered with the lint free cloths used for cleaning the drum 8700 101C 3 Remove 4 M2 Allen Figure 4 18 4 14 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 2 9 Exit Assembly A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER 3 Grasp the handle on the front of the processor exit assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Slide locking tab to right then disconnect Remove 4 Disconnect 3 8700 916 Figure 4 19 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 15 Service Manual 4 2 10 Exit Motor M303 A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are
22. PAD ASSEMBLY Rollback Includes PAD HOLDER and 3 item 41 SCREWS 1 11 78 8094 5391 9 NEST Rollback 2 12 78 8094 5774 6 BRACKET Home Sensor Rollback 1 13 78 8094 5129 3 990 SWITCH ASSEMBLY Rollback Home Sensor SW601 1 14 Not Available MOUNT Cable Tie 8 15 gt NotAvailabl es 03 TIE WRAP eet matinee tacked chs ead wasted eel EE 11 16 78 8656 4005 2 RING Retaining External E Ring 5 17 18 19 20 21 a 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 22 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 2001 May Rev M 26 1011 7052 5 26 1003 7119 9 26 1003 7115 7 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M3 X 0 5 X 4 Installed with LOCTITE 1 SCREW Mach Pan Heaa Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 10 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 11 78 8094 5034 5 PIN Locator Rollback 2 12 7999 6069 0 PIN Dowl 125 DIA X 1 00 1 78 8032 3554 4 BUMPER Bulk 22222 c ccc eee eee teenie nee ene 2 Not Available MOUNT 4 WAY 2 22 0 00 ccc ccc en eee sers ere rer 2 7E2650 lits CABLE Distribution Board to Carriage
23. o 0809 Do 059 0820 0808060 89695 N 680 989 KW Disconnect 8700 111C Figure 4 23 4 18 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 2 13 Exit Transport Sensor SW304 A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER L gt Note After reassemby check the adjustment of the sensor actuator procedure 3 5 ul N Nin Ne Remove 2 lt 4 Remove 2 8700 92C Disconnect Figure 4 24 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 19 Service Manual 4 2 14 Densitometer Assembly A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the exit assembly 4 2 9 L gt Note After a new densitometer has been installed a densitometer calibration must be performed procedure 3 3 8700 93C Remove 4 Figure 4 25 4 20 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 3 Transport Assembly 4 3 1 Transport Motor M402 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in haza
24. 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 61 Service Manual Figure 8 18 Processor Drum Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty OA 6E7372 PROCESSOR DRUM ASSEMBLY Domestic 1 0B 3E5526 PROCESSOR DRUM ASSEMBLY OUS 1 1A Not Available PROCESSOR DRUM SUB ASSEMBLY 1 1B 78 8095 9373 0 FUSE Modified Located in Drum Heater and Coating Assembly 1 2 lt lt Not Avallable lt 1 SHAFT Electrical ccc ccd cite cid tn danse nea tea amend ad ak avd divs 1 3 Not Available GROUND Drum 1 4 Not Available CAP End Drum 2 5 26 1009 7248 3 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M3 X 0 5 X 10 8 6 Not Available SCREW Cap Hex Socket M4 X 0 7 X 10 8 7 Not Available BEARING Housing Drum 2 8 Not Available BEARING 24 ID X 42 OD X 1 5 9 Not Available GEAR Drum 160 Tooth Modified 1 10 2 Not Available 2 SPACER GOUNA maa ah ae en aed Bien ee Ware tho ae tte 1 11 2 78 8095 9306 0 RING SID 030000 tr a AAA Aa dos 3 T2222 Not Availables eu SPAGER aa a id o eet a Dd Bees PAL dato amp Bee a ida 3 13 Not Available COLLAR PC Mount 2 2 2 2 2 naana enea 1 14 Not Available SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil
25. 6 FT 7 7 GND 4 4 FT 11 5 GND 25 8 12V 30 9 12V 31 10 12V 32 19 12V 13 16 GND 14 17 GND 35 26 112V E 25 GND 9 23 27 Figure 5 5 2001 May Rev M 1202688 5 3 Service Manual 5 5 Preventive Maintenance 5 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Intervals In order to consistently produce the highest quality images the IMAGER should receive periodic routine maintenance PM procedures must be performed e Every EM call e Every 10 000 cycles e Every 30 000 cycles or annually Most of the parts and supplies required for a 10 000 cycle PM are included in the kit described below Other required parts and supplies are listed following the kit components 5 5 2 Supplies Required for PM 10 000 Cycle PM Kit 78 9998 2915 9 or xxx for customer first users Supplies e Lint free Cleaning Pads 1 bag 78 8018 2802 7 e 3MM Troubleshooter Cleaner 1 can 96 0000 0066 9 Bo Dow Corning Silicone 710 Oil 2 oz bottle 96 0000 1659 0 e 3MM Auto Pak Tack Cloth 1 bag 96 0000 0118 8 Be Static Shielding Bag 1 22 0001 1124 9 e Bag with Tie wrap 1 78 9998 2868 0 e PVC Drum Stand 1 3E5676 e Charcoal Filter Kit 1 3E5769 e Power Module Filter 1 78 8095 9495 1 e Felt Replacement Kit 1 74 0401 8443 9 Includes felt pad with clips e Springs Torsion Stripper 2 78 8095 9395 3 For stripper assemblies with lighter spr
26. Platen entry sensor low 5 seconds elapsed 2 Yes Yes Actuated Film jammed on platen entry or No exit sensor 4 second elapsed Yes bottom sensor low 2 Blocked Yes Film is Exposed es Turn off platen motor and platen top alignment amp gate solenoids 8700 194A Figure 7 17 Load Film into Platen Sequence Deactuated Yes Waits for existing film to exit Yes Blocked 7 20 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 4 11 Unload Exposed Film from Platen SCB detects EDC count finished Blocked bottom sensor Yes Turn platen motor on Open platen top solenoid 2001 May Rev M Figure 7 18 1202688 Actuate kicker solenoid 0 5 second elapsed Platen exit sensor low 2 Blocked ee deactuated Turn off Kicker Turn off kicker solenoid tried three kicker solenoid times Yes Film jammed on platen exit sensor Unload Exposed Film from Platen Sequence 8700 196A 7 21 Service Manual 7 4 12 Drive Film Up Through Transport i e Is another film pre staged Open gate Yes solenoid and Platen entry sensor low 2 No Actuated No 1 8 seconds elapsed Mid tran sport sensor low Yes Deactuated Yes Turn off platen motor Turn on transport motor Film jammed n
27. SAN YO ay 7 7 N 8700 411C Figure 4 10 4 8 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 2 3 Processor Motor M301 A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the processor drum 4 2 1 3 Close cover 8700 95C 5 Slide assembly in to align Remove motor with hole in frame Figure 4 11 Disconnect 8700 96C Figure 4 12 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 9 Service Manual 4 2 4 Processor Brushes A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the processor drum 4 2 1 Remove 2 Black 8700 97C Figure 4 13 4 10 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 2 5 Processor Communication Board PCB A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER Grasp the handle on the front of the pr
28. 1 40 Not Available TIE MOUNT Adhesive Backed 12 415 NotAvailable TIE WRAP 5 ones tae coe eel weed tee eee en eed aA ee eh ee a A 12 8 72 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 22 Electronics Enclosure Assembly Standalone continued Item No Part Number Description Qty 42 Not Availabl r CHAMPS 04 ax GG ae EE NG Ee NGA el AE RA ee 9 434 Not Avallable 2 SHIELD 0222 2283 eek NI RE HAN ere ik OO a LR ite MAR eek Bk ka 7 44 Not Available SHIELDING Electrical 23 45 26 1004 3945 9 FASTENER 4 40 THD X 5 12 46 26 1002 3977 6 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 8 0 32 47 26 1003 7120 7 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 12 48 26 1009 7311 9 NUT Lock Metric M4 with nylon insert 9 49 2 Not Avallable 22 GUIDE omiso rl e ANAN edt a aa Lan la aed ee eer 4 50 Not Available LABEL Damage Static Electricity 51 78 8016 5859 8 RING Retaining External Eng 4 52 26 1011 4695 4 TAPE Foam 125 T X 500 W Bulk AR 53 Not Available HARNESS ASSEMBLY Module Interconnect 1 54 Not Available
29. 47 48 49 Sd 52 53 54 56 57 58 59 60 26 1003 7120 7 62 63 64 65 66 61 Part Number 78 8094 5854 6 12 7996 1717 5 78 8094 5858 7 78 8094 5870 2 78 8095 9331 8 Not Available Not Available 78 8095 9435 7 DY 1102 0703 1 DY 1102 0723 9 26 1001 0585 2 Not Available 26 1003 7115 7 26 1003 7116 5 26 1003 7119 9 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 42 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 0 Sems Ext Tooth SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M5 X 0 8 X 10 0 Sems External Tooth 4 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 20 0 Sems External Tooth 8 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M5 X 0 8 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 7 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M5 X 0 8 X 12 0 Sems External Tooth 2 26 1003 7121 5 26 1003 7123 1 26 1003 7487 0 26 1003 7492 0 26 1003 7124 9 Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly continued Description Qty SPADE FOAM saa A EE 2 SPRING Cprsn 720 OD X 072 Wire Dia X 2 00 1 SPRING Cable Retract 0 0 000 a 1 E EE le EE 1 SPRING Pivot Plates 242582444 tee NG AL ae ada ds 1 LABEL Damage State Elet sie raie bites bebe adhe d PG ds id 1 LABEL Warning Power Distribution 1 IBLOGK SIP ee Beal at EE we 1 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M4 X 0 7 X25
30. 78 8005 7119 8 12 7996 2818 0 Figure 8 15 Processor Entrance Assembly Description PROCESSOR ENTRANCE ASSEMBLY HOUSING Entrance 24 ees ask eta Ade er Ma ae SHUTTER Entrance ROLLER Slotted NIP Blue BRACKET Slide Processor Entrance SHART Emtrance sc GAN oka a Dis SPRING Compression 180 OD X 020 Wire Dia RING Retaining External E Ring BEARING 1260 BORE X 1718 OD X 078 W BEARING BALL 1250 ID X 2500 OD BEARING 251 ID X 297 OD X 250 RING Retaining External E Ring 1202688 2001 May Rev M 8 56 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 16 Processor Assembly 8 57 2001 May Rev M 1202688 Service Manual Figure 8 16 Processor Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty 0 78 8095 9400 1 PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY 0 0 00 cece eee teens 1 1 78 8094 5660 7 EXIT ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 20 1 3 78 8095 9490 2 COOLING ZONE Perforated 1 4 78 8094 5838 9 SLIDE Two Member 1 5 78 8094 5839 7 SLIDE Three Member 1 6 78 8095 9399 5 DRIVE PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY 1 7 78 8095 9441 5 PROCESSOR LOCK ASSEMBLY
31. PIN Present Rollback See Note 1 1 3 Not Available BRACKET Sensor Rollback See Note 1 1 4 78 8094 5129 3 990 SWITCH ASSEMBLY Cartridge Present Sensor SW604 1 5 Not Available SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 Sems Ext T See Note 1 4 6 Not Available RING Retaining External E Ring See Note 1 2 Note 1 Order ROLLBACK ASSEMBLY 7E2665 if item 1 2 3 5 or 6 is needed 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 35 Service Manual Figure 8 10 Pickup Module Assembly 15 1202688 2001 May Rev M 8 36 Item z 2 WT 0 Jo O1 RB D A Part Number 78 8094 5789 4 78 8092 5477 0 Not Available Not Available 8 8094 5744 9 78 8094 5709 2 78 8094 5179 8 78 8094 5819 9 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 10 Pickup Module Assembly Description Qty PICKUP MODULE ASSEMBLY 8700 1 PICKUP MODULE ASSEMBLY 8500 244 Lagao og heey i ae eed Eu 1 CASING PICKUP EE 1 PLATE WRIST ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 11 1 VACUUM ARM ASSEMBLY EE 1 PICKUP MOTOR ASSEMBLY Ratio 18 1 1 VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY anG naan A a ANA KNA ena 1 S PICKUP VALVE ASSEMBLY 22222020202 0 c cece eee eee eens 1 26 1011 6768 7 BEARI
32. e KR 8700 124C 4 Remove 2 Remove 2 Figure 4 76 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 67 Service Manual 4 8 7 Power Switch SW805 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 L gt Note When reassembling check the labels on the wires to ensure that they are connected to the correct terminals The detail balloon in Figure 4 77 indicates the terminal numbers Remove 2 8700 146C Figure 4 77 4 68 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 8 8 Supply Door Interlock SW806 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the front panel 4 1 1 Disconnect RCA 4 8700 120C Figure 4 78 Remove 2 8700 121C Figure 4 79 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 69 Service Manual 4 8 9 Supply Door Solenoid Y801 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardou
33. 10 Lift up the end of the rollback module slightly and remove the Distribution Board and attached cables from the recessed base area Cock the board so the right side is up and lift it out of the recess 11 Carefully slide the rollback module out of the IMAGER L gt Note When you replace the module in the machine tip the left side of the Distribution Board down to insert it into the base recessed area 4 44 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl Recess in Looped Sg 3 base cable Distribution ba Board E ART LET LU 5 Ss Remove 2 y Mo A SECH Lei Disconnect OM ng WEE A H vA f 8700 73C Figure 4 53 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 45 Service Manual 4 5 2 Rollback Motor M601 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the rollback module 4 5 1 gt Note When reassembling be sure to line up the flat parts of the motor shaft and the rollback roller Br Remove M2 5 Allen O Advance roller until it is approximately 1 2 away from its home position Remove 3
34. 8700 148A Figure 4 94 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 83 Service Manual 4 10 Electronics Enclosure 4 10 1 Translator Daughter Board TDB A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Caution To avoid damage to sensitive electronic components always wear an anti static strap when 4 84 handling PWAs or EPROMs 2 Disconnect cable s 3 Remove screws 4 4 Slide out module GO D E Figure 4 95 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 10 2 Interface Boards DIB FIB VIB A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Caution To avoid damage to sensitive electronic components always wear an anti static strap when handling PWAs or EPROMs 2 Disconnect cable s 3 Remove screws 5 4 Slide out module Figure 4 96
35. No Unblocked Is this Be 2nd failure Run rollback Ub to motor to p 1 Revolution unblock rollback CCW home sensor No Energize dear NO gt gt alge door closed solenoid 2 Rollback home sensor hi 2 Insert Cartridge Message Yes Blocked Rollback home Rollback motor sensor failed failed 8700 202A Figure 7 8 Load Cartridge Sequence 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 11 Service Manual 7 4 2 Open Cartridge Lid Refer to Figure 7 9 for a flowchart of the cartridge lid opening process 7 12 Tongue depressor sensor low No Yes Blocked Tongue depressor Turn on rollback sensor failed motor CW Run rollback motor to home position Rollback distance count reached 2 Cartridge open sensor failed Yes Unblocked Yes Turn off rollback motor Actuate tongue depressor solenoid Tongue depressor sensor failed Tongue depressor sensor go hi No Supply cartridge could not be opened 8700 209A Figure 7 9 Open Cartridge Lid Sequence 1202688 2001 May Rev M S ection 7 Troubleshootin 7 4 3 Read RF Tag Refer to Figure 7 10 for a flow chart of the RF tag read process 2001 May Rev M 1202688 As indicated in memory Is cartridge for this RF tag empty Close then open cartridge by
36. at the rear of the cabinet Pull the cable across the top of the card cage Connect the fiber optic cable to the appropriate fiber optic connectors on the local fiber interface Refer to Figure 2 28 Secure the cable using the hook and loop material on top of the card cage Connect the fiber optic cable to the DPRI at the rear of the 8700 8500 IMAGER Refer to Figure 2 28 Local Fiber B Lead Interface DPRI CH B P cH8 REMOTE Fiber Optic Cable 0 CH A GEM zo OSD KZ ma oo O A Lead O 70 Figure 2 28 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 2 4 Switch and Jumper Settings 2 4 1 UKEIB Caution The switches in the UKEIB must be set before any cables are connected to it If the switches are not set correctly when cables are connected components within the UKEIB may be damaged Caution Use only approved cables and ensure that the cables are connected to the proper connectors on the UKEIB If unapproved cables are used or cables are connected incorrectly components within the UKEIB may be damaged L gt Note Refer to Figure 2 29 on the following page for switch locations Signal Path SW1 determines which signal path is enabled within the UKEIB The various control sources require different signal paths Set the switches as indicated in the table on the following page Host Connector Signals SW2 determines which signals will be present on Pins
37. 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 49 Service Manual 4 5 6 RF Tag Interface Board and RF Reader Board 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove the rollback module 4 5 1 Rotate the carriage assembly fully forward and place the module upside down on a work bench Remove four nuts from the circuit board cover Figure 4 58 Remove the cover Unplug two cables from the RF Tag Interface Board Lift the two boards free from the eight snap top standoffs Separate the two circuit boards E Or a ee Remove cover Bottom View Figure 4 58 4 50 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 5 7 RF Antenna Board Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the rollback module 4 5 1 and set it right side up on a work bench gt Note Move the rollback carriage as necessary to access parts in the following steps Remove four screws to free the RF Antenna Board Figure 4 59 Turn the rollback module upside down R
38. FASTENER Jack Socket Assembly 1 28 Not Available LABEL Hot Surface 2 29 96 0000 1872 9 GASKET eenma net eee eee AR 30 Not Available PROCESSOR FRAME ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 17 1 31A 6E7372 PROCESSOR DRUM ASSEMBLY Domestic See Figure 8 18 1 31B 3E5526 PROCESSOR DRUM ASSEMBLY OUS See Figure 9 19 1 32 Not Available LABEL Sharp Objects 2 45004 a le E dented bea EE mers 1 33 96 0000 0939 7 BARRIER Air 1 34 78 8095 9481 1 ROD Support Air Stop src he ee e Coe deere Rear 1 35 78 8095 9484 5 SUPPORT Rod Left Hand 1 36 78 8095 9482 9 SUPPORT Rod Right Hand 1 37 78 8095 9405 0 PROCESSOR BRUSH ASSEMBLY 1 38 78 8095 9451 4 MOUNT Pull Handle 1 39 42 0013 9498 2 FILM STRIPPER ASSEMBLY See NO TAG 1 41 78 8094 5445 3 GUIDE FILM ENTRANCE 0 0 00 ccc cette eee 1 42 78 8094 5130 1 850 SWITCH ASSEMBLY 2222220202000 1 43 78 8162 1035 1 BEARING EE 1 8 58 1202688 2001 May Rev M Item No 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 O 52 53 54 55 56 BP a 60 61 62 63 64 68 69 70 71 72 73
39. Phone Fix Operator Correctable 1 Cause EIB is locked up Solution Power cycle the EIB 2 Cause No power to the EIB Solution Have the customer check power to the EIB Are EIB power lights on On Site Technician Correctable 1 Cause Wrong type EIB is selected in MPC Solution Reconfigure MPC Setup IMS System 2 Cause Fiber optic cable is bad Tech Tip Use a flashlight to test the fiber or reconnect the fiber to a comm port and a UKEIB with 969 keypad Solution Replace or reterminate the cable A crimp termination kit for fiber optic cable is available via the Fed Ex Tool Bank 3 Cause DEIB Transfer Clock Speed e Two jumpers in the DEIB specify either single 10 MHz or dual 12 5 MHz transfer clock speed Refer to 8700 8500 IMAGER or 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER installation procedure e When a DEIB is connected to an 8700 8500 IMAGER it must always be set for single 10 MHz transfer clock speed This is the factory default setting e When a DEIB is connected to an 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER it must be set to match the Input Module jumper setting Refer to installation procedure for MULTI INPUT MANAGER Solution Try the EIB on a different Input Module or the other port on the FIB Be sure to configure the new Input Module or port for the type of EIB you are connecting 7 30 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 3 EC48 No End of File EOF Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message E
40. SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 0 Sems External Tooth 4 25 26 1003 7487 0 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 20 0 Sems External Tooth 2 26 77 8007 4484 7 BUSHING Snap Nylon 0 ccc ccc cence eee nena 1 27 ea Not Availabl 2 ADHESIVE ege a Santen Pea Nana AR 28 78 8094 5749 8 y RELAY Vacuum Pickup DiR we TA aay wae has 1 29 78 8094 5929 6 BRACKET Connector Support 1 30 78 8094 5742 3 SPRING Extension Pickup 2 31 78 8092 5510 8 SHIELD See Note 1 1 Note 1 Prior to Serial Numbers 87001800 order 8700 Sensor Shield Kit 78 8092 4184 3 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 37 Service Manual Figure 8 11 Plate Wrist Assembly 8 38 1202688 2001 May Rev M Item o z Se 0 JO O1 P DN ch Part Number Not Available Not Available 78 8094 5087 3 78 8094 5741 5 78 8094 5088 1 26 1003 7121 5 78 8094 5694 6 78 8094 5607 8 78 8094 5614 4 78 8094 5606 0 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 11 Plate Wrist Assembly Description Qty PLATE WRIST ASSEMBLY 2222202020202 ccc cece ete eens 1 PLATE Wrist PICKUPS voice dech A ebe dch da EA det LANA Ls dE AN 1 HOLDER Sensors Pickup aio dek ds ated MERA a da NG we 1 SPRING Sen
41. When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Disconnect Remove 4 8700 05C Remove 4 Figure 4 36 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 31 Service Manual 4 3 12 Gate Solenoid Y403 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position YO A Disconnect 8700 07C Figure 4 37 4 32 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 3 13 Multifeed Board MFB 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the ass
42. running rollback motor CCW then CW Supply cartridge empty Bad Cartridge ID 8700 204A Figure 7 10 Read RF Tag Sequence 7 13 Service Manual 7 4 4 Position Pickup Arm Refer to Figure 7 11 for a flow chart of the pickup arm positioning process Run pickup motor to move pickup arm up Is picker up sensor hi Yes Unblocked Run pickup motor to move pickup arm down move down Is picker up sensor low MPC Yes Blocked programmed Notes Pickup motor and arm position sensors are tested in power up diagnostics Error codes 221 224 Pickup arm could not be moved to proper position Turn on vacuum pump Move pickup arm down Pickup arm could not be moved to proper position Is film out sensor low Yes Actuated No Blocked Yes Continue moving ar down to Cups contact film overdrive by 26 steps Figure 7 11 Position Pickup Arm Sequence 8700 211A 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 4 5 Pick Up Film Refer to Figure 7 12 for a flow chart of the film pickup process Turn on vacuum pump and wait 0 2 seconds Run pickup arm to top Turn off vacuum pump Move pickup i arm to to Supply cartridge position g empty i Move arm Turn off pickup Ga neon ep to last pickup motor and position vacuum pump gi SE Wait 1 second To
43. 23 m26 14 CLK FILTER FILTER 8 ipe ei 8 15 D ge VI ing GE e Y AXIS DRIVE y Los controL 2 9 T K A EENG l SE 4 5XVCC 5VCC 5V 2 aoe 10 28 gt 10 19 SERVO CONTROLLER DAES eS FILTER FILTER E o THRU CN1007 sak LD9 na Se Y LATCH d gt 5RVCC 5V O o ON SHEET 2 LD10 al e 16 BIT DAC VI D o x LUS EU AE sal g Iren mi a1 Y DAC BITS e TEMP CONTROLLER Ahn Al aaa da SIT D A eee tr so eae E SEET e el Ade bo ES ARES DGND CN706 7 L lt O lt x CO lt a gt aco CN707 S d Je a a E NE em om ONG P2 1 2 3 4 5 20 273334 35 40 54 57 58 61 62 63 64 P1 12 3 4 624 25 27282930 535657 61 62 63 64 32 YCNTL1 gt 32 26 2 LES LES 9 l CN1602 1259 455 6 TO MEZZANINE CONNECTOR CN1212 ON SCB SHEET 2 TO MEZZANINE CONNECTOR CN1211 ON SCB SHEET 2 14 TONI 14 27 3 AGND AGND 8 Dei 3 33 OMCON 33 28 4 AGND AGND ia 44 ST DGND 15 ES S AWSW 17V S a a palo LINESYNC a a 17V SW 47V los 35 POND 35 32 pA DGND 3 USCH E 17fa 17 33 9 2 36 2 YTEMP pa E al D 5V FUSED TO CN1302 ON MIB 18 PARTEST e Ge Jl AN SHEET 2 37s _OMILOCKOPEN JL E 19 5V XPLL 5V CN708 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 l 191 19 37 13 TS 38 14 l 15 INTLK RTN 40 16 l 8 CN703 13 25 12 24 11 23 10 22 9 21 8 20 7 196 18 5 17 4 16 3 15 2 14 1 CN704 1 62738495 Sol alol Aea Wy OJH A BULKHEAD lcl lelolala PA olola kal ka Ko Ko Ko Ko CN1012 13 25 12 24 11 23 10 22 9 21 8 20 7 19 6 18 5 174 16 3 15
44. 552 zone 2 553 zone 3 Summary The temperatures of one of the three heater zones is not within 70 F of the other two Phone Fix Operator Correctable On Site Technician Correctable 1 Problem EC 552 or EC 553 Slow warm up drum heater fail Cause Heater fuse is blown The current fuses are known to have about a 3 to 4 year life or less before they fail due to age A new style fuse is being designed L gt Note Some of the early IMAGER s did not have the connection clip soldered to the fuse leads This created a poor connection with resultant premature failure of the fuses Solution If the fuse opened due to age replace all three fuses Refer to the Service Manual disassembly section Solder connection clips to the fuse leads using a heat sink to keep the heat away from the fuse Tech Tip The reported temperatures from the processor are logged and can be retrieved via MPC Log Printer Log Processor 7 98 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 65 EC554 Processor over temp Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X L554 PROCESSOR ALM 17 P554 is not operational OVER_TEMP Summary If the temperature from any of the three heater zones is reported above 290 F EC554 Processor Over Temp is declared and the SCB turns off power to the heaters The top cover must be lifted to clear this error Sequence
45. CLAMP Nylon e copas apa ENEE REENEN ER nies heed deb wee 1 55 26 1008 9104 8 WASHER Metric Plain M 4 57 Not Available CLAMP Cable Nylon 3 8 uma daa hn paa pen eae NAAN PENE A ee 1 58 Not Available CLAMP Nylon EE 1 60 26 1007 2397 7 NUT Mach Metric M4 X 0 7 Keps 3 61 26 1011 6809 9 WASHER Metric Lock M4 External Tooth 3 62 26 1011 6808 1 WASHER Metric Lock M5 External Tooth 1 63 26 1011 6643 2 NUT Metric Mach M5 X 0 8 Keps 1 64 78 8092 4164 5 CABLE ASSEMBLY Panel Ground 1 65 Not Available SHIELD Flat Cable Camp 5 66 26 1011 6671 3 SHIELD Ferrite erioa a A E a eet eens 1 67 78 8094 5485 9 CABLE ASSEMBLY Platen Ground 1 68 26 1003 7121 5 SCREW M4 vm 9 69A 78 8092 4054 8 FIBER INTERFACE BOARD FIB includes faceplate See Note 1 AR 69B 78 8092 4055 5 VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD VIB includes faceplate See Note 1 AR 69C 78 8092 4053 0 DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD DIB includes faceplate See Note 1 AR 70A 78 8092 4081 1 TRANSLATOR DAUGHTER BOARD Copper TDB C includes faceplate See Note 1 AR 70B 78 8092 4083 7 TRANSLATOR DAUGHTER BOARD Fi
46. Image acquisition parameters are transmitted on system power up or reset to each interface over the fiber back channel The EIB acknowledges the parameters with a status response over the forward channel The system software may elect to re transmit these parameters at any time such as after a failed acquisition or a parameter change The FIB interfaces to the IPB through the image source interface connector CN1107 It provides a 12 bit image output to the IPB along with an input parity error detected signal and a strobe The FIB receives its parameters over a 10 bit parameter bus and returns command status over a 2 bit command bus Both functions provide a strobe signal The FIB receives its power clock and power up reset from the IPB through CN1107 As an acquisition is taking place the EIB transmits the digital image data over the fiber forward channel The FIB receives and reconstructs the image data and transfers it to the IPB through CN1107 in parallel form 6 14 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation Both the FIB and IPB can detect errors in the transmission of the image When this occurs the IPB may request a re transmission of the image or image line depending on the transfer protocol The FIB sends a re transmit request to the proper EIB which in turn re transmits the image or image line Fiber Interface Board Block Diagram am FIBER RX O XILINX XILINX z p CNTL e EPROM O FIBER T
47. Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 0 Sems External Tooth 4 23 26 1003 7487 0 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 20 0 Sems External Tooth 2 24 26 1008 9102 2 WASHER Metric Plain MA 2 25 26 1011 6202 7 SWITCH Interlock 16 A 250 VAC 1 26 26 1011 7793 4 BEARING Ball 3125 ID X 5000 OD X 1562 W 1 27 78 8656 4000 3 RING Retaining External E Ring 2 2 28 Not AVailabl ADAESIVE 2 52 228088 ceo ee ee ee ae ee es eae ee ee AR 29 NO Availables ADHESIVE 2 EEN dea am ne ae DA te wat PANA dad reed AR 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 27 1202688 2001 May Rev M Item 2001 May Rev M Part Number 78 8094 5811 6 78 8094 9035 8 Not Available 78 8094 5895 9 78 8094 9039 0 78 8094 5814 0 26 1003 7120 7 26 1004 0699 5 26 1002 3843 0 78 8094 5816 5 26 1011 6787 7 26 1003 8206 3 78 8094 5130 1 78 8094 5513 8 26 1004 3945 9 Not Available Not Available 26 1007 2397 7 26 1011 6812 3 78 8094 5904 9 78 8094 5905 6 26 1011 6788 5 26 1003 7778 2 Not Used 26 1008 5590 2 78 8092 4036 5 26 1011 6809 9 78 8094 9054 9 1202688 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 6 Filter Housing Assembly
48. Problem Memory full condition locks up the host Cause MPC HOST MemFull is set to the wrong message Solution GE and Picker should be set to MOV For others refer to the TRM Technical Reference Manual Or try the other setting in MPC There are only two choices MOV or BSY 2 Cause Film pickup problems are slowing down the system Solution Check the error log for EC166 pickup tries Refer to EC166 for more information on pickup problems 3 Cause Other problems such as jams or AIQC problems are slowing down the system Solution Look in the MPC Error Log 7 44 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 13 EC116 Pickup arm could not be moved to proper position Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message J Input Log W Output Log Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L116 PICKUP CUP ARM UPPER ERROR ALM 60 P116 X is not operational 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 45 Service Manual 7 6 14 EC121 Optics module attenuator error Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log OMX IM 952 Host Message Message alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L121 ALM 60 P121 X is not operational ATTENUATOR ERROR Summary At power up the SCB drives the optics attenuator to its home position If the attenuator cannot be moved to the home position after multiple attempts EC121 Attenuator Error is declared The imager must be power cycled to clear the error Sequence of Events At power up the a
49. Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing 7 62 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 31 EC173 Platen door open Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Exposure cover is open K215 A cover is open on None ALM 16 P173 laser imager X Summary Either the platen door laser interlock or the left door laser interlock is open Sequence of Events The MIB distributes a constant 5V to the Optics Module In addition 17 Volts from the MIB to the optics module is interlocked through the two optics interlocks platen door and left door laser interlocks The interlocks provide the ground return path for the Laser Power Relay coil on the MIB When the relay coil is energized both doors closed the relay contacts provide 17V power to the optics module and provide a 17V signal to the SCB which tells the SCB that the optics doors are closed This signal can be monitored at the service port between the MIB and SCB on pin 58 It should be high 17V with both doors closed and low LASER INTLK OPEN with the doors open or the cable disconnected LED DS6K3 on the MIB will light amber color when 17V is being delivered to the optics and the SCB Phone Fix Operator Correctable Close the platen door or the left door Make sure the platen door latch is turned fully clockwise On Site Technician Correctable Ohm out the optics platen door interlock and the left door laser interlock
50. SW503 Pickup Picker Mid U Unblocked High 11 TP7 SW504 Pickup Picker Down U Blocked L SW501 Pickup Film Out U Actuated L SW502 Pickup Double Feed Flag Actuated L SW405 Exposure Platen Entry Flag Actuated L SW402 Exposure Platen Bottom U Blocked L SW701 Exposure Platen Exit Flag Actuated L SW403 Transport Mid Transport Flag Actuated L SW404 Transport Processor Flag Actuated L 24 Entry SW302 Transport Exit Tray U Actuated SW304 Filter Filter Present Flag Actuated Low 3 TP3 SW801 SW405 not used on later production machines w w w w w w w w w w w w W O O O O O O O O O O O O O 7 4 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin SCB Service Port CN1207 2100 1 ee yee ee ee Pin2 Gnd 28 Pin A0 AEN 00 ee ee 40 00 39 Figure 7 3 7 2 4 Sensor to SCB Schematic Refer to Figure 7 4 for a functional illustration of a single sensor line flag type 8700 329A e With a flag type sensor unblocked actuated the sensor collector shorts to ground and the SCB sees a low e Just the opposite is true for a U type sensor When the sensor is blocked it conducts to ground and the SCB sees a low e f either type sensor is disconnected the pull up resistor on the SCB will cause the line to go high SCB 5vcc RFI Filter 3 10K Digital niy Logic E SE Cir
51. SW804 Left Door Laser Interlock SW803 Left Door Interlock M501 Y501 SW502 SW501 Pickup Vacuum Film Out Picker Down Motor Valve Sensor Sensor M502 Vacuum Pump K501 Vacuum Power Relay SW503 SW504 Picker Up Picker Mid Sensor Sensor PICKUP ASSEMBLY 500 Cartridge Present Sensor SW601 Rollback Home M601 SES Rollback Motor ROLLBACK ASSEMBLY 600 RF TAG RP enna SE EE Interface Board Cartridge Board Open Sensor Q R 10 H188_3004EC Kodak and DryView are trademarks Printed in U S A 1202688 M may01 EASTMAN KODAK COMPANY Rochester NY 14650 HEALTH IMAGING
52. clockwise to increase the gap 3 There are three locking slots in each adjustment screw Determine which locking slot is closest to the hole for the lock screw then rotate the adjustment screw so this slot lines up with the hole Install and tighten the lock screws 4 Recheck the measurement 3 6 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 3 Adjustments 3 3 Densitometer Calibration Specification The A D Out Gain value must be 1640 100 and the A D Out Offset value must be 20 2 L gt Note This procedure should be performed whenever a new densitometer is installed It should also be performed if the densitometer is suspected of causing AIQC problems however be aware that the densitometer may function perfectly even when not adjusted to specification i e calibrating a densitometer that is out of specification will not necessarily solve an AIQC problem Special Tools Maintenance Personal Computer MPC MPC for Windows software package Measurement 1 Connect the MPC to the MPC port on the rear of the IMAGER 2 Power up the MPC and start the MPC for Windows program 3 Open the Operations menu and select Diagnostics 4 Do either of the following to select the processor subsystem e Click on the PROC button e Open the Operations menu and select Subsystem Processor Select the Densi button to display the Densitometer Test window 6 Check the values displayed for A D Out Gain and A D Out Offset If either value
53. gt APPLICATION SPECIFIC IC ASIC gt COMPAR 3 PARITY 5 Leeder E HOST PAR AMPL BUFF OMSTB STROBE c gt m13 IG AZ a HOST PARITY PARITY EVALUATION SOS gt OMSTB 27 Ja STROBE 14 5 al algo HOST PAR pa MOST FILTERS Y PERSONALITY REGISTER 3 28 93 E mal HOST STB Se Z OPTO IMAGE MODE CONTROL L sa d SOL Ka pie COUPLERS HOST STROBE Al Y SYSTEM STATUS OMSOL FIL OPTO 2224 WA poo lao HOSTST log DS18 Y PATTERN GENERATION CONTROL COUPLER 30 34 SOL 34 LED7 DS15 S Se NOT USED Le X AXIS DRIVE 151 L HOST SOL 29 Le Le HOST SOL ADDR age a e RESONANT SCANNER si HOST SOL P SCANNER DRIVER 34 30 AMPL i i i SYNC l a 16 HOST TX Sab BUFF CN1007 CN702 CN705 lt HOST TX TXD FCNTLO ga Sera E U DGND a OPTICS ENGINE KILLX a 20 20 2 gt GE Jl HOST Rxs ps E 5 C ONT A S BOARD OEB POWER R WE FIL OPTO RXD 21 DGND 21 4 PIXEL CLOCK gt l m36 HOST D 34 PENS SOUFRE YA 3 ECNTL2 ei 3 5 EXPOSURE CORRECTION LOW SPEED 5 VCC 22 DGND 22 6 DIODE INTENSITY CONTROL FIBER CHANNEL Be SOL 19 35 ps2 SVCC 4 ONIL m 4 7 DIFFERENTIAL RECEIVERS CABLE DIFF ke JC ra ko v 23 23 8 e PING PONG FIFOS FROM L XMTR ten Salers RcvR he 36 MA lt 45 VEC a ER Le el V 5 PONIL gt 5 9 e Y AXIS CONTROL HOST Le 24 37 2 NG mog 10 X AXIS CONTROL l F 40 DS1 Gre gt 6 11 e STATUS DETECTION l 45XVCC i 447 LED 5 a LD2 da ha VOLTAGE REGS gt SCH REG REG 26
54. 14 414 2 Y402 NEED SOL FILTER 6 6 16 e 3 8 LASER TP4I6 D AN SW407 CN406 ES ga na ALAN LED WA RXD E ee DEL dess F8 D1 PU POWER RECSY A TONGDEPSLA A a e SE PI LA TONGUE P1 ARE 23 23 18 5VCC 10 la 25 2416 16 416 2 Y401 DEP sot LCD 7 KEN x 7 7 PWR LED 19 TXD l 5 PWR DWN BRN e E KI CN503 EA s DISPLAY 5 rh gt gt ATTN Ge A ATIN LED Ka Ca sl SE 12 or a erz 7 2505 CN50115 505 1 VACUUM LE VCC Ap A 2506 506 2 Ys01 S z gt gt READY ba pa LCD RST a 413 26 D VALVE Weg 4 o lt 8 8 22 2 BUZR o P417 DM 24V CART 5 25 25 LCD AD 24 RESET QUEUED STEPPER TIMING CN1210 Y CN1309 o CARTDRSLA 8 2821 1 wn DOOR 6 42 42 LCD WR 26 SERIAL Ne DGND q o GC 27 2822 2 i ie 10 LCD CE ma lt lt MODULE Le Le 2 MIE CON 2 y CNE 9 ee K801 SoL 27 27 30 E Se K801 _ 10 ep sc CID Se DRIVERS e13 OA HOME 3 pasow IT 524V Se SE PROCESSOR LCD DO RFI A K i fe 4 4 PROCPWRRLY A O POWER Hk vee VCC Na Nia LCD D1 E FILTERS 5 CA EN gt 5 Si 29 2899 RELAY 12t BUZZER 29 29 DE 36 gt gt gt OA F R ee NEE 13t 46 46 2 38 SYSTEM S OA H F wk e E CN717 14 VOLUME 14 14 LCD DS 40 CHIP INTEGRATION OA HZ aN mal HAAV 11 2711 N 711 1 PLATEN lt LCD D4 1 MODULE 8 gt 8 PLATBOT Y 5 tte 31 31 LCD D5 42 SELECT ODU P DGND 9 JL 30 2712 12 712 2 706 KICKER 5 16 48 48 LCD Da 44 10 NC 10 TP4H09 WWW 24V Kaye PLATEN 17 fa eS 16 16 LCD D7 ng F ROW1 5 11 NC 11 PLATMID D 12 203 E e LI Y705 18k 33 33 LcD 48 SE 45 CART MTERN li
55. 2 The acquire command is received by the IPB and the REQUEST line from DEIB DIB to host goes high e When the Keypad Acquire button is pressed or a host Acquire command is received The IPB then commands the DEIB DIB to request the first line of data from the host The DEIB DIB does this by asserting the REQUEST line high to the host L gt Note The DEIB XMT LED or DIB REQ LED will go on whenever the REQ line is asserted However it is only a general indicator of the state of the REQUEST line During normal transmission it flashes on and off so fast that its off state cannot be detected 3 HOST responds to DEIB s REQUEST line by asserting its STROBE line high When the host sees the REQUEST lines are high it sets the data lines for the first message containing the image size data pixels per line and image lines if in header mode Most hosts use Header Line mode The host then causes the STROBE line to go high 4 DEIB converts host parallel data to serial data and transfers it to the FIB The DEIB converts the parallel data to serial data and transfers it to the FIB or Input module The rate of the serial transmission between DEIB and FIB or Input Module is determined by the jumpers on the DEIB matching jumpers on the input module For the 8700 8500 IMAGER they must be set to 10 MHZ 5 DEIB reads header data from host When the DEIB sees the STROBE lines from the host go active it will read the data on the lines
56. 2 14 1 CN1011 1 62738495 LOS POWER LOS ATTENUATION TO CN1304 THRU CN1012 ON SHEET 2 TO CN1307 THRU CN1011 ON SHEET 2 9 10 H188 3006EC Kodak DryView 8700 8500 LASER IMAGER MCS Functional Block Diagram Sheet 2 2001 March Rev L 1202688 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X
57. 4 8 4 Top Cover Interlock SW802 A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER 3 Lift the handle on the front of the processor exit assembly and slide the assembly out of the IMAGER Disconnect 2 8700 117C 4 Remove 2 Figure 4 74 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 65 Service Manual 4 8 5 Left Door Machine Interlock SW803 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left door y Disconnect 2 Y o PA K Remove 2 CL amp Remove 2 O 8700 139C Remove 2 Figure 4 75 4 66 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 8 6 Left Door Laser Interlock SW804 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left door Disconnect 2 Remove 2
58. 5 and 9 of the HOST connector For normal operation set SW2 to the center position If an OEM fiber optic kit is being installed set SW2 as directed in the kit instructions Si Path Enabled SW1 Switch Positions ignal Pa nable 1 2 3 4 5 6 SS 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 17 Service Manual SW E FIBER OPTIC HOST XMT o o Ei GEN Gi KEYPAD IMAGER A CH B CH 1 Of 3 E AT RCV o o Figure 2 29 2 4 2 Copper TDB Jumpers W1 and W4 Jumpers W1 and W4 configure J1 and J2 for RS422 or RS232 input W1 configures J1 Comm 0 and W4 configures J2 Comm 1 Set the jumper to the left for RS232 and to the right for RS422 J2 Comm 1 J1 Comm 0 Figure 2 30 Switches SW1 and SW2 Switches SW1 and SW2 control which signals are routed to pins 5 and 9 of J1 and J2 SW1 controls J1 Comm 0 and SW2 controls J2 Comm 1 Each switch can be placed in one of three positions as described in the following table Caution SW1 and SW2 must be set correctly An incorrect setting could result in damage to the equipment connected to the TDB and or blow fuses on the TDB UKEIB Genesis Cable Kodak Fiber Optic Converter other RS422 hosts Center RTS CTS RS232 handshaking RTS output CTS input Currently not used may be used in the future for Toshiba host control Right Siemens external fiber opt
59. 60 Optics module temperature error P133 K204 Less than 20 sheets remain in supply cartridge P134 K218 None ALM 10 Supply cartridge empty ALM 16 P139 K209 L139 ALM 31 Bad cartridge ID P145 K209 L145 ALM 31 Unsupported media type P151 K202 L151 ALM 60 Optics module PLL error P154 K202 L154 ALM 60 NVRAM error P161 K211 L161 ALM 21 Film jammed on multifeed detector 7 24 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin PR ke Le osz alm Description P163 K211 L163 ALM 22 Film jammed after multifeed detector and before platen entrance sensor P164 K211 L164 ALM 23 Film jammed on platen entrance or exit sensor P165 K211 L165 ALM 26 Film jammed on mid transport sensor P166 L166 Multiple pickup attempts P171 L171 Supply door failed to open P173 K215 ALM 16 Platen door open P176 K210 L176 ALM 30 Supply cartridge could not be opened P177 K210 L177 ALM 31 Supply cartridge could not be closed P179 K215 ALM 16 Left side door open P202 Service override switch out None L200 Transmit parity error None L201 Module synchronization error None L202 Transmit memory out of bounds P203 K202 L203 ALM 60 Service override interlock failed P204 K202 L204 ALM 60 Supply door interlock failed P205 K202 L205 ALM 60 Top cover interlock failed P206 K202 L206 ALM 60 Left side door interlock failed P208 L208 Left side door could not be opened None L210 Acquire line buffer overflow Non
60. 8800 loopback test to verify data integrity from the output module Swapout between 969 IMAGER and 8700 8500 IMAGER The DPRI in the 8700 8500 IMAGER and the DPEIB in the 969 IMAGER have interchangeable boards 2001 May Rev M 1202688 se Ee bog Oe A H 1 0 nan 6 HIB Tx LED DS2 8 LFIBRxLED RXO flashes on flashes on 10 System 7 DPRI Tx LED 9 Rx 1 green controller flash n receives a flashes on asnes o reply MPC shows Flashlight beam Flashlight beam received does not change does change LED data 8700 243L 7 119 Service Manual SCB RX Data LED Troubleshooting SCB DS10J1 glows TX 3 4v Pin 7 TX Ov Pin 8 IPB Is the SCB receiving data from the IPB 8700 244L This is not an easy question to answer for the following reason As the IPB sends data the transmit lines will toggle polarity in theory this causes the DS10J1 to turn off momentarily The occurs so fast that the off condition of DS10J1 cannot be detected visually Complete the following steps to determine if the SCB is receiving data from the IPB 1 Using MPC set the baud rate to 2400 MPC Setup Output module Comm 0 2 Reset the IPB by pressing the reset button On power up the IPB tries to communicate with the SCB at 2400 baud This is an invalid baud rate and the SCB cannot decipher the IPB data at this baud rate However it will cause the DS10J1 LED to
61. AR CABLE Fiber Optic 500m 1652 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Fiber Optic 1000m 3300 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Keypad EEN 1 CABLE AS22251 Fina Hawa nara BING a KAN a AL Me AR GOABLE RS232 EE AR CABLE RS292 BO Riss Sate APAN PAGAN PAA PEN ta eee a GG ES AR CABLE Digital 3m 10 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Digital 10m 33 Ft See Note 2 nann AR CABLE Digital 30m 98 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Digital 60m 197 Ft See Note 21 AR CABLE Analog 3m 10 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Analog 10m 33 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Analog 30m 98 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Analog 60m 197 Ft See Note 2 AR RS232 to UKEIB Host Contr Adapt Cable 25 pin to 9 pin AR RS422 to UKEIB Host Contr Adapt Cable 37 pin to 9 pin AR ADAPTOR RS422 Connector Male Male AR ADAPTOR RS422 Connector Female Female AR DDIU to UKEIB Adapt Cable 37 pin M to 26 pin M AR CABLE Genesis GE 10m 33 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Genesis GE 30m 98 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Genesis GE 60m 197 Ft See Not
62. BRACKET Spring DFD 35542648 ova ee beth a eee es 1 BRACKET Beiler DFD 22 Zb pa LAAL See Ph Gai oad en PALA 1 BRACKET Block DFD 1 NPA 3 MANDREL DEED 2 ROLLER DED wes ai tenn A oa Pai da MAIL get Ph Monde Rina PRE 1 ABEARING DED wn std td ee ae NGA Get ee teas d ees 2 ABEOGK DED aa twit Seed ate teeth oe a OR atrial a a Patra ie 1 RING Retaining External E Ring 6 PAD FEET ED saca eases abt e reene an DRA AE ad DE bak o 2 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 0 Sems External TOOT EEN 28 ADHESIVE out ie Re Lagna a kaa ba that naa AR CYLINDER Gas Sprint kaan oes dibs nie ans 1 SCREW Shoulder 2490 X 3765 W 10 32 THD 2 BEARING 252 ID X 377 OD X 250 2 RING Retaining External E Ring ula nas BLK rr a 2 SPRING External 438 OD X 046 Wire Dia X 2 50 2 GASKET MATERIAL Filter Housing Not Shown AR 8 25 Service Manual Figure 8 5 FD Latch Assembly 1202688 2001 May Rev M 8 26 Item o z E Part Number 78 8094 5926 2 78 8094 5138 4 78 8656 4012 8 FD LATCH ASSEMBLY GATE DOOR SOLENOID ASSEMBLY Ek NEE SNE GN dee 1 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 5 FD Latch Assembly Description 1 2 RING Retaining External Eng 2 3 78 8032
63. EE ELE 26 DOND E E esse eRR eee RRRREREREREEE a Jagga AV STATIG 1 POND bat 29 ON CO 7 OO 212 2228 18 87 ES EE Ell 31414222 7 8 8 2 al olol H bai Ko Ko Ko Ko S 3 Ks SLINESYNC CN1302 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 CN1304 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 1817 16 151418121110 9 8 7 654821 CN1307 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 y P AKT 2128 Pear Wee Ta HEC NE DENSIT KEY LOCAL PANEL BOARD ORN B inea AE OT SS YTEMP BOARD A 1 E w e TPE CN301 CN303 PAS No Sd CN101 N N1205 2 4 6 8 4 Le 35 PAR TEST DS6K3 Vie TP515 CN1308 N 281 328 1 338 5VCC FILTER CN1003 CN1205 OMI LOCK OPEN 20A Na nr e CN1009 2340 1 1 LCD CON 1 EE 17VEE E 36 a NA Le ot TP5I7 HN 7 O E CN312 J1 34 34 5V Dee F oY YY E 37 PLL LASER a Il ee A 20 ES BOTTOM a de a men TICOLI a Y ba e COLT ee EE CN1303 POWER i HIM TP 24 A DENSIT 2 Row 35 35 coL 5 RFI CN1209 7 A 5 a TP6I2 D 1M 8 21 HI oy FAN OW1 DRE DS1P1 17V VIO 5VCC 124V 24V 4 ROWE 20 20 AOS H K Geesen FIT YEL 3 e MOTOR Le 22 CN807 ROW 3 DGND VCC Mt AGND BLU gt TEAM D AM 124V 5 Rows gt 4 4 ROW3 10 DS10J1 8 4 9 15 6 12 DRIVE so 4 2823 T vao LEFT SIDE 6 ROWS 37 37 S 11 Po ee A 23 2824 2 DOOR SOL x a ES oH ee TPIAT poong Es 1 BEND Ge gt O O O O MIBRST SOLENOID TP1J1 X VW 24V CN401 ons A Y R Nga ROW 14 ey j D 2 6 m OR E Z B DRIVE FEEDSLA 5 2413 13 413 1 TRANSPORT Y 12VEE e FILTER 29 22 Ehl Al eas FILTER po BED 7 4A o 24 2414
64. Figure 2 36 ACQUIRE O 000000 VIB Figure 2 37 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation EVEIB PS Main PWA OO 0000 Figure 2 38 L gt Note The following step refers to the gain pot in the VEIB The VIB and EVEIB have no gain pots they adjust the gain automatically With this exception the following step applies to the VEIB and the VIB EVEIB 10 Adjust the gain pot in the VEIB until the Sync LED turns on then continue turning the pot in the same direction for at least three full turns Refer to Figure 2 36 The Sync LED must stay on without flickering or acquires will fail There must be at least three full turns of the pot during which the Sync LED remains on steadily If not check the video amplitude The Double Gain parameter may need to be changed to the other setting When the Sync LED is on it indicates that the VEIB VIB EVEIB sees the video signal and is successfully detecting horizontal and vertical sync pulses The pixel clock has no effect on the state of the Sync LED If the Sync LED does not turn on when the gain pot is turned and the Enable LED is on either no video is present or the video that is present is completely unrecognizable to the VEIB VIB EVEIB the VEIB VIB EVEIB cannot detect horizontal or vertical sync pulses In this case e The video cable may be on the wrong port e The video signal amplitude may be
65. Li Li 24 t TP5I99 L TP2H3 TP2H6 TP2H4 TP2H5 ila EERE EES LESUE LESTER LET IIE ELA S BE CN1301 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 CN1305 43 2 1 CN1306 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 GE z alslalwit lz gt z gt Hs Oz aloja THERMAL SWITCH TO SERVICE a m E Sim us S MOTOR TEST POINT t SW CN1008 1 20 2 21 3 22 4 23 5 24 6 25 7 26 8 27 9 28 10 29 11 30 12 31 13 32 14 33 15 34 16 35 17 36 18 37 19 03 141251 4 7 15 CN1001 a Gel tc Pipa He CN Six 5552 e S EE EE EE EE lt gt lt a 3 SE SE SW1001 l E SRE N S Q Is ere de D D VIE mmm emmmer D k k D O lt 121 lt 24V ACTIVE SCOPE SERVICE l Pla gt CN1213 OVERRIDE l o MIB CN1303 a li l El a DC PWR TO SCB 137752 d deals 53 aly S CN1210 CN1309 CN1302 FENA che CN1013 4 2 3 5 6 131211 8 9 17 1510 CN1005 1 62738495 1 0 SCB MIB SCB MIB DC PWR TO IMS 2446 446 CN411 L INTERFACE INTERFACE 2445 ORN WHT MFEED2 445 5 CN1212 CN1211 fac Baao WHTBLU 17V al MEZZANINE DC PWR IN Sta 443 3 Es CONNECTORS p443 BLUWHT 17V j4 2 CN1204 N 2441 WHT GRN___AGND 441 91 CN711 BEAM PWR N U J rd MULTI FEED SCB N 2718 18 718 _1 PLATEN DOOR i on 19 719 2 Q LASER INTLK aes MULTI FEED BOARD 2719 CN1269 N1306 CNIS10 ANA I TIL LEFT DOOR NEW VERSION DRUM DC INPUT 4 vac MOT CN1305 l 2831 O _O LASER INTLK E 34 SW804 HEATER RESISTANCE 10 CN1202 Nicos E C DC PWR IN ZONE 1 97 96 Q DENSIT R 34 IFEB SCB
66. M4 A0 keps eee 3 26 1011 6809 9 WASHER Metric Lock M4 External Tooth 3 26 1011 6808 1 WASHER Metric Lock M5 External Tooth 1 26 1011 6643 2 NUT Metric Mach M5 X 0 8 Keps 1 78 8092 4164 5 CABLE ASSEMBLY Panel Ground 1 Not Available SHIELD Flat Cable Clamp is sens totter eet eee ek 2 26 1011 6671 3 SHIELD Ferrite 0 0 tet nee eee eee 1 78 8094 5485 9 CABLE ASSEMBLY Platen Ground 1 78 8056 4242 4 PWA Dual Printer Remote Interface Fiber 1 78 8094 5992 4 CABLE ASSEMBLY HIB Fiber 1 78 8092 4030 8 SUPPORT PCB 0 ccc cc nett tenes 1 78 8092 9058 0 PLATE Eng 1 78 8092 4033 2 PLATE Cover 1 26 1011 4075 9 NUT Hex 3 8 32 X 089 2 26 1002 2148 5 WASHER Metric Lock 377 ID X 507 OD X 022 T Internal Tooth 2 78 8094 9055 6 STANDOFF 222222200 ccc ccc dede aea ere rer rer 1 26 1002 5209 2 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric 4 40 X 625 4 1202688 8 77 Service Manual Figure 8 24 Electronics Fan Assembly 8700 377H Figure 8 24 Electronics Fan Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty 1 78 8094 5807 4 ELE
67. Metric M3 X 0 5 X 5L External Tooth 5 NUT Mach Metric M3 X 0 5 Keps External Tooth 4 SPRING Eller ia aa NN ant fake Meigs A Ps KANAN EE 2 WASHER Metric Lock M4 1 FILTER CASSETTE Processor makan sation STEE oad aad ete GE a 1 8 29 Service Manual Figure 8 7 Rollback Assembly RF Tag 1202688 2001 May Rev M 8 30 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 7 Rollback Assembly RF Tag Item No Part Number Description Qty O 7E2665 ROLLBACK ASSEMBLY coco 1 Not Available ROLLBACK CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 8 1 2 7E2664 TRAY Rollback auer a ET ied KG BANANA Lice ea oe tee a ede 1 3 7E2829 ROLLBACK RIGHT SPRING ASSEMBLY includes Rollback Motor 1 4 7E2830 ROLLBACK LEFT SPRING ASSEMBLY 1 5 Not Available ROLLBACK CARTRIDGE SENSOR ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 9 1 6 78 8094 5169 9 HARNESS ASSEMBLY Rollback Switch 601 1 Tia A E2827 ons cites ROLLBACK SHAFT ASSEMBLY Includes SHAFT TEETH and 4 item 41 SCREWS asar a Aza 1 8 3E5981 CABLE ASSEMBLY Motor Sensor 1 9 78 8094 5562 5 HANDLE Rollback 1 10 3E5986
68. Metric M4 X 0 7 X 50 3 15A 7E2916 PWA Rotating Processor Board 1 15B 26 1011 6238 1 FUSE 1 4 Amp 250V located on Rotating Processor Board 1 16 Not Available REFLECTOR Sensor 1 17 Not Available SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M4 X 0 7 X 20 0 3 18 Not Available SHAFT Short Drum 1 19 Not Available RING Retaining External E Ring 1 20 Not Available SCREW Set Hex Socket Metric M4 X 0 7 X 8 0 Cup Pt 2 21 78 8095 9339 1 DECAL Sensor Reflector 1 22 66 0000 0190 0 MOD 24 CABLE KIT RR 1 23 26 1011 6641 6 WASHER Metric Lock J4 3 ID X 8 0 OD X 5 Internal Tooth 3 8 62 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 19 Film Stripper Assembly 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 63 Service Manual Figure 9 18 Film Stripper Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty O 42 0013 9498 2 FILM STRIPPER ASSEMBLY 1 66 0000 0154 6 DRUM ROLLER KIT Includes items 2A and 2B 1 2A Not Available SCREW Shoulder tai aa MALA DNA baa A a d Ee Moe dae ke 2 2B Not Available ROLLER Adjuster sivas iad haa Bete he eet EN E ew ead beta
69. NAAN sua gia nie 1 PANEL Rear Kodak and OEM except GEI 1 PANEL Rear GE Only semis ta io ER ge dE A 1 FILTER HOUSING ASSEMBLY Kodak and OEM except GE See Figure 8 6 1 FILTER HOUSING ASSEMBLY GE only See Figure 8 6 1 J PLATE LOCKING 422258 Ek ado ha ULA KAL Nh A el 1 FILTER Air Right Side Pahala a PG See Ee E 1 BEARING 1265 ID X 1895 OD X 312 2 SHAFT LOCK octet A oo a dee aa ANN Gn UNG ted ae KA 2 RING Retaining External E Ring 2 39 ity ne den Redes Ve dees 4 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M5 X 0 8X10 Q 8 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7X8 Q 14 EE cy soa vr is cen el eet o to a CR a ae SH 2 DECAL Laser CLI International 1 LABEL Warning DISCONNECT POWER 1 EE 1 BRACKET CACHE atu pu car aaa et Get DE anG ta aanak a 1 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X10 Q 2 WASHER Metric Plain MA 2 LABEL Agency Statements arias ue dis Dash aa rente EE 1 WASHER Lock Metric External Tooth Stl Blk Zinc Not Shown 1 MAIN POWER CORD pababa daa kaka Ja ny daar alae es baa 1 8 5 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 1 of 12 Partial Partial Frame 13 Partial Fra
70. Output Log K202 Laser imager L302 HIB REGISTER FAIL X is not operational ALM 60 7 83 Service Manual 7 6 52 EC303 HIB lookup table memory failed Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message Input Log W Output Log Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L303 HIB MEMORY FAIL ALM 60 P303 X is not operational 7 84 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 53 EC501 Processor drum could not be moved Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Message Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L501 Lift top cover to reset X s not operational PROCESSOR DRUM FAIL processor P501 Summary If the SCB did not detect the drum turning within about the last 4 seconds EC 501 Drum could not be moved is declared e Power is removed from the processor motor e The operator must open and close the top cover to clear the error Sequence of Events 1 The Processor Motor is enabled At power up a 24VDC pulsating signal is applied to the processor motor MIB Test points for the motor will show this signal during normal operation 2 The Processor Communication Board transmits and receives REFLECT rotation light Phone Fix Operator Correctable On Site Technician Correctable 1 Problem The clear plastic lens cap on DS4 on the PCB Processor Communication Board emitter collector has come off Solution Replace the lens cap on photointer
71. POWER DIODE COLLIMATOR gt 5 BE gt 5 s E aeo Aa E gl E 2 DATAT 2 D e LASER DIODE HIGH SPEED mil a DATA 4 PET FAA E Ww p gt 21 DATA2 21 e DIODE SERVO l CHANNEL E DATA 5 10 cea PATTERN E mi 5 ui gt 3 DATA2 S e 12 BIT DAC FIBER SERIAL TAXI S Met KM Al EPROM lt a a P A DATA3 A e PHOTO DETECTOR CABLE P XMTR IMAGE DATA DATA 5 DS9 FILTERS a 512 X 512 X 8 a DATA3 VIDEO DATA e OPTICS l DCD Lei AMPL m25 sh 12 a cc g 23 23 FROM SERIALD 25 nr DATA _6 OPTO BUFFERS DATA4 gt HOST MBAUD si m re COUPLER ZX EH S DATA4 S TXD gt DZ COUSIN Ese EE HA lto 24 24 TAXI CLK pes DATA 6 14 S8 IA M I Je DATA 7 HOST DATA 2 HOSTDATA3 DATAS gt 8 15 gt Lur pHOSTDATAS N aMpLiBUFE A 2 25 25 DATA 7 DH gt a K 7 PATAG H DAC CONTROL 5RVCC D5VR 27 HUAG 16 o gt ss EI 26 BATA 26 gt D6 11 gt 9 17 pa G q DATA7 pal ETO INTERLOCK A ms H gt DATA 8 DS6 5 ASIC a DATA8 gt LD OFF D6 11 28 HE 18 o gt __ 17 9 9 COUPLERS gt FB LATCH PAR DATA 9 ADDRESS DATA8 m10 R aA GER gl 148 28 DATAG 28 EXP CORRECTION STBEN maga pies __ Cm 19 10 BETAS 10 OPTICAL SENSE SI m29 20 o gt BUFFER gt 20 29 29 STATE SB li DATA 10 Sa LES q bi a DATA10 a stemmen GE l3o DATA 10 KZ dees Y E e DATAN e l DSTRB STROBE OUT mio DATA 11 ar El DANA e ko DATA11 na ww a 1 DATA 11 24 gt DS3 OMPAR OMPAR PARITY m3
72. SCB 1 25 78 8094 5160 8 CABLE ASSEMBLY External PDB SCB 1 26 Not Available HARNESS ASSEMBLY IPB SCB DC Power 1 27 Not Available HARNESS ASSEMBLY MIB DC Power 1 28 78 8094 5164 0 HARNESS ASSEMBLY Service Switch 1 29 78 8094 5994 0 CABLE ASSEMBLY HBM 1 30 78 8094 5143 4 CABLE MOLDED External Optics Data I O Interconnect 1 31 78 8094 5145 9 CABLE MOLDED External Optics Control I O Interconnect 1 32 78 8094 5147 5 CABLE MOLDED External Optics Power I O Interconnect 1 33 78 8094 5149 1 CABLE MOLDED External Optics Atten I O Interconnect 1 34 78 8094 5153 3 CABLE MOLDED External Densitometer I O Interconnect 1 35 78 8094 5155 8 CABLE MOLDED External Local Panel I O Interconnect 1 37 Not Available CLAMP Cable Nylon 1 2 18 24 0054 pews tend tr RA a ad tee ks 2 393 Not Available 2 x CLAMP Ken EE 4 39 26 1011 6847 9 SWITCH Push pull RESET 0 1 A125 VAC 1 40 Not Available TIE MOUNT Adhesive Backed 12 dt NotAvailable c 2c THE WRAP mna adeno cen Bo ata AG AN ae ete AEN 12 42 Not Available GEAMP ir
73. Steps 2 through 4 for each keypad listed in the component select dropdown list box 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 25 Service Manual 2 5 8 Digital Modality Setup L gt Note Load digital parameters from a script file whenever possible refer to Step 6 of Procedure 2 5 4 If a script file is not available for the modality enter parameters manually To determine the correct settings refer to the OEM specifications contact the OEM site engineer or contact the National Service Center 1 Select the EIB subsystem 2 Select the first DEIB or DIB user from the component select dropdown list box 3 Select the Config window display button Modify the parameter settings as needed then select the Save button L gt Note When the Save button is selected the digital parameters are loaded into the DEIB or DIB If the save operation fails when using a DEIB check the fiber optic cables use a flashlight the DEIB power supply and input module communications use MPC for Windows diagnostics 4 Verify that the modality is generating an image 5 Select the Acquire button L gt Note If the acquire fails recheck the digital parameter settings Modify the settings as needed Save the new settings then try to acquire again 6 Select the Print button Verify that the image is printed successfully 2 5 9 Video Modality Setup 2 5 9 1 Inspect Signals from Modality 1 Verify that the modality is generating an image 2 Inspect the
74. Surfaces Access 8700 190A Beam Power Monitor Access Hole Figure 5 14 5 5 8 Completing the PM After cleaning or replacing the filters as appropriate see the 10 000 cycle or 30 000 cycle check list record the PM in the Service History Log 5 18 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 6 Theory of Operation Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 1 Overall System Architecture The architecture of the IMAGER is designed to be modular for ease of assembly service and access for jam clearing The system contains modules to open the film cartridge pick up the film transport the film from the cartridge to the exposure and processor stations expose the film and process the film It also contains electronic modules for control and power conditioning components Operator interfaces include the local panel mounted to the top cover of the imager and two different remote keypads both of which are optional 6 1 1 Module Architecture The modules within the IMAGER have been assigned the following reference designations for ease in identifying the location and function of components Each electronic component within each module has been assigned a reference designation based upon the module designation Reference Designation 100 Local Panel Operator commands amp status messages 200 Reads the density patch on films 300 Processor Develops the exposed film and delivers it to the exit tray in the top cover 400 Transpor
75. a MDB is a 16 or 32 MP version The information on which pins are grounded is used by a memory configuration register on the IPB to determine image memory width and size and the number of boards The board size and number of boards installed are combined with the current address to generate board select signals A memory out of bounds error is generated when a memory access is attempted to a board that is not installed All boards must be installed in order If a board is missing the system will not recognize the boards that follow If 8 bit and 12 bit boards are intermixed then the system will assume that they are all 8 bit boards In addition 16 and 32 MP boards cannot be intermixed 6 12 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation Memory Daughter Board Block Diagram INPUT BUFFER 0 1 2 OUTPUT LATCH ADDR DT KS ADDR d PAL DRIVERS Figure 6 4 IPB CONNECTOR 6 3 1 4 Translator Daughter Board TDB The TDB provides two serial communication interfaces between the IPB and two hosts and or keypads It is responsible for receiving commands from the hosts keypads checking for protocol and transmission errors and sending the commands to the microprocessor on the IPB It also receives responses from the IPB formats these responses and transmits them to the host keypad The TDB has a microprocessor which is responsible for the functions on this board Communication between the microproc
76. allow film to fall back into cartridge Move pickup arm to top position than 7mm from Multiple pickup attempts Is film out sensor low Blocked 8700 212A Figure 7 12 Pick Up Film Sequence 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 15 Service Manual 7 4 6 Move Film to Feed Position Are rollers open 2 Run pickup motor to move Stutter Feed rollers sequence Move arm to did not open top position Turn on feed solenoid to open feed rollers Picker up sensor Check multi go hi feed detector to see if feed rollers are open Yes Unblocked Move arm to feed position 8700 213A Figure 7 13 Move Film to Feed Position Sequence 7 16 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 4 7 Prepare to Feed Film Release feed solenoid to close feed rollers Wait 0 4 seconds Read multi feed detector Turn feed sole Turn off pickup How noid on to open motor and many sheets feed rollers vacuum Close Move arm down rollers Wait 1 to top of cartridge second Multiple pickup attempt Platen entry sensor Deactivated Film jammed on multifeed detector Pause 10 msec Then run drive motor in reverse for 10 msec Turn on feed motor to run Turn off vacuum Wait 2 seconds Move arm to top position film forward for 400 msec To clear film Number set by parameter Mov
77. and an offset greater than 0 the error message is generated Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable Adjust the densitometer Refer to Section 3 for adjustment procedure 7 100 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 67 EC601 Invalid power monitor offset Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log OM X IM 952 Host alarm Message Message Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L601 INVALID POWER ALM 60 P601 X is not operational MONITOR OFFSET Summary A beam power monitor reading is taken with no laser beam hitting the BPM board The value of this reading should be 13 3 Note the BPM reading is taken only at power up Error State If the BPM offset is outside of a 1 through 25 reading EC601 Invalid power monitor offset is declared Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable 1 Cause Bad BPM board If the problem persists replace the board 2 Cause Bad peak detector circuit on the SCB 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 101 Service Manual 7 6 68 EC602 Invalid power monitor range Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is L602 INVALID_ P602 not operational POWER MONITOR RANGE Summary Sequence of Events This value must be within 50 to 70 mw The SCB directs the Optics Module to fire a laser beam of specific int
78. any more dirt 4 Rotate the nozzle of the Krytox oil dispenser to the o ring opening Do not cut the nozzle since a small hole already exists 5 With all rollers pushed to one side place two or three drops of Krytox oil on each of the exposed bushing shafts at the point of contact Slide the rollers to the opposite side and repeat the lubricating procedure Spin the rollers sliding them from left to right a few times Wipe any accidentally spilled oil from the rollers Ensure that all rollers rotate freely St SS 5 14 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 5 Additional Information I Installing the Felt Plate Assembly and Felt Air Barrier 1 Check that the stripper is unlatched and install a new felt plate assembly as follows a Hold the assembly upside down and insert its end pins in the machine slots Figure 5 12 b Pivot the assembly on its pins toward the front of the machine insert the pad under the bar and lay it down on the cooling tray c Relatch the stripper latch es For 30 000 Cycle PMS only 2 Remove the old felt air barrier from its end clips Figure 5 12 and install a new one Caution The installed felt air barrier must not interfere with rotation of the processor rollers O 26200008 98980909 Q O Co fe 39538998899 B28980952 09090259 02995989 L685 98 Relatch R7NN RRAC Figure 5 12 2001 May Rev M 1202688 5 15 Service Manu
79. b Unfold the small ramp at the top end of the front panel c Set the bottom end of the front panel on the front edge of the crate Align the holes in the panel with the holes in the crate d Use the two bolts stored underneath the IMAGER to secure the ramp to the crate 4 Remove the foam packing from the front and top of the IMAGER 5 Grasp the tape handle on the front of the IMAGER Slowly pull the IMAGER out of the crate and ease it down the ramp 6 Remove the filter from the crate 7 Roll the IMAGER to the installation location Foam Packing Plastic Bag Foam Packing Ramp Bolts Tape Handle Figure 2 1 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 1 Service Manual L gt Note The remaining steps of this procedure must be performed by a Kodak trained technician 8 Remove the plastic bag from the IMAGER 9 Remove the power cord warranty User Guide and installation kit from the exit tray 10 Remove all the filament tape from the exterior of the IMAGER 11 Remove the plastic sheet from the local panel 12 Open the top cover 13 Open the left side and supply doors via their mechanical releases 14 To gain access to the shipping screw on the right side of the exposure module a Remove the bracket three screws that secures the top edge of the front cover b Lift the front cover up and away from the frame Exit Tray Local Panel Top Cover pa Bracket Front Cover
80. be the same format e Images can be acquired and stored in random or sequential order e Can be located up to one kilometer 3280 feet from IMAGER fiber cable 1 8 Cables e Keypad Not plenum rated 3 m 10 ft 10 m 33 ft 30 m 98 ft 60 m 197 ft e RS232 Supplied by OEM Not plenum rated 15 ft e Digital Plenum rated 3 m 10 ft 10 m 33 ft 30 m 98 ft 60 m 197 ft e Analog Plenum rated 3 m 10 ft 10 m 33 ft 30 m 98 ft 60 m 197 ft e Fiber Optic Plenum rated 3 m 10 ft 10 m 33 ft 30 m 98 ft 60 m 197 ft 100 m 330 ft 150 m 490 ft 200 m 653 ft 250 m 816 ft 300 m 1090 ft 500 m 1652 ft e Characteristics Fiber glass 62 125 um Bandwidth 160 MHz km Attenuation lt 4 db km at 850 nm Test attenuation per FOTP 171 S T Connector 1 2 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation Section 2 Installation 2 1 Unpacking L gt Note Steps 1 through 7 of this procedure can be performed by dock personnel or a Kodak trained technician Steps 8 through 32 must be performed by a Kodak trained technician gt Note Refer to Figure 2 1 while performing steps 1 through 7 of this procedure Remove the accessories box from the top of the shipping crate Remove the wire clamps that secure the front panel of the shipping crate then remove the front panel 3 Install the front panel as a ramp a Lay the front panel down in front of the crate
81. between the processor drum and the stripper measured at the edges of the film path gt Note The stripper mechanism expands when heated To ensure accuracy the following measurement must be performed with the processor at operating temperature Measurement 1 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER 2 Open the processor cover 3 Grasp the handle on the front of the processor exit assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Caution A Hot Surface A The surface of the processor drum is hot Take care when checking the gap Caution The feeler gauge can damage the surface of the drum Take care when checking the gap 2001 May Rev M 1202688 3 5 Service Manual 4 Use a 007 inch feeler gauge to check the gap between the drum and the stripper Check the gap at the edges of the film path approximately 1 5 inches in from each end of the stripper blade Refer to Figure 3 4 If the gap is set incorrectly perform the following adjustment procedure Top View 007 001 inches y A Lock Screw Adjustment M3 Allen Se R7NN 171C Figure 3 4 Adjustment 1 Remove the lock screws M3 Allen at each end of the stripper 2 Rotate the adjustment screws at each end of the stripper as required to create the gap of 007 001 inches Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the gap
82. cable If replacing the cable does not fix the problem try using a longer or shorter cable or try coupling cables together Tech Tip The LINESYNC signal can be checked at pin 9 of U6L1 on the SCB It should change states for each line during imaging 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 49 Service Manual 7 6 18 EC130 Supply door open Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Close supply door P130 K215 A cover is open None ALM 14 on laser imager X On Site Technician Correctable Refer to paragraph 7 2 for more information on sensors 7 50 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 19 EC132 No supply cartridge Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Insert cartridge P132 K215 A cover is open None ALM 12 on laser imager 1 Summary The Cartridge Present Sensor is not actuated On Site Technician Correctable Problem Cause The rollback bar is not in the home position Solution Rotate the rollback bar to the home position Refer to Figure 7 1 for sensor locations Cartridge will not insert if the rollback 4 arm is outside this range User rollback knob 8700 245L Theory Refer to paragraph 7 2 for sensor troubleshooting details and paragraph 7 4 for information on film sequencing 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 51 Service Manual 7 6 20 EC133 Less than 20 sheets remain in supply cartridge
83. cartridge Open left door laser imager X Check local and remove jam in area 1 panel P161 Toggles with Press supply button for 5 seconds to open door This will expose XXX sheets P138 Summary A film is jammed on the multifeed detector Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 for flow charts of machine functions during film drive Phone Fix Operator Correctable Cause Films stick together and double feed or as top sheet is being lifted and fed the sheet underneath it is pulled forward and mispositioned This happens most at the beginning of the cartridge Solution e Remove the cartridge and try fanning the film e Try anew cartridge On Site Technician Correctable 1 Cause The multifeed board is out of adjustment Solution Adjust using the procedure in the service manual 2 Cause Debris in the multifeed rollers Solution Clean the rollers Theory Refer to paragraph 7 4 for flow charts of machine functions during film drive 7 58 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 27 EC163 Jam to exposure Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Media Jam in transport K211 Media is jammed in L163 Jam to Exposure Open left door and laser imager 1 Check local remove jam in area 2a panel P163 Summary A film is jammed after the doublefeed sensor and before the platen entry sensor The platen entry sensor did not come on Sequence of Events R
84. cooled by three 50 CFM fans which are mounted on a Fan Tray Assy in the lower third of the EEA The tray is mounted so that it can be installed or removed easily TO SERVICE OVERRIDE SWITCH CN1213 DC PWR TO SCB DC PWR TO IMS MIB CN1310 CN1209 CN1208 CN1207 CN1206 co CN10082 7 CN1003 CN1007 CN1005 CN1009 CT CZ CS COO CN1006 E IMAGE DATA FROM IPB TO IPB CN1101 Figure 6 7 6 3 3 4 Machine Interface Board MIB Refer to Figure 6 8 for a block diagram of the MIB The MIB is a dumb machine controller directed by control signals from the SCB over a 60 pin interface The functions of the MIB are to e Provide power and stepper motor drivers for the 24 VDC motors and solenoids located in the system modules e Provide stepper motor drivers for the attenuator motor within the LOS e Distribute power to the boards within the EEA 8 LOS e Create a line frequency clock to the SCB for synchronizing the processor temp control from a 24 VAC input e Provide a relay for interrupting the power to the laser diode within the LOS under control of the system s laser safety interlock switches 6 18 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation MIB Block Diagram d CN1307 To LOS Attenuator Reset Sensor Power Stepper Motor Drivers Hg CN1310 CN1309 DC Motor Driver To Motors From SCB a e Solenoid Drivers a CN1308 To Solenoids CN1301 From PMA CN1302 CN1305 To IPB From PMA
85. densitometer 2 Check the processor temperatures e f processor temperatures are incorrect adjust them using the MPC Refer to the service manual adjustment e If the temperatures look OK check the Beam Power Monitor Board and ensure that no dust or debris is blocking the beam 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 113 Service Manual 7 6 80 EC634 System near calibration limits film almost slow Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM X IM 952 Host alarm System is operating None L634 FILM ALMOST SLOW None near calibration limits P634 Summary EC634 01 Film Almost The film speed is between 2 6 and 2 7 This may be a normal condition Slow caused by film variability but may also be caused by other factors Note film speed can be viewed in MPC AIQC DIogE Phone Fix Operator Correctable Try another cartridge or another lot of film On Site Technician Correctable 1 Compare MPC AIQC DIogE densities to an external densitometer measuring the same calibrate sheet There may be some differences between IMAGER and external densitometer readings light source is a different wavelength but the differences should remain proportional across the steps If the IMAGER densitometer readings in MPC are invalid check the densitometer 2 Check the processor temperatures e f the processor temperatures are incorrect adjust them using MPC Refer to the service manual adjustment e f the temperatures look OK c
86. exchanged It is also used for receiving calibrated contrast tables from the SCB The other two are used for the service modem NDB Only one of these serial ports can be active at a time The two service modem ports are RS 232 compatible while the SCB port is differential SCB NMB Image Processor Board Block Diagram Acquisition E Control amp Memory Ramos D Timing Block oc CDB TDB Interface DIB FIB SIB VIB maga cone Lag Les nterace Interface Block Block Block Block Figure 6 3 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 11 Service Manual 6 3 1 2 Bandwidth The system is designed for 120 nanosecond memory which requires a total memory bandwidth of 8 3325 MHz The IPB has a 33 330 MHz system clock which is divided down to provide the required memory bandwidth The bandwidth is divided as follows Image Transmission 4 16625 MHz Image Acquisition 4 10225 MHz Memory Refresh 0 06400 MHz L gt Note The refresh cycle steals from the acquisition bandwidth in order to perform the refresh Image acquisition will support a line burst rate of 4 megapixels per second and have a maximum average transfer rate of 3 megapixels per second line to line Acquisition of video images having a 110 MHz pixel frequency will be supported by allowing a maximum of 32 acquisition passes 6 3 1 3 Memory Daughter Board MDB Refer to Figure 6 4 for a block diagram of the MDB The MDB is available with 16 or 32 megapixels MP of memory T
87. flash off when the data is received from the IPB If the SCB is receiving data the DS10J1 flashes every 10 seconds a series of 9 flashes followed by 10 seconds with the LED on 3 Set the parameters back to default and reset the IPB MPC Setup Output Module Comm 0 Comm 7 120 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 84 EC913 HIB parity error Local Panel Message Printer malfunction P913 2001 May Rev M 1202688 HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message J Input Log W Output Log K202 Laser imager L913 HIB_PARITY ERROR X is not operational ALM 60 7 121 Service Manual 7 7 General System Process Problems 7 7 1 SCB Power Up Not Ready Problem Description Problem Isolation Procedure Local panel displays 2 minutes Optics not up to temperature Refer to EC123 for warm up but it is taking longer SCB local panel and SCB One of the interlock feedback segment display are blank even circuits to the SCB is bad though there is power to the SCB 5v 17V LED s lit on the SCB SCB local panel and SCB Blown fuse on the MIB Check fuses on MIB segment display is blank and one of the SCB power indicator LED s is blank MIB board failed A driver on the MIB shorted Look up error in error log Objectionable odor from Filter needs changing Change filter machine Objectionable odor from film Poor ventilation in viewing room Increase site ventilation If
88. for Windows Refer to the MPC help screens for details If a manual sync detect adjustment is required refer to the EVEIB Installation Instructions When manual sync When manual sync detect adjustment is not detect adjustment is required default setting required ws SC W7 Not jumpered 0 Without With PLL PLL Module Module PS EE 1 i i i i Main PWA PLL Module d 1 x 32 oe 3 W5 U ji NT AY W6 W3 With PLL Module V Sync W4 W1 w2 H Sync Comp Video In Video In Port 0 Port 1 Without PLL Module W1 W2 W3 W4 Jumper on 75 ohm termination Jumper off High Z Figure 2 33 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 21 Service Manual 2 4 6 DEIB Transfer Clock Speed Two jumpers in the DEIB specify either single 10 MHz or dual 12 5 MHz transfer clock speed When a DEIB is connected to the IMAGER it must always be set for single 10 MHz transfer clock speed This is the factory default setting DEIB Main PWA PS B Single Transfer Clock Speed Figure 2 34 2 22 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 2 5 System Configuration After all cables have been connected and all switch and jumper settings have been
89. have multiple features which prevent components from continuing to run independent of software control The AC power to the processor is interrupted through the use of a relay K801 under the control of the processor software refer to Figure 6 15 The relay is required in this case because a typical failure mode of the temperature control triacs is for them to short in an on mode which would then not respond to an off command from the software 6 24 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation Machine Interlock Electronic Enclosure Diagram CN1403 CN1401 CN1008 CN1213 ait Intlk Open Proc 14 27 SW802 3 ZEER 30 Intlk Proc V 34 30 Interlock 1 E Open Left ree Machine SW803 Intik Left w Left V Interlock SI i ce ba Supply Door Poe a Intlk Open Cart i SW803 3 lintik CartV Ge A COM Contacts shown with panels open Contacts shown with service panel open and override switch activated CN702 CN1007 Figure 6 14 Processor Power Relay Wiring SR1 Outer Ring SR2 Center Ring SR3 Inner Ring GRN YEL CN1308 CN1009 19 10 2432 1 SR 20 29 2433 o Figure 6 15 Service Override The machine interlocks can be overridden by a service switch located within the EEA which requires removing the right side panel Replacing the panel disables the override function The service override is required to allow a trained service engineer to test the syst
90. in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Remove 4 26 ee D 8700 17C Figure 4 31 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 3 7 Transport Feed Sensor SW405 L gt Note SW405 is no longer used in later production machines 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Disconnect Remove 2 8700 1406 Figure 4 32 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 27 Service Manual 4 3 8 Tongue Depressor Sensor SW406 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the a
91. in the middle of the system along the back side It is responsible for moving the film from the Pickup Assembly to the Platen in the Exposure Assembly for imaging and from there to the Processor Assembly for processing The Transport Assembly can load a film into the Platen while unloading another It can prestage a film for exposure while delivering another film to the processor The Transport Assembly contains the following electrical components Designation SW406 Tongue Depressor Sensor Senses whether the tongue depressor is down SW407 Tongue Depressor Interrupts the power to the tongue depressor solenoid Interrupt Switch when the Transport Assembly is pulled out Y401 Tongue Depressor Actuates the tongue depressor Solenoid Y402 Transport Feed Roll Lifts the nip roll at the feed roll when loading film Solenoid Y403 Gate Solenoid Opens the gate at the entrance of the platen MFB Multi Feed Board Senses the number of films present at the feed roll when loading film SW405 is not used on later production machines 6 4 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 2 5 Pickup Assembly The Pickup Assembly is located in the middle of the system under the Processor It is responsible for removing the film from the film cartridge and bringing it up to the feed rollers in the Transport Assembly The Pickup Assembly contains the following electrical components nelerenee Description Designation p K501 Vacuum Re
92. included on bar codes In addition the data blocks include space for writing the machine serial number sheet count in the cartridge total prints per machine etc RF Tag Subsystem Components The RF Tag Subsystem includes the following components see Figure 6 12 L gt Note For a more detailed illustration of the subsystem see sheet 2 of the system functional diagram e RF Tag Interface Board This board contains a microprocessor which receives TTL level commands at 1 K baud from the SCB The micro reformats the commands so they can be recognized by the RF Reader Board and sends them through a circuit which converts the TTL levels to 8 volt RS232 levels The commands then are sent at 57 6 K baud to the RF Reader Board Responses from the Reader Board go through a reverse conversion process before being input to the micro The micro sends the data to the SCB on a separate line 12 to 0 volt levels at 100 baud This data is clocked to the SCB e RF Reader Board This board receives commands from the RF Tag Interface Board It processes data for transmission to the RF Antenna receives RF data from the antenna and responds to the RF Tag Interface Board e RF Antenna Board The antenna transmits and receives RF energy from the RF tag RF Tag Commands The micro on the RF Tag Interface Board receives and processes the following commands from the SCB e Report Status e Reset Software e Execute Diagnostics e Report Firmwa
93. indicator of the transfer of data and may flash too rapidly to be able to use it for troubleshooting Phone Fix Operator Correctable 1 Cause No power to DEIB DIB Tech Tip Visually inspect the DEIB DIB The POWER LED should be lit Solution If the Power LED is not lit try reconnecting the power cord Check voltage at the wall outlet Problem First acquire in the morning fails Subsequent acquires are okay Problem only occurs with the first acquire after the DEIB is powered on Cause If the DEIB loses power it will lose its parameter set and fail the first acquire after the DEIB power up However it will succeed on the second acquire This situation could happen if the DEIB receives it power from a host system that is powered down at night Solution Check the power source for the DEIB It should have a power source that is independent of the host system Refer to the above Sequence of Events for information on how and when the DEIB parameters are downloaded to the DEIB from the IPB Cause The host system does not always have the digital data ready to be acquired and may need to be in certain filming modes for digital transfer to the DEIB DIB to occur Solution Check with the OEM tech to be sure the operator is operating the host system correctly On Site Technician Correctable 1 Problem EC68 with Siemens Cause Some Siemens camera boards the newer version do not keep their STROBE signal levels at a hi
94. information takes longer than the host is willing to wait host wait timing is out of spec the host will error out and stop sending data or will send the header data twice etc Solution Set MPC Setup IMS System Memory management to First fit This will soeed up the IMAGER s reply after the header data but will result in slightly decreased memory performance If this does not solve the problem try the following procedure a Set MPC IMS EIB Config Header Mode to Ignore Header Line This will also speed up the IMAGER s reply to the host header b Enter the values for Pixels Per Line and Image Lines that you retrieved earlier from the Image Show screen c Be aware that while in Ignore Header Line mode MPC Image Show will now display the values you just entered in the DEIB config screen even if the host is not sending any data d If Ignore Header mode fixes the problem it can be used as a permanent fix only if the host sends a single size image If the host changes image sizes Ignore Header Mode cannot be used e If Ignore Header mode fixes the problem you may want to set Memory Management in MPC back to Best Fit to maximize utilization of memory 4 Problem Digital acquires work with 969 IMAGER but fails with the 8700 8500 IMAGER Cause The 8700 8500 IMAGER cannot process digital image data as fast as the 969 IMAGER 969 6 Mpixel max 8700 8500 4 Mpixel max Solution The digital transfer rate of the host must be l
95. instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help e FCC ID PA4870085007E2620 Avoid Laser Beam This equipment employs a 150 milliwatt laser Laser radiation may be present when the machine operates without panels or covers installed Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in eye damage Covers shall be removed by authorized service personnel only This equipment is intended to connect to other medical devices Only qualified service personnel may perform installation and service maintenance The laser in the equipment is not a patient device Therefore the equipment must be installed no closer than 1 83 meters from a patient bed or chair U S Federal law restricts this device to the sale by or on the order of a licensed health ca
96. is out of specification perform the adjustment procedure on the following page Si Adjustment 1 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER 2 Peel back the calibration label that covers the potentiometer access holes on the top side of the densitometer 3 Adjust the gain and offset potentiometers as required to bring both readings within specification 8700 108C Figure 3 5 2001 May Rev M 1202688 3 7 Service Manual 3 4 Density Patch Offset Specification The top edge of the density patch must be located 7 0 1 0 mm from the top edge of the film Special Tools Small flat blade insulated screwdriver Measurement 1 Power up the imager and wait for it to warm up to operating temperature 2 Initiate a density test from the local panel 3 Measure the distance from the top edge of the test print to the top edge of the density patch If it is not within specification perform the following adjustment procedure EC Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the front panel 4 1 1 4 Locate the offset potentiometer access hole on the front of the optics module The offset and gain pots are mounted on the Y galvo driver board approximately 1 5 inches behind the front cover of the opti
97. is read by the optics software on the SCB The LOS logic also disables the operation of the laser diode under this condition The machine control software does not have direct control of this function 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 23 Service Manual CN1012 CN1304 Laser Interlock Diagram CN719 CN711 Contacts shown with panels open Platen Electronic Enclosure SW804 Left Door Figure 6 13 Machine Interlock Function Refer to Figure 6 14 for a machine interlock diagram There are three machine interlock switches one for the left door SW803 one for the supply door SW806 and one for the top cover SW802 The purpose of these interlocks is to prevent operators from being exposed to any hazards after opening operator access doors Opening the left door or supply door stops all motors below the processor module Opening the top cover stops the processor and exit transport motors and removes power to the processor The machine interlock switches do not directly remove power from any active components The system software reads the status of the interlocks on a regular basis and determines if an operator access door has been opened and disables all active components in the area affected by the open door The DC components can be safely stopped under software control by inhibiting the multiple control signals required to energize them in the same manner as they are normally stopped The system software and hardware
98. limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help N CAUTION General External Cleaning This equipment may be cleaned with a damp cloth using water with mild detergent or commercial electronic equipment cleaner Type B Applied Part vi 1202688 2001 March Rev L Agency Regulatory and CE Marking Compliance Agency Regulatory and CE Marking Compliance All agency regulatory and CE marking information may be found in the User Guide for these models 2001 March Rev L 1202688 vii Service Manual BLANK PAGE viii 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 1 Specificatio
99. lubricant 3 Exit idler rollers Black buildup on the drum idler Idler rollers are not turning Lubricate with Krytox oil rollers Black buildup on the drum Stripper is too close to the drum Adjust the stripper gap Refer to rollers and drum surface is Aluminum from stripper is getting procedure 3 2 forming into a black powder and onto drum and rollers and migrating to the film and creating a sandpaper effect elsewhere Initial symptoms are a white haze on the drum Idler rollers may need lubrication Lubricate with Krytox 7 7 6 AlQC Problem Description Problem Isolation Procedure Dpatch log is showing incorrect Refer to EC635 Dpatch slow or values EC636 Dpatch fast For all other AIQC problems refer to any of the following quick sheets 624 631 632 633 634 635 636 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 125 Service Manual 7 8 Host Keypad Communications Trouble Analysis 7 8 1 Compact Keypad Problem Description Problem Isolation Procedure Keypad is dead TDB is not supplying 12V to the Set SW2 to right most position to compact keypad supply 12V to compact keypad Check and or replace the 12V fuse on the TDB 7 8 2 Touch Screen Keypad Problem Description Problem Isolation Procedure Acquire light won t stop flashing The user is in color blind mode From the main keypad menu select KEYPAD MENU COLOR BLIND MODE OFF Keypad and touch screen don t One of the mechanical switc
100. of the IMAGER Refer to Figure 2 21 VIB lt 738 D osi Gaz 0 lt PS OZ H Modality 0 Pixel Clock S 8 m HA 933 o QO o 3 8 33 2 Z Figure 2 21 2 12 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 2 3 7 Video Source to EVEIB to FIB 1 Check set the jumpers in the EVEIB Refer to Procedure 2 4 5 2 If the modality provides a pixel clock signal use an analog cable to connect it to the appropriate Ext Clock In connector on the EVEIB Refer to Figure 2 22 EVEIB S Port 0 Port 1 Ext Clock IN Fiber Optics ic Video Video Video Video OUT IN Port 0 Port 1 H Syn A Ch B Ch V Sync Composite IN OUT ele O O Video Pixel Clock Modality Figure 2 22 L gt Note Port 0 is the only port that supports separate Sync inputs Port 1 only supports standard composite video 3 The video connections vary depending on the type of video output by the modality e f the modality provides standard composite video use an analog cable to connect the video signal from the modality to the appropriate Video In connector on the EVEIB Refer to Figure 2 22 e f the modality provides SVGA output like the PowerPC an adaptor cable is required Refer to Figure 2 23 Connect the green BNC cable to the Video In Port 0 connector on the EVEIB Connect the black BNC cable to the H Sync Composite connector If the modality provides a separate vertical sy
101. opposite each illustration provides the description adequate to identify components If the component is available only as part of the next higher assembly the description column provides the next higher assembly description or identification number Locating and Identifying a Part If physical appearance and general location of an item are known refer to the view for the assembly or sub assembly and locate the item on the exploded view If machine serial numbers determine a component the part ID numbers in this manual are from the most current data available Make sure part ID numbers for your component have not been amended by changes and updates made to your machine Verify the serial number of your laser imager on the serial plate located inside the left door 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 1 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 1 Machine and Skins Assembly Screen 1 of 2 SS S S 8 3 2001 May Rev M 1202688 Service Manual 8 4 Figure 8 1 Machine and Skins assembly Screen 2 of 2 Power Source 1202688 2001 May Rev M Item No 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 78 8094 9025 9 4A 3C 4B 7B 11 12 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2001 May Rev M Part Number N
102. present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER 3 Grasp the handle on the front of the processor exit assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position 8700 94C Disconnect Remove 4 Figure 4 20 4 16 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 2 11 Processor Exit Sensor SW301 A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the exit assembly 4 2 9 Remove 8700 110C Figure 4 21 0 9 Remove 2 Disconnect e NI y S Press actuator and slide out sensor 8700 116C Figure 4 22 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 17 Service Manual 4 2 12 Processor Entrance Sensor SW302 A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the processor drum 4 2 1 3 Remove the exit assembly 4 2 9 SU Remove 4 20 95 289800 10505059 0298359800 0805980880 0805059 000705 080
103. readings 7 Remove and clean the probe 2001 May Rev M 1202688 3 3 Service Manual Caution To prevent damage to the surface of the processor drum remove and clean the probe after taking each temperature reading 8 Check the Zone 1 temperature Insert the probe at the far left end of the slot between the two rollers closest to the front of the machine Repeat steps 5 through 7 9 Check the Zone 3 temperature Insert the probe at the far right end of the slot between the two rollers closest to the front of the machine Repeat steps 5 through 7 10 If all of the temperatures are within specification replace and secure the processor clamshell top cover H any of the temperatures are out of specification replace but do not secure the processor clamshell top cover then perform the following adjustment procedure Adjustment Procedure Caution To prevent damage to the surface of the processor drum do not leave the probe installed while performing an adjustment or while waiting for the processor temperatures to stabilize Connect the MPC to the MPC port on the rear of the IMAGER 2 Power up the MPC and start the MPC for Windows program Do either of the following to select the processor subsystem e Click on the PROC button e Open the Operations menu and select Subsystem Processor 4 Select the Calib button to display the Processor Calibration window 5 Adjust the temperatures by clicking on the appropriate arrows
104. the MPC parameters you backup the SCB NVRAM also stores many other system and LUT parameters that are not backed up via MPC If the SCB is behaving abnormally and you suspect that the NVRAM s corrupted do the following a Backup the system using a new filename Keep the old backup b Do an MPC File Restore on the printer having the problem c winmpc scbinitO sc for 8700 8500 IMAGER dual printer 0 c winmpc scbinit1 sc for 8700 8500 IMAGER dual printer 1 This will reinitialize all the SCB NVRAM c Power cycle the system The local panel will be blank for the first 30 seconds d Wait until EC154 and 622 appear on the local panel Wait until the backup arm height calibration is done There will be a clunking noise as the feed roller is moved up and down repeatedly Let it finish e Power cycle the system again It should power up okay now f Restore the MPC backup you made in step a This will restore the drum temperature setpoints and the parameters in the SCB Config screen g Set SCB Config Clear Border lines to 84 default Save the screen and power cycle the IMAGER h It is possible the SCB NVRAM was corrupted at the time you made the backup If the new backup doesn t work try the old backup 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 57 Service Manual 7 6 26 EC161 Film jammed on multifeed detector Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Media jam at supply K211 Media is jammed in L161 JAM_SUPPLY
105. the connector on the inside rear wall of the imager behind the processor 5 Unlatch and open the filter housing Remove the filter to reduce the weight of the housing KET ng Loosen 2 screws and disconnect 8700 72C Figure 4 2 4 2 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl JOVI IU UV ODIO Te Remove 2 0 D 81 Lift gt housing up and away from rear 1 panel R s mn Loosen 2 ru LI ef UA Figure 4 3 TTT g A 10 Remove 2 k 12 Tilt rear panel out and lift up T o Remove 2 D G Mi 8700 70C Figure 4 4 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 3 Service Manual 4 1 3 Right Side Panel A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER Loosen 2 4 Pull top of side panel away from frame and lift up 8700 76C Figure 4 5 4 4 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly R
106. the full number of lines EC126 is logged Note L gt Note This could occur because e The IPB has stopped sending data to the optics due to a parity error in the image data Look in the MPC error log to see if parity errors are occurring If they are troubleshoot the parity error L gt Note While the IMAGER is imaging the film it runs into a parity error in the data It then reverses the border to clear for 16 lines so the image is flagged as bad After the parity error the film will be imaged as normal e An intermittent or bad connection between IPB and Optics OR Optics and SCB e Bad optics module Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable 1 Cause The number of lines is different between the SCB and the IPB Solution Set clear border lines via MPC SCB Config Clear Border lines and power cycle the IMAGER 2 Cause The cable between the IPB and optics or SCB and optics is loose Solution Reseat the cable 3 Cause The control cable between SCB and optics has a loose fitting connection at the bulkhead due to the cable securing screws bottoming out before the cables are fully seated Solution First check the control cable to see if the cable is loose and the securing screws are bottomed out Then shim the screws and sockets as needed to tighten up the two cables 4 Cause The fiber optic cable between the 8800 and 8700 8500 IMAGER is bad Solution Replace the
107. the image on the film 17 Repeat Step 16 as needed When the single best image has been identified select the Cancel button in the Video Fine Tuning Print Full Size window 18 Select the Config window display button Enter the clock delay and fine pixel delay settings that are printed above the previously identified image Select the Save button 19 Repeat Steps 2 through 7 L gt Note The following step does not apply to the VIB EVEIB 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 31 Service Manual 20 At the VEIB adjust the appropriate gain pot wait adjust wait etc until LEDs 7 and 8 toggle Wait for 3 or more flashes of the Sync LED between each adjustment this allows the VEIB time to sample and adjust to the new gain level 21 At the MPC if the adjustment is correct the following values will be displayed in the Gain amp Black Level Fine Tune window e Fora VEIB the maximum value will be below 511 and will be around 508 to 510 The minimum value will toggle between O and 4 e Fora VIB the maximum value will be below 1023 and should be 1016 for 8 bit pixels and 1022 for 12 bit pixels The minimum value will be above 0 and should be 4 for 8 bit pixels and 1 for 12 bit pixels e For an EVEIB the maximum value will be below 1023 and should be 1016 for 8 bit pixels and 1020 for 12 bit pixels The minimum value will be above 0 and should be 4 for 8 bit pixels and 2 for 12 bit pixels 22 When the values listed in the previo
108. top interlock of the two left side door interlocks 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 63 Service Manual 7 6 32 EC176 Supply cartridge could not be opened Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Cartridge could not be K210 Printer error L176 SUPPLY opened Check cartridge Check local panel on laser COVER_OPEN_ERROR P176 imager X Summary The tongue depressor sensor failed to go high during the cartridge lid rollback process generating the message that the cartridge could not be opened Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing Phone Fix Operator Correctable Check the cartridge for a possible film jam On Site Technician Correctable 1 Cause Tongue depressor arm is bent Solution Reform arm 2 Cause Transport interlock SW407 is faulty Solution Repair replace switch 3 Cause MIB board has blown driver U8C1 due to the rollback motor leads rubbing against the frame and shorting to ground Solution Reposition and repair leads to motor Replace MIB General Troubleshooting Tip Solenoids Use MPC diag solenoids to exercise the solenoid Refer to paragraph 7 3 for additional information on solenoids Sensors Test proper operation of tongue depressor sensor with MPC Diag SCB Sensors Refer to paragraph 7 2 for Sensor Troubleshooting Analysis Motors Use MPC Diag SCB Motors to exercise the rollback motor Theory Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Se
109. via MPC based on interpolation settings Refer to the MPC for Windows Help file for details For touch screen keypad users density contrast and smooth sharp are all set at the keypad Refer to the User Guide for the 8700 LASER IMAGER for details 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 33 Service Manual 1 Have the customer select a typical image that contains the range of contrasts they will be looking for 2 Acquire the image and print a contrast test 3 If everything looks too light or too dark adjust the density setting If the density setting looks okay have the customer select a contrast setting 4 If the customer finds the image unacceptable at any combination of density and contrast levels it is possible that the gain black level adjustment needs to be redone using a different image or the OEM monitor may be misadjusted refer to Procedure 2 5 9 5 5 Have the customer select smooth or sharp image processing If neither smooth nor sharp is acceptable to the customer the interpolation settings may need to be changed Refer to the MPC for Windows Help file for details on how to change interpolation settings 2 5 9 5 OEM Monitor Adjustment If the customer likes the images there is no need to adjust the OEM monitor even though it may be slightly off However if the customer is unable to get an acceptable contrast on the images it may be necessary to make the following checks and or adjustments Theory The OEM s video generat
110. width to the memory width Acquisition Control Controls image acquisition modes and generates the timing needed for the image amp Memory Timing memory Image Memory Consists of image memory control an address generator and connectors for the 4 MDBs Parameter Stores acquisition and print parameters and performs parameter initialization between various logic blocks Communication Provides an interface to the TDB Microprocessor 6 10 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation The bold arrows in Figure 6 3 show the image data path through the IPB Data enters through the Image Interface Block passes through the Scale LUT Block and is stored in the Image Memory Block This path is active during an external image acquisition The microprocessor can acquire images directly through the Scale LUT Block During a print operation this data is read from the image memory is interpolated and filtered through the Interpolation Block and then is passed through the Contrast Table Block to the Printer Interface Block In diagnostic mode the Microprocessor Block can bypass the Printer Interface Block and intercept the output data at the Contrast Table Block The IPB uses a Motorola 68302 microprocessor It is a highly integrated device with a 68000 core and several additional features Among them are three serial communication controllers One is used to control the serial port to the SCB over which system commands and status are
111. within the last 45 seconds it declares EC910 on the local panel L gt Note The IPB always requests data and the SCB responds The SCB never initiates communication e EC910 does not show up in the error log The error log is an IPB function and since communication is not working between the SCB and IPB the IPB never receives the error 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 117 Service Manual IPB to SCB Communications Overview EC910 Schematic IPB SCB RxLED Rx LED Ye RS422 ae Os serial KN comm Tx LED lines 8700 241L IPB Troubleshooting 1 Symptom IPB cannot communicate with keypads MPC or SCB Solution a Press the reset button on the IPB If this clears the problem try to determine what preceded the IPB lockup If this does not fix the problem continue with b b Reconfigure the IPB to factory defaults by holding down RESET and CONFIG buttons Then release RESET while continuing to hold CONFIG for 15 seconds This resets IPB SCB comm parameters and MPC comm parameters If this does not fix the problem continue with c c Perform the following steps 1 Connect only the power cable and the SCB cable CN1102 10 pin multi colored cable Then remove all other cables and boards Does EC910 go away 2 Connect only the power cable and the MPC cable CN1101 upper left flat ribbon cable Then remove all other cables and boards Can you con
112. 0 78 8077 4159 6 13 26 1007 0924 0 15 26 1007 4918 8 78 8063 4088 7 78 8075 2603 9 78 8075 2542 9 78 8075 2543 7 78 8075 2604 7 78 8077 4026 7 Figure 8 25 External System Interfaces Cabling Description Qty UNIVERSAL KEYPAD ELECT INTERFACE UKEIB 1 KEYPAD FIBER ELECTRONIC iNTERFACE BOX Not shown 1 DIGITAL ELECTRONIC INTERFACE BOX DEIB 1 VIDEO ELECTRONIC INTERFACE BOX EVEIB with External Sync 1 VIDEO ELECTRONIC INTERFACE BOX EVEIB without External Sync 1 POWER CORD ASSY U L SCA Rated Only 1 POWER CORD ASSY International AR MPOOTS WITCH waa paari ham do ete Pen een ee AR CABLE Fiber Optic 3m 10 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Fiber Optic 10m 33 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Fiber Optic 30m 98 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Fiber Optic 60m 198 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Fiber Optic 100m 330 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Fiber Optic 150m 495 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Fiber Optic 200m 660 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Fiber Optic 250m 825 Ft See Note 2 AR CABLE Fiber Optic 300m 1090 Ft See Note 2
113. 0 300 Bia RPB RECEIVE N Y TRIO 2a 21 PROC SERIAL D 321 gt NOt CN509 ES SR3 WIN DATA INDICATOR IMAGE DATA TO IPB 2322 22 PROG SERIALI 322 2527 1327 527 115513 1 Y GRN FROM IPB CN1101 CN1402 SPARE SCH 2323 23 2 2528 28 598 2 H552 4 2 Ra POWER LED TI UY 1803 RPE REOEWER A 50 BCD p 5VCC 29 3 CN809 ED VACUUM a Hi SR GE 834 M ORN SW801 NG lam POWER CONNECTS 012 use t 48 TRA FILTER e 2835 2 835 2 RED pl FILTER CEE RELAY TO DRUM ca et WATCH DIST 47 o 2836 3 BEILTER HOME 838 Si BEK PRESENT EC RED S IER l A DOG vcc CN606 CN603 BOARD BE 46 0 ROLL 2837 4 837 4 BRN Lo SENSOR T901 120VAC K901 d 15A S TS902 1 543 51K 5 1 553 K l TIMER U3 A an wur Je 673 9 12 2673 45 lt BACK naga 2838 5 838 5 SCH 905 906 908 1 917 2 544 6 556 Y i I CART LORY Ste 672 a em EE eeh y CN301 SE KE RED SIE e JP2 R27 Dow D7 AA d GRN 3 671 7 11 2671 asko 2316 16 316 1 ORN 918 1 A NC 4 5407 7 ZONE 1 RED TP RENCOR Png RED 2 670 6 23 2670 42 Le V PROC 4 2317 17 317 2 HRED pi swso2 E ai 2 y BLK RED 8 554 1 1 Na E Em l d us i R BLK 1 669 5 10 2669 41 ENT 2318 tner 318 3 BLK PROC ENTR 919 930 3 2930 9 2 E i 5 2 Po E 4 us Geay CN601 CARN 2319 19 319 4 BRN Lo SENSOR Se 920 BES 3 BR GE Ka SEE Ek va A Wiens WHT 75 605 HS HOME 5 2605 40 e SHOME Dei TE 2320 20 320 5 a 1 01 4 2921 CN508 acount ZONE 3 WHT 4 8 of More 1 REG HH po He 3 CART PRY pi anilla ae S SE
114. 0 1 VDC 17 3 0 3 VDC 17 3 0 3 VDC 24 2 0 4 VDC Special Tools Digital Voltmeter WARNING When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the 8700 These voltages can cause severe injury or death Measurement TP5H1 TP519 TP7G1 5V AGND LOGIC GND EEN o D 0 0g DO OOOOOOO00000000000000000 ta oo ef I O d in JE Un MIB O 3M ASSY 78 8094 5102 0 TP5I8 TP611 TP6K1 TP7K1 17V 17V GND 24V Adjustment OUTPUT OUTPUT ADJ ADJ 17V 17V 24V K801 SW805 Processor Power Power Switch Relay SW1001 SW801 Service Filter Override Present Interlock Sensor M801 Filtration Fan Interlock FRAME COMPONENTS SW405 Feed Sensor M403 Platen Motor Y401 Tongue Dep Solenoid Y402 Transport Multi Feed Feed Solenoid E Board SW406 Tongue Dep Sensor SW404 Mid Transport Sensor Tongue Dep Interlock SW402 Platen Enter Sensor M402 T
115. 00 130C Figure 4 42 4 36 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 4 3 Pickup Motor M501 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the pickup module 4 4 1 Disconnect j Remove 2 8700 127C Figure 4 43 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 37 Service Manual 4 4 4 Vacuum Pump M502 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the pickup module 4 4 1 5 Disconnect 8700 126C Figure 4 44 4 38 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 4 5 Picker Down Sensor SW501 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the pickup module 4 4 1 8700 125C Remove 2 Disconnect 8700 142C Figure 4 46 2001 Ma
116. 1 LED BOARD en A9 a REG 9 20 gt ee EN ENABLE 45V ACTIVE TES FILTER 25601 3 y o V 2 y Y Y vy E Y F R AND H F OV ACTIVE NN mI mp mp P 455 2 NA 4 T 10 CN1207 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 12345 6 7 8 9 14 CN1204 12345 6 CN1213 HZ SPEED CONTROL PULSES 21H7 443H1 4N1H8 2 2H9 FEED B RTN CN404 454 8 e 3 P F pa pa x BARRE EEE le x Te D D D NN D ff ER 1 33 2409 9 409 7 453 7 3 DENSITY a gt Ja a gt x Ele gt lal a ol gt gt E gt ZA H i FEED FEED B dv 2 e DRIVE 1 teense mee E SEET e col 2193 FA 9 5S7 Sz S S S fa 133 5s paa E MOTOR d FEED RIN E E e ag SET wan 1 Tye o 2353232252535 le 3535 Egle ge I3 122 2 4 VBS BEC TP6K1 Re FEED A 15 2412 12 412 1 S aag ir sl ell Flajaja E Zz DI DI aly II Ulli ye NAY Ei e NE E E A BEES e RG OVER E EE 12 Y lt po gt SRE lt a poz ala tele lala god Fo Al z TP7K1 ACCLK a ad Al ae 5 LE 5 Z 2 9 g a 8ls 5 2 915 3 9 5 5 P7 E TP SIP SIP SIP CN501 8 gro ENEZ l x o Xx Ce a HI NN Do 14 a a Ole Tu al E di lala DT 24V AC i gous 1 OAE AA FICK BIN 35 2501 1 501 3 A0 pensity KY TP2 7 a z a Elo 28 2 DS6K2 DS911 FILTER GON 5VCC gt CLK l NEG PICK ARTN 16 2502 2 502 4 mso1 PICKUP GAIN NG Sc eV TP BI bees GEN i DRIVE PICKA 36 2303 3 203 MOTOR Rano 8h S lt 4A 4A ry Se LAA 2504 L4 504 2 9 Arig a pag Paa vom ml 12A N 9 F7J1 Li Li
117. 110 ECNTLO ite i S COMM DGND 20 2 OPTICS ENGINE KILLX sl ee NERO FCNTL1 ge S BOARD OEB B1 a OUT CKT DGND A 4 PIXEL CLOCK POWER gt el aaa FCNTL2 el 3 5 EXPOSURE CORRECTION ra 12V RET RAM PGND 22 ele DIODE INTENSITY CONTROL 12V RET BUG D 2MB 0 el 4 7 DIFFERENTIAL RECEIVERS a BEE i SV 1 x 16 POND 23 8 PING PONG FIFOS Bo SE DUAL LDCNTL2 el We A11 z CONFIG LDO 3 PORT K gt 6 11 B14 AT A10 gt IA SEA swe RESET CDi T Th STATUS DETECTION lt Za ro Swi gt 7 13 B20 DEN Mr Y MICRO RESET sT Loy gt 26 14 l A24 DHAL PORT gt 68032 LOGIC Y E4 gt 8 15 B24 pp 16 665 MHz NIA LD6 Te e Y AXIS DRIVE A25 WR a LOS CONTROL D 128 18 e GALVO SCANNER B25 fa 7 DS2 TO CN1206 LD8 S l IPB RESET BED m10 19 Y LATCH SERVO CONTROLLER B29 LOCK RED THRU CN1007 LD9 129 20 gt 16 BIT DAC a DC IN ON SHEET 2 LD10 DGND ON PINS N LD11 WEI SS Y DAC BITS gt TEMP CONTROLLER l A2 A8 A10 A23 RS422 SERIAL I F BI7VE 7V up 5 OVE XCNTLO SE 53 e VOLTAGE REGS A26 A28 A30 A31 RS232 SERIAL I F KA A A A DGND e 54 CN706 CN707 A32 B8 B10 B23 YCNTLO a os TI H7VSW 17V a B26 B28 B30 B32 V y Yy ist YCNTL1 W SG gt HIN SW 17V CN1101 2 4 12 13 19 21 23 25 26 27 29 30 32 33 34 CN1102 1 2 3 4 7 8 cNito6l 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 E gt 14 27 3 AGND AGND 3 a Je o a 2 x x 5D a 3 OMCON S Se 4 AGND AGND LV iyd N l N a S ES gt gt m m m m a a a m DG
118. 2 RED PR SICKER ava 929 13 853 861 9 862 3 353 0 354 SA RARAS OS NAAA E PORSAS NAA Se TR Fee S 1 4 BLK 1 436 2436 26 o DOWN 2509 9 eege 509 13 L GRN fe 3 DOWN ety rh 8543 RED Sp pa CN412 DB A 2510 10 510 4 BLU DRV SENSOR 934901 4 855 BIK DRUM HOME SENSOR F IN EARLY 5 435 ATED 2435 25 PEED TP5 2511 11 511 5 WHT 942 K901 935 5 856 BLC 5V gt au MACHINES SW405 a K BRN 4 434 2434 m24 e NU CN505 941 928 YYYN Gg 936 6 857 H 2 ONLY FEED BLK 3 433 2433 23k o maa 2512 12 512 TE BLK pin SENSOR kd RED 2 432 2432 22 A e FILM 2513 13 513 2 RED Ke SW502 CN902 1 2 cl POWER ORN 1 431 2431 21 OUT 2514 our 514 3 GRN 4 a FILM OUT 858 SWITCH Vv 4 pa ghia 20 9 ENT o 2515 15 515 14 BLU DRV kl SENSOR 1 9 3 4 5 6ICN905 70 SW805 v SW402 7 ENT PLATEN SE TP6 7 ane We RE H pas PLATEN Ai BRN 4 430 2430 m19 amp O CN506 CN906 Loss Goes BLK 3 429 2429 18 TEG 2517 17 517 TE BLK 1 FILTRATION AMPL We Ca SENSOR Mm RED 2 428 2428 17 A s RICK 2518 18 518 2 Ro SW503 2 POWER Ea 5V ORN 1 427 2427 16 TOP 2519 Seege nala 3 GRN pi il PICKER UP BOARD TP5 1 CN409 15 ENT A 2520 20 520 4 BLU DRV rel SENSOR gt TP3 v 5 See SE TP7 e 2521 21 521 5 WHT T KON SW403 VA BRN 4 426 2426 m14 e gt CN507 CN307 Y PLATEN EXIT BLK 3 425 2425 13ko 2522 22 522 TE BLK d DS1 1 5 SENSOR 1d RED 2 424 2424 12 s n PICK 2523 23 523 2 RED JI SW504 PROC HOME fg GRN E Y
119. 20 Drive Film through Processor to Exit Tray Sequence 8700 200A 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 23 Service Manual 7 5 Error Code Index Ke te ose anar Deeg None EIB or IB not detected by IPB 5 K None K L59 ALM 65 EIB or IB returned incorrect EOT indicating that FAI SET the acquire was done on the wrong input port None K65 None FAI SET Error detected when reading EIB or IB parameters from NVRAM None Kes 68 ALM 68 Timeout waiting for pixels from EIB or IB None K ALM 61 Error detected when reading EIB or IB parameters from NVRAM K None K72 ALM 66 Image memory address has crossed the boundary of available memory i None K None FAI SET IMS system memory not input module memory error occurred during acquisition None K203 Local panel failed None L111 Cartridge feed roller open failed P116 K202 L116 ALM 60 Pickup arm could not be moved to proper position 6 6 None 65 i Data overflow or underflow 8 L68 72 L59 None ALM 64 IPB detected parity error during acquisition L66 None 72 ALM 67 Too many pixels received from EIB or IB 72 None K85 L85 FAI MOV Image memory full FAI BSY P121 K202 L121 ALM 60 Optics module attenuator error P126 K202 L126 ALM 60 SCB unable to detect EOL signal from optics module P130 K215 ALM 14 Supply door open P122 K202 L122 ALM 60 SCB cannot communicate with optics module P132 K215 ALM 12 No supply cartridge P123 K202 L123 ALM
120. 2659 555 4 BLU EGHANA 7 RFI K BOOT ROM SOLENOID gt 27 M FEED NIP F R m27 LS 9 15V o asal BLK AGND mi FILTERS DOV RAM DRIVE SE ee 5 M FEED NIP H F WS 10 LeveL PIP DATAN 6 266 YEr 3 YEL BAR CODE EN UNG 23 M FEED NIP HZ ale 24V DET Hi maa 10 10ke 1926625 13 ark AND 10 LATCH 30 DGND m30 L vec HV 11 11 7126638525 s RK OUR AGE 0 131 3th eo TP4I2 BOARD Wa A A vk 417V lily look 2664BRNI 14 BRN aS 17VDD gt Le 32 A PESO gt 32 CN1310 CN1010 45V 12V 43 HIN Jus 3 L 2665 BLK 7 BLK AGND r gt 33 GATE SOL 33 TPA DA CARTA CN602 CN603 CN605 CN609 CN604 16 JP4 A A a ORN ORN AN E PLATEN EN DC MOTOR 1 20 2651 1 e 1 1 1 ROLLBACK gt 116 REG REG 14 14 e _1011 2666 15 14 e lt I7VEE DATA BUS 34 g gt 34 gt CART RIN M601 Se e Se RED l5 RED AGND ES E PLATEN F R SE DRIVE d 2 1 2652 2 2 2 2 2 MTR CN613 Fhe 36 PLATEN H F gt 36 3 L T PEAK Reo 5 PLATEN HZ 37 a Lt el 20 RESET 38 DGND ae TP1H1 TP3H7 TP1H2 TP3H6 esa ees SEQUENCE ANALOG I F fe 39 BEAT TOP SOL 39 4 5VCC 24V i CONTROL E 40 PLAT CENT SOL WE 1 2 3 loNeia gt ADCONV fe 41 PLAT BOT SOL 141 EXIT B RTN SR SR Y sa XPORT EN a Fed rsa 25 2301 1 301 6 ASIG CN1004 CN1202 XPORT F R H 12 6 2302 2 302 2 EXIT 7 RF ANTENNA SCA i BLK AN SHIFT PEAK _BPWR gt pi XPORT H F WE Ee EE 26 2303 3 303 5 4 M803 J MOTOR BOARD 9 RED 17V gt lt 17VDD REG DET 45 XPORT HZ IS CN EN DES RAL DEE IA ER
121. 3235 0 SPRING External 188 OD X 018 Wire Diaxii1 b 1 4 78 8656 4004 5 RING Retaining External Eng 1 5 78 8094 5911 4 BRACKET Solenoid FD 1 6 Not Avallable sc LATCH FD xx a woke Lada ee LE ANA AB oes NANA ae 1 as 78 8094 5915 5 RO Si Pusher EE eelst a AEN NEEN EE NEE dean wae E 1 8 78 8094 5917 1 BEARING Pusher FD 2 2 2220 naan n eraran 2 9 Not Availables FRAME FD baii fun BIEN Oe tee ce oe ta hand db Man PEG 1 10 26 1008 9134 5 GROMMET Ribbed 563 OD X 219 ID with 063 groove 1 11 Not Available LEVER Switch ED 1 12 Not Available BRACKET S Pusher ED 1 13 26 1005 6369 6 SPRING Compression 360 OD X 029 Wire Dia 1 14 78 8094 5947 8 PIN Switch ED 1 15 78 8094 5949 4 BLOCK Latch FD a 1 16 Not Available BLOCK Bearing FD io ia A tan ae NLA ew et 1 17 78 80924040 7 EIN ass Bea Bante Run baa aig aetna ne alert te INA ORE Created dno 1 18 26 1003 7755 0 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 16 Sems Internal Tooth 1 19 12 7996 2818 0 RING Retaining External 0 ccc cece eee eee eee 1 20 26 1005 5214 5 NUT Mach Hex Metric Lock M3 X 05 1 21 26 1003 7119 9 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 2 22 26 1003 7121 5 SCREW
122. 4 Disassembly Reassembl Swing open 8700 103C Disconnect cable Remove screw 9 Release plastic standoffs 2 Figure 4 102 1202688 4 91 Service Manual 4 10 8 Cooling Fan Motors M1001 M1003 A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 3 Remove the electronics enclosure cover 4 1 4 L Disconnect Remove SI 4 8700 105C 6 Remove fan tray Figure 4 103 4 92 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 5 Additional Information Section 5 Additional Information 5 1 Required Tools In addition to standard hand tools screwdrivers etc the tools listed in this subsection are required to service the 8700 8500 IMAGER All the tools are available from Service Parts Management Note the following e With the exception of Items 7 through 9 the listed tools are a subset of the tools required to service the Kodak 969 HQ LASER IMAGER e Items 1 through 3 are provided to Kodak service technicians Non Kodak service technicians must obtain them locally 1 Personal computer with 486 based processor 32 MB RAM 5 MB hard disk s
123. 418 R4J8 5 K801 o 20 129 Ground this point to turn on K801 MIS 219A Figure 7 21 Checking 60 Hz Phasing Incorrect brush installation Correct brush installation 8700 407A Figure 7 22 Slip Rring Brush Alignment 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 87 Service Manual 7 6 55 EC507 Processor returning bad data Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X L507 PROCESSOR_INV_ ALM 17 P507 is not operational TEMP_DATA Summary If after transmitting a request for status from the Rotating Processor Board RPB the SCB receives a response but the data is invalid parity errors or corrupted data or the reported drum temperature is outside the specified 50 to 300 F range the SCB generates the following message EC507 Processor returning bad data The operator is instructed to open and close the top cover to clear the error Phone Fix Operator Correctable Open and then close the top cover to clear the error On Site Technician Correctable Cause Drum temperature is less than 50 degrees F due to storage in a cold room Solution Allow drum to acclimate to room temperature 7 88 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 56 EC509 Processor failed to warm up in allotted time Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Print
124. 5 40 41 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 1 2 3 4 5 6 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 61 62 63 64 CN1211 l CN1206 CN10071 system UI E E EVENE 7 LECNTLO De CONTROL A Tdesnd all SIL el lessons ales an zl ol l lelul gt lalx sl alaiaisiolalelalelalh DGND O 10 N CMS NIN of Zi Z l Sf a wl alal amp Ed GO N N x N S lu 2 BOARD V Ollas S lt lt all oll amp lt don Ko ka Ea TESIS 319 OOO 0 O S FI Sl ala V FCNTL1 NN 5VEC 5 9ml 5 S ol l Heeze ta S 2S lo o Sa S aa ao ul 5vCC gt S DGND D Z Ke Cie OI gt a 4 2 5 ala 9 5 ECNTL2 Sr D 5VCC D 45V DGND AIN ATV Y 7 HOSNTEO gt __ gt S LDCNTL1 gle TO MCU TO MCU TO MCU LDCNTL2 10159 m10 2 0 T 2 12012 13 D3 13 14s gt 14 15 rps gt 15 gt 16 LD6 m16 SE ES DRIVERS 18 L07 li LOS CONTROL E S y NE E L SE PRINTER FIBER I F BOARD SHEET 1 iOS POWER OSATEN DATA ADDRESS BUS FILTERS S LD10 20 ON SHEET 1 TO CN703 THRU CN1012 ON SHEET 1 ____ TO CN704 THRU CN1011 ON SHEET 1 CN1208 52 LD11 elas CN1012 13 25 12 2411 23 10 22 9 21 8 20 7 19 6 18 5 17 4 16 3 15 2 14 1 CN1011 162738495 5 IMSTXD B 53 XONTLO S ukol Z 7 NSS Be YENTLO ala o Hu S 6 IMSRXD 25 gt 25 z HO ec mola NOT ke YCNTL1 zZ S w T USED LIMSRX gt 28 YCNTL2 wee T 22 SE a SOLENOID TEST POINTS 3 fe 27 m27 ala VIN alalal o alola alala alalr Ou TO
125. 5 volts of each other 1 6 Retighten the actuator screw 7 Repeat the Measurement and Adjustment procedures as needed to achieve the difference spec 200 8 If you cannot achieve the range value adjust R6 see Figure 3 16 to between 1530 and 1850 Figure 3 16 9 Slide the transport back into place close the left side door and install the supply cartridge 10 Do the pickup arm height calibration 3 10 2001 May Rev M 1202688 3 19 Service Manual 3 10 Pickup Arm Height Calibration L gt Note This procedure should be performed after the multifeed board MFB actuator adjustment 8 or 3 9 has been performed or after the system control board SCB has been replaced Special Tools Maintenance Personal Computer MPC MPC for Windows software package Adjustment Connect the MPC to the MPC port on the rear of the IMAGER Power up the MPC and start the MPC for Windows program Click on the SCB button or open the Operations menu and select Subsystem SCB Select the Config button to display the 8700 8500 Imager Setup window Select the Pickup Arm Height button A confirmation window is displayed Select the Yes button to initiate the calibration gt Note For a detailed description of the events that occur during the calibration process refer to the MPC for Windows Help file DON E O UN 3 20 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 3 Adjust
126. 50 1 80 26 1006 0708 9 CLAMP Gable 0 0 a 2 81 78 8094 5964 3 PIN Solenoid 1 82 18 8094 5925 4 BIN LINK 22248 toc ceed Gasen D ag ea ton Ware tar dines Ba aed tee RG ote 1 83 78 8094 5793 6 COVER CH 1 84 26 1004 0974 2 WASHER Lock Internal 214 1 85 Not Available LABEL Laser Danger 2 1 86 i 78 8094 5924 7 BIN AIM ei tes cs a Ja ng Kana NG PLA Wa aed ad toad ak la oe 1 87 26 1011 7121 8 SPRING External 125 OD X 875 018 Wire 1 88 78 8000 8621 3 BEARING 1885 BORE X 2343 OD X 078 W 2 89 78 8094 5167 3 HARNESS ASSEMBLY Transport 400 1 90 Not Avallable z TIE WRAP maana Ye eee a tnd erin Beare de owed aa DB ANAN RING 15 91 Not Available DECAL Handle 2 92 Not Available DECAL Guide Handle 1 93 78 8094 5866 0 MOUNT Switch 1 94 26 1011 6938 6 SWITCH SPDT 10 A 125 250 277 VAC 5 125 VDC 1 95 96 0000 0166 7 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M2 5 X 0 45 X 14 0 2 96 78 8092 5409 3 BRACKET Harness
127. 5162 4 Not Available 78 8092 4175 1 26 1003 6937 5 26 1003 7120 7 26 1011 6644 0 78 8094 5755 5 26 1011 6639 0 26 1011 6643 2 Not Available 78 8094 5757 1 26 1007 4915 4 Not Available Figure 8 21 Power Module Assembly Description Qty POWER MODULE ASSEMBLA US a de 1 POWER MODULE ASSEMBLY OU Sica sce dans ee Don LAG yal KG 1 SCREW Mach Hex Head Metric M6 X 1 0 X 80 4 WASHER Plain 1 4 500 OD X 031 T FIBER 4 TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY T901 agam NA NAA deeg bead geb 1 ENCLOSURE BASE ASSEMBLY 1 FILTER 10 A 120 150 V 50 60 HZ LF901 abia 1 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M3 X 0 5 X 8 0 2 CIRCUIT BREAKER 3 A 50 VDC 250 VAC CB904 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER 8 A 50 VDC 250 VAC CB903 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER 15A 32 VDC 250 VAC CB902 1 TAG Caution 120 220V 15 20A EL a cet Loe wth ares Roark Rea ed hes Be 1 PANEL Air Power Module 1 WASHER Metric Plain M3 17 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 11 SCREW Mach Pan head Phil Metric 6 32 X 250 Sems Internal Tooth ALT LABEL Warning Disconnect Power 2 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M4 X 0 7 X 45
128. 6 IPB asserts REQUEST line low while it finds the best fit or first fit in memory for the image size L gt Note On an stand alone IMAGER with a touch screen keypad memory is not cleared unless Best Fit is selected 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 39 Service Manual After the IPB has successfully received the header information pixels and lines in the image it causes the REQUEST line to go low while it calculates the best fit in memory to store the image Error State If the IMAGER reply to the header information takes longer than the host is willing to wait the host wait timing is out of spec e The host errors out and stops sending data with a resultant EC68 Acquire Timeout e Or the host will send the header twice The IPB is expecting the second transmission to be image data and errors out with EC59 No EOT End of Transmission IPB requests first line of image data Once the 8700 8500 IMAGER or 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER has found a spot in memory for the upcoming data it will reassert the REQUEST line to an active state for the next line of image data and the host will respond with STROBE line active then idle then active for each pixel across the line e During normal transmission the preceding sequence of events occurs very fast in relation to the XMT LED During normal transmission the XMT LED turns on blinks and then stays on as the image data is transferred e Be aware that the XMT LED is only a general
129. 6 to 0 008 inch gap between drum and stripper 0 007 inch feeler gauge Top View 007 Adjustment Lock Screw Screw M3 Allen 1 Remove lockscrews M3 Allen at ends of stripper 2 Turn adjustment screws as required CCW decreases gap 3 Position adjustment screws to align closest locking slot for insertion of lockscrews 4 Replace lockscrews and recheck gap Densitometer Calibration Specification Special Tools Measurement Adjustment 10 A D out gain of 1640 10 A D out offset of 20 2 MPC using MPC for Windows software Using the MPC 1 Open Operations menu and select Diagnostics 2 Select Processor Subsystem 3 Select Densi button to display Densitometer Test window 4 Check values displayed for A D Out Gain and A D Out Offset 1 Peel back calibration label 2 Adjust Gain and Offset pots as required SR N ES SUE INE Offset Gain E F 5 2 VDC Power Supply P5902 Adjustment Used only if system has a VIB Specification 5 2 0 2 VDC Special Tools Digital Voltmeter WARNING When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the 8700 These voltages can cause severe injury or death Measurement VIB 1 CET TP31 TPGND2 5 2V GND Adjustment 5 17 and 24 VDC Power Supply PS901 Adjustments Specification 5 1
130. 74 Part Number 78 8656 4001 1 Not Available 78 8094 5104 6 26 1003 5768 5 26 1003 7119 9 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 16 Sems Internal Tooth 12 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 Sems External Tooth 49 WASHER Plain Nylon 257 ID X 500 OD X 032 1 26 1003 7760 0 26 1003 7121 5 26 1003 3672 1 26 1003 7116 5 26 1011 7147 3 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 16 Processor Assembly continued Description Qty RING Retaining External Eng 2 HARNESS ASSEMBLY Processor 300 1 PWA Processor Communication Board 1 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5X6 Q 4 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 12 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 14 LATCH SIAM uta ane LA DA wer eek A nf Gab cn Mag de ANN paha 2 78 8095 9454 8 SPACER Latch Processor 2 70 0060 8362 3 TAPE 1 00 W X 60 YD X 005 AR 78 8094 5808 2 LATCH Stripper AA 2 26 1011 6784 4 SCREW Metric Shoulder 4 X 3 75 W M3 X 0 5 THD 2 Not Available LABEL Processor Prop Rod 2 96 0000 0343 2 ROLLER ASSEMBLY 22222222200 000 29 96 0000 0309 3 RETAINER 2222 20 manaia mane ee teen een ene nent
131. 78 8092 5518 1 TRANSPORT GUIDE FRONT ASSEMBLY 1 11 78 8092 5519 9 TRANSPORT GUIDE BACK ASSEMBLY 1 12 78 8092 5535 5 ROLLER Entry Drive Bue 1 13 78 8094 5356 2 PULLEY Mod Drive Roller 2 14 78 8092 5534 8 ROLLER Transport Drive Bue 1 15 78 8094 5382 8 PULLEY Mod Transport Roller 1 16 78 8094 5416 4 BUSHING Plate 0 ccc ene eee teenie enn e ene 1 17 78 8094 5384 4 CLUTCH PULLEY ASSEMBLY 1 18 78 8094 5571 6 HANDLE Clutch Pulley 1 19 78 8092 5533 0 ROLLER Platen Drive Bue 1 20 78 8094 5721 7 ROLL NIP ASSEMBLY Blue 3 21 78 8094 5723 3 FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY 1 22 78 8094 5185 5 SHAFT Gate 0 EE 1 23 x 78 8094 5186 3 PLATE Gate tii KR See heheh BNG AKALANG ARA ide Sul on ee IA 1 24 78 8094 5195 4 BRACKET Solenoid Gate 1 25 78 8094 5138 4 GATE DOOR SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1 26 78 8095 9527 1 TRANSPORT FEED SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1 27 78 8094 5192 1 LINK Solenoid 1 28 78 8094 5187 1 ACTUATOR Solenoid 1 29 78 8094 5189 7 PIN Solenoid EE 2 30 78 8094 5191 3 PIN Solenoid A Kada ENE
132. 78H 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 41 Service Manual Figure 8 12 Transport Module Assembly Screen 2 of 4 1202688 2001 May Rev M 8 42 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 12 Transport Module Assembly Screen 3 of 4 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 43 Service Manual Figure 8 12 Transport Module Assembly Screen 4 of 4 N N 8 82 IN E SR LW LA O GETTING d O Y Wi gt Ge IN 5 8 00 o 77 KA 0 NAI PA SS ZE 3 N c0 co o o SW405 is only used in early production machines 1202688 2001 May Rev M 8 44 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 12 Transport Module Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty OA 78 8094 5700 1 TRANSPORT MODULE ASSEMBLY 8700 1 OB 78 8092 5500 9 TRANSPORT MODULE ASSEMBLY 8500 1 1 Not Available FRAME Transport ege de ug AS aide twee teen ere sates 1 2 Not Available BAR Support Transport ere nana sd ee bean ts dE E wad 1 3 Not Available ENTRY GUIDE BACK ASSEMBLY ossature ea 1 4 Not Available ENTRY GUIDE FRONT ASSEMBLY 1 5 6 Not Used T 6 18 8094 5455 2 o COVER SIOR sine ats san pen sa tae A ee ia nn tate war 2 8 Not Available EXIT GUIDE FRONT ASSEMBLY 1 9 Not Available EXIT GUIDE BACK ASSEMBLY sicario aa ds a nhs La 1 10
133. 8 Rollback Carriage Assembly 1202688 2001 May Rev M 8 32 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 8 Rollback Carriage Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty O Not Available ROLLBACK CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY 222222220 1 Not Available CARRIAGE Rollback 24 045 2244 tose den ea Sree LALA LAN ALAK EAR tien 1 2 Not Available MOUNT 4 WAY 5 3 5 7E2654 RETAINING STRAP aa baa dt ead bee Pontet ets 4 4 7E2652 1 oes cede CABLE ASSEMBLY Carriage Input to Sensor Motor 1 5 78 8094 5129 3 990 SWITCH ASSEMBLY Cartridge Open Sensor SW603 1 6 26 1003 7116 5 SCREW MACH Sems Ext T Stl Pan Phil M3 X 0 5 X 10 0 2 7 26 1003 7115 7 SCREW MACH Sems Ext T Stl Pan Phil M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 2 8 26 1008 5590 2 NUT MACH Keps Ext T Stl M3 X 0 5 8 9 Not Available TIE WRAP ss doute ka dane DARNA KAG LL add RE debated bod woke ERT SES 4 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 33 Service Manual Figure 8 9 Rollback Cartridge Sensor Assembly 8 34 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 9 Rollback Cartridge Sensor Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty 1 Not Available VANE Sensor Rollback See Note 1 1 2 Not Available
134. 8 14 Platen Assembly continued Item No Part Number Description Qty 59 Not Available TIE WRAP et a ttt eee A n eee 5 61 26 1011 6517 8 WASHER Shoulder Nylon e 482 claves dene KYA PALAD ANAL ATAS ethene bt ous 2 62 12 7996 2818 0 RING Retaining External Eng 2 64 78 8094 5720 9 SPRING Sensor Arm 1 65 26 1011 6562 4 SCREW Shoulder Hex Socket Metric 6 0 DIA X 30 M5 X 0 8 1 66A 78 8094 5696 1 SIDE ACCESS DOOR ASSEMBLY 8700 1 66B 78 8092 5481 2 SIDE ACCESS DOOR ASSEMBLY 8500 1 67 Not Available CABLE ASSEMBLY 701 Platen Ground 1 68 Not Available LABEL Laser Danger 2 2 71 26 1011 6823 0 NUT Mach Metric M6 X 1 00 kens 1 72 26 1008 5460 8 WASHER Metric Lock M6 0 External Tooth 1 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 53 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 8 54 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 15 Processor Entrance Assembly 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 55 Service Manual Item o Z 8 O JO OR D Part Number Not Available 78 8094 5434 7 78 8094 5422 2 78 8092 5560 3 78 8094 5647 4 78 8094 5447 9 26 1011 6814 9 78 8656 4000 3 78 8001 2446 9 26 1011 6815 6
135. 8 8 65 Service Manual Figure 8 20 Exit Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty 0 78 8094 5660 7 EXIT ASSEMBLY 0 0 0c ete tenet een eens 1 1 78 8094 5463 6 BEARING Spring dio d Cea iw LANG een OR ee dR EN ae 4 2 78 8092 5537 1 ROLLER NIP Exit Blue 1 Sus Not Avallable FRAY Film Exit e een D ag ete ee Ware oat vad d ges WE 1 4 78 8092 4011 8 PLATE Nut Exit 2 2 0 444 dessu eue 1 5 Not Available BRACKET Right Exit coc rta Ma ANG dada date dn ea Male ead ae kd 1 6 26 1011 7241 4 PULLEY with 8 32 Set Screw 1 7 26 1011 6535 0 BELT Stock Drive 0186 P 40 DP 175 Grooves 250 W 1 9 78 8092 4076 1 MOTOR ASSEMBLY M303 Shaft With Spline See Note 1 1 10 78 8092 4010 0 PULLEYS Drive RA dd Gina ante an 3 11 26 1003 7119 9 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 19 12 Not Available GUIDE Filmy Exit wae NA 1 13 12 7996 5868 2 RING Retaining External E Ring 9 14 78 8094 5129 3 990 SWITCH ASSEMBLY SW304 1 15 26 1003 7115 7 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 2 16 26 1003 7923 4 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M2 X 0 4 X 10 0 1 17 78 8094 5619 3 ARM
136. 8500 1 47 78 8094 5942 9 TONGUE DEPRESSOR SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1 48 70 B094 5919 7 ARM e ae RTE 1 49 78 8094 5920 5 BRACKET Tongue Depressor 1 50 78 8094 5975 9 LINK Tongue Depressor ox an er Bada wes kailanga bade eee bey dae a 1 51 78 8094 5963 5 BRACKET Solenoid 1 52 78 8094 5129 3 990 SWITCH ASSEMBLY 2222202220200 ccc ete eens 1 53 78 8094 5726 6 MULTIFEED SENSOR ASSEMBLY 1 54 78 8094 5130 1 850 SWITCH ASSEMBLY 22222220202 ccc esse 3 55 78 8094 5561 7 BEARING Mod 5 56 78 8161 4221 6 BEARING 3765 ID X 502 OD X 062 5 57 12 7996 5868 2 RING Retaining External Eng 13 58 26 1003 7119 9 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 52 59 26 1003 7120 7 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 7 60 26 1003 7121 5 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 0 Sems External TOOT hd KAMI en ae desc wad Neth Pea AG BG Landis 10 61 26 1003 7115 7 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 12 62 26 1011 6711 7 WASHER Spring 400 ID X 612 OD X OOOT 1 63 26 1008 9102 2 WASHER Metric Plai
137. 8700 135C Figure 4 54 4 46 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 5 3 Rollback Motor Home Sensor SW601 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the rollback module 4 5 1 Remove 2 RS Remove 2 TV 8700 136C Figure 4 55 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 47 Service Manual 4 5 4 Cartridge Open Sensor SW603 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the rollback module 4 5 1 8700 134C Figure 4 56 4 48 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 5 5 Cartridge Present Sensor SW604 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the rollback module 4 5 1 WAN Remove 2 Disconnect Remove 2 8700 137C Figure 4 57
138. 92 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshooting Jam at Cooling Section Due to Stall Out Jam Position Film is found stopped with leading edge on cooling section after the stripper but before the densitometer Film Description Leading edge of film is flat and undamaged Trailing edge is still on drum and is overdeveloped A small amount of film wrinkling accordion style may occur on the trailing edge but for the most part the film is undamaged Cause Intermittent toggle of processor entry sensor SW302 If this switch toggles before it is truly the end of the sheet the imager thinks the trailing edge has cleared the processor entrance and begins the timing countdown for the leading edge to reach the densitometer sensor SW301 The leading edge does not reach the densitometer sensor in time and film stops where it is Solution 1 Verify processor entry sensor feet are fully clipped in 2 Verify processor entrance switch flag is centered in slot undamaged and free to move 3 Verify that entire processor module is pushed back and fully seated in the back rear of the frame 4 Verify processor entrance switch and Densitometer switch are working correctly Refer to QS4 3 Sensors and Interlocks for sensor monitoring information Jam at Cooling Section Due to Felt Pad Jam Position Film is stopped with leading edge on felt or cooling plate after stripper but before densitometer Film Description Lead
139. 94 5715 9 PIN Rolling Alignment EE 4 6 78 8094 5136 8 KICKER SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1 7A 78 8094 5135 0 PLATEN SOLENOID ASSEMBLY Y701 Y702 Y703 Y704 and Y705 For Machines prior to S N 8701048 Retainer Not Included 5 7B 78 8092 5400 2 PLATEN SOLENOID ASSEMBLY Y701 Y702 Y703 Y704 and Y705 For Machines after S N 8701048 Retainer Included 5 8 Not Available WELDMENT Platen 1 10 78 809425525 2 ARM KICK Gl esi sek acon WS ow eink ee Mae ed bed ae PAR Wade toe werden Wo 1 11 78 8094 5930 4 BRACKET Airpot 1 124 78 8094 5527 8 PANEL Rear 8700 4 2023 dita add ENEE a Ci wien ddd TAKA data dl 1 12B 78 8092 5480 4 PANEL Rear 8500 1 13 78 8094 5682 1 LEVER Hold Down 1 14 78 8094 5531 0 BLOCK Mounting 0 2225 corsa vets Soni Pade eRe See eee Ae Na nae 2 15 78 8094 5888 4 ARMATURE Film Sensor 1 16 78 8094 5533 6 BRACKET SWitch Platen 1 173 326 104 1 705724 22 CYLINDER EE 1 19 26 1011 6199 5 BEARING Metric 6 025 ID 7 20 OD X2 with 11 DIA flange 4 20 DY 1102 0663 7 SCREW Cap Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 Hex Socket 1 21 26 1011 6195 9 MOUNT CYyINdEr ua aa AR DAI ti EIERE ean Mela ees 8 26 78 8613 4822 1 GROMMET Rubb
140. AA E CR LECH ENEE pi 14 PROC BRTN 7 2304 4 304 14 CN302 gt BLK DGND 5 na PROC EN Wb gt O 15 GROCB 27 2305 5 305 1 73 e WHT ANODE LED y gt gt e PROC F R SE RESET EE e 16 PROCARTN 8 2306 6 306 2 PROCESSOR 3 BLK DGND A SS PROC H F SPARE EG Deg A V 17FROC A 28 2307 7 307 3 MOTOR y GRN EXIT SW 2 lg is PROC HZ ES LB j 18 9 2308 D 308 4 Sa e ue 12 8 cam a 51 m51 i Al TP SIP PIP FTP Chai en 5 BLK GIOOFLAG 9 Lt FILTERS 52 EXIT EN 52 AMH3 3H5 AIHA AN3H4 XPORT B RTN N40 CN402 i sal YE DENSON o Lie EXIT F R 5 Je TRANSPORT PORTE 2 2401 4 3 BLK 5V o LI wy YY EXIT HE a SE t PORTA RTN 10 2402 2 402 6 mao TRANSPORT a BRN GIOFLAG D el Ze EXIT HZ E NES D de r S 30 2403 3 403 4 02 MOTOR e BLK AGND pa PROC PWR ALY Ge L DRETT 11 2404 4 404 1 SW301 PROC EXIT SENSOR NEW DENSITOMETER BOARD ORN AGND DRIVERS RFI FILTERS SPARE SOL gt z Rom 2 JP3 15 14 57 gt 157 451 5 RED DGNSANALOG LASER INTLK OPEN 3 i 5 Lg k 58 MiS RST 58 Le SS TP SIP FTP SIP CN403 7 BLK 16 A aii eee mi 5 gt 59 A EP e Eh WA beta WA kee EZ MH5 S3H3 MH6 S3H2 PLATEN B RTN 452 Av DAV 3 io 2 ee Seis e e AAA 4444444444 74 M7VDD IGAN 60 24 VDC 60 SING A maan e PLATEN B 31 2405 5 405 9 8 21 5553 9V REG eh SCH lis X RFI gt O e 12 2406 6 406 6 PLATEN a GY E 01 c JANEE ain FIFA MOTOR PLATEN A RTN M403 do E 4 SE A 45VCC Kee PLATEN 32 2407 7 407 4 MOTOR 1 STANA OUEST E al ARA ATE AN OO ET 13 2408 8 408
141. Au ORN 1 423 2423 tipo MID 2524 24 524 3 I GRN 4 PICKER MID PROC SERIAL O 7 RS422 CN408 Ge MID PICKUP ARM MID PROC SERIAL OD la 10 o A 2525 25 525 4 BLU DRV ll SENSOR 6 RCVR 5 XPORT l 5 war PROC SERIAL l IR LED SW404 MIDXPORT 2526 26 526 A GC RS422 e IR MID BRN 4 422 2422 gt 9 0 CN301 GND 4 XMTR TP1 RCVR BLK 3 421 2421 8 o 2324 24 324 1 s DS3 Ga la RED 2 420 2420 7 es al age Pa 2325 25 325 GND 5 Le SE Ave ORN 1 419 2419 6 2326 26 326 7 2 y Mapa GN718 BOT INTLK SINTLK SINTLK 3337 sea o Io Sabse T EI AEN OLDER VERSION DRUM WHT 15 717 0717 w5 A PLATN TOP LEFT FRONT Ba SW701 rel DRV BLU 4 716 BOT PLATEN 2716 4 2802 5 O SW806 PLATEN BOT P GRN 3 715 2715 3k Sana CART DOOR INTLK C908A JUMPER PLUG MUST BE C908A JUMPER PLUG MUST BE SENSOR DK RED 2 714 2714 2 REMOVED EROM INTERNATIONAL REMOVED FROM INTERNATIONAL E ES LEFT DOOR INTLK BE TIED Go CHASSIE EROUND IN BE TIED TO CHASSIS GROUND IN PROCESSOR COMMUNICATION BOARD V TAESE MACHINES THESE MACHINES 2810 0 SW802 2811 TOP COVER INTLK POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD NOTE AN ASTERISK FOLLOWING A SIGNAL NAME INDICATES THAT THE SIGNAL IS LOW OV ACTIVE H188_3009EC 10 DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD DIB MODALITY USER DIGITAL
142. CN1303 CN1306 To SCB From PMA amp Laser Interlocks CN1304 To Vacuum Pump To LOS Figure 6 8 6 3 3 5 System Control Board SCB Refer to Figure 6 9 for a block diagram of the SCB The SCB is an embedded machine controller which has interfaces to all of the MCS boards except the modem and the control interface of the LOS It also communicates with the IPB via a serial RS485 port Micro Control Unit MCU The SCB uses a Motorola 68332 microprocessor It is a highly integrated device with a 68020 core and several additional features Among them are a CPU a time processor unit TPU a system integration module SIM and a queued serial module QSM The CPU executes an enhanced 68020 instruction set The TPU is a micro coded timer counter which executes independently of the CPU It executes micro coded programs from on board ROM to generate output frequencies for the system s stepper motors and is used to count non interrupt events such as the line sync signal from the LOS The SIM has chip selects under software control and provides interrupt control a watch dog timer a programmable timer and a clock synthesizer The QSM contains one synchronous and one asynchronous serial port The asynchronous serial port is used for communications with the IPB Memory The SCB contains an array of universal memory sites that are jumper selectable to hold a variety of memory types Jumpers are also used to select memory sizes between 256K a
143. CTRONICS FAN ASSEMBLY 8 78 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 25 External System Interfaces Cabling 1 17 11 12 13 FIBER OPTIC HOST 14 zo The Keypad Fiber Electronic Interface Box 18 E BH KFEIB is not shown RCV 7 DOOOOOOOOO 0 OO ECHO ECO OH 00000000000000000600000000000000000 8800 22H 26 Nai BB JEJE 0 0 Note 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bhe 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 79 Service Manual Item No 1A 1B 78 8077 4201 6 3A 3B 4A 4B 78 8075 2572 6 6A 6B 78 8063 3685 1 78 8063 3686 9 6E 6F 78 8075 2607 0 78 8075 2608 8 6J 6K 6L 78 8077 4097 8 8A 8B 78 8053 4648 9 9A 9B 78 8053 4135 7 78 8053 4139 9 6C 6D 6G 6H 8C 9C 9D 10A 10B 10C 10D 11 12 14 16A 16B 16C 16D 17 8 80 Part Number 78 8077 4135 6 78 8077 4397 2 78 8079 0747 8 78 8094 8860 0 78 8063 3751 1 78 8077 4272 7 78 8075 2605 4 78 8063 3684 4 78 8063 3687 7 78 8075 2606 2 78 8063 3688 5 78 8063 3689 3 78 8063 3956 6 78 8053 4646 3 78 8053 4647 1 78 8053 4697 6 78 8053 4134 0 78 8053 4695 0 78 8053 4059 9 78 8053 4034 2 78 8053 4033 4 78 8071 8331
144. Description Qty FILTER HOUSING ASSEMBLY Kodak and OEM except GE 1 FILTER HOUSING ASSEMBLY GE only 1 HOUSING FIMEN csi fs ante cae eee Ade wate yet deel ts a dee den de Hata alk 1 DOOR Filter Kodak and OEM except GEI 1 DOOR Filet GENY contada rd deed eee ede does AMEN bee NG 1 RETAINER Filter sconce ettttie dd EE tak a NG 1 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 6 CATCH Draw cerca awk sad ieee eee E bo dad ete ead dts 2 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X12 0 8 FAN ASSEMBLY EEE este sti ave ae ony ed Rte tae hdd Se 1 GUARD Finger 2 09 2109 sus retenue hana MAK KATANA Kh 1 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 35 0 L Sems External Odia cea eta aes aes ete mha PNG aa EE 4 850 SWITCH ASSEMBLY SINT nA a ese eta A 1 HARNESS ASSEMBLY 802 Filter 1 FASTENER Jack Socket Assembly 9 mama ba kaa pa E IR Ee tentes 1 MOUNT 750 X 750 Adhesive Backed 4 HE WRAP EE 4 NUT Mach Metric M4 X 0 7 Keps 1 TAPE nm Bun a KANA AKA EE AR GASKET Fiter HOUSING sabe a Bad gan tel hata NEA BA cae er BAG pale AR GASKET Filter Cartridge aako aa sed Anak NN AE NA PEP ann e NA Ha NG AR FILTER Air 16 X 20 X1 Metal FAZ 1 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil
145. DryView LASER IMAGING FILM possible store film in paper stored in vinyl jackets jacket The IMAGER worked for about Power module fan being stopped Repair loose grommet material 45 minutes and then died It due to edging grommet material would start up later and run for a contacting the fan blade period then die again 7 7 2 Image Acquisition Problem Description Problem Isolation Procedure Acquire light won t stop flashing The user is in color blind mode From the main keypad menu select KEYPAD MENU COLOR BLIND MODE OFF For all other acquire problems refer to one of the following quick sheets 39 59 64 66 67 68 7 122 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 7 3 Film Transport Problem Description Area Problem Isolation Procedure Cartridge will not insert fully or Refer to EC132 Insert Cartridge displayed even though the cartridge is installed Cartridge will not open CCW Refer to EC176 Cartridge will not close KA Refer to EC177 Film will not pickup or jams at Area 1 Refer to EC166 EC161 cartridge area entrance to processor 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 123 Service Manual 7 7 4 Print Queue e Image queues but fails to print e Prints wrong number of copies e Prints to wrong printer e etc Problem Description Problem Isolation Procedure Images acquire but fail to print 1 Wrong destination set by user 1 Set destination at the remote 8800 2 W
146. E EE 1 31 78 8094 5961 9 PIN Solenoid Feed 1 32 78 8094 5708 4 MOTOR AND PLATE ASSEMBLY 3 33 78 8094 5586 4 PULLEY Mod 16T 1 34 78 8095 9501 6 PULLEY Mod Transport Motor 1 35 26 1011 6793 5 PULLEY with Set Screw 00 2 cece teens 1 36 78 8094 5310 9 BRACKET Takeup 1 07 10 009 59890 de PLATE LEE 1 38 78 8094 5383 6 PULLEY Mod Wl E EE 1 39 78 8094 5287 9 HANDLE Latch 0 ccc nna 1 40 78 8094 5291 1 LATCH Transport EE 1 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 45 Service Manual Figure 8 12 Transport Module Assembly continued Item No Part Number Description Qty 41 78 8094 5289 5 LEVER Latch 0 0 nent eens 1 42A 78 8094 5282 0 GUIDE Film Top Entry 82001 1 42B 78 8092 5455 6 GUIDE Film Top Entry 8500 1 43 78 8094 5745 6 DEFLECTOR 0 a E a a nee teen ee tenn eens 1 44 78 8094 5303 4 BRUSH Static 0 eee tenet ete 1 45A 78 8094 5326 5 CORNER Nip Right Hand 8700 1 45B 78 8092 5454 9 CORNER Nip Right Hand 8500 1 46A 78 8094 5327 3 CORNER Nip Left Hand 8700 1 46B 78 8092 5453 1 CORNER Nip Left Hand
147. EVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS 1 THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE AND 2 THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECIEVED INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION CANADA 10161041594 THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES 003 CET APPAREIL NUM ERIQUE DE LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME A LA NORME NMB 003 DU CANADA THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH CDRH REGULATION 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J 3E5571 Label located on back of IMAGER 1202688 2001 March Rev L Warnings and Cautions for External Interface Box Accessories Warnings and Cautions for External Interface Box Accessories Read and understand all instructions before using Classifications UL Classified ele el UL us File Number E183646 Control Number 9R46 Medical Equipment UL 2601 1 CAN CSA No 601 1 Classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc With Respect to Electric Shock Fire Casualty and Medical Hazards only in Accordance with UL 2601 1 CAN CSA C22 2 No 601 1 and IEC 601 1 A caution E Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics oxygen or nitrous oxide This equipment does not have a gas sealed electronics enclosure and could ignite any flammable or explosive gases present in its environment This equipment is operated with hazardous voltage which can shock burn or cause death Remove wall plug before servicing equipment N
148. Film Detector Exit 1 18 78 8094 5600 3 SHAFT Film Detector Exit nono 1 19 26 1000 6421 6 SPRING External 188 OD X 022 Wire Dia X 1 375 4 20 78 8094 5584 9 RETAINER Roller 4 21 Not Available BRACKET Bush 1 22 78 8094 5303 4 BRUSH Static 0 eee tenet ene 1 23 Not Available BRACKET Left Exit 1 24 78 8001 2446 9 BEARING 1260 Bore X 1718 OD X 078 W 2 25 78 8656 4000 3 RING Retaining External Eng 2 26 78 8094 5604 5 SPRING FILm Detector Exit 1 27 78 8092 5530 6 ROLLER Drive Tray Blue 1 28 26 1000 2561 3 PIN Dowl 094 DIA X 500 3 29 78 8092 5536 3 ROLLER Drive Exit Blue 2 30 78 8092 5560 3 ROLLER Slotted NIP Blue 1 3 4 N t Available lt e COVER Exit eh te sce A A See he a ee Eba 1 32A 78 8094 5540 1 DENSITOMETER ASSEMBLY 1 33 26 1011 6674 7 WASHER Plain Nylon 125 ID X 250 OD X 020 2 34 78 8095 9320 1 BARRIER Vibration Motor See Note 1 1 35 78 8095 9321 9 WASHER Vibra
149. GE PICKUP MOTOR FAIL ALM 60 P224 X is not operational Summary The pickup motor has failed to operate during the pickup cycle run during powerup diagnostics Sequence of Events This error code can occur only during the powerup diagnostic that cycles the film pickup assembly Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable 7 76 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 45 EC225 Cartridge open sensor failed Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is L225 Cartridge Rack ALM 60 P225 not operational Sensor Fail Summary The cartridge open rollback rack sensor did not change states as expected after the cartridge was opened or closed Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 2 Film Sequencing for the Open Cartridge Lid flowchart Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable Problem MIB board blew chip U8C1 when opening cartridge Cause Harness to rollback motor is incorrectly mounted causing the harness to rub on the frame Solution Secure harness away from frame Replace MIB Theory Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing for flow charts of machine functions during film load and drive Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 77 Service Manual 7 6 46 EC226 Rollb
150. Ground 902 1 57 26 1008 5460 8 WASHER Metric Lock M6 0 External Tooth 3 65 26 1004 091 7 1 CAMP ui DAG rames NAN eae inated voices daa tae JE ie bs 2 67 78 8095 9496 9 INSULATOR PWB Fan Control 1 68 26 1003 7116 5 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 4 69 78 8095 9495 1 FILTER Air Power Module 1 70 78 8095 9492 8 COVER Filter Power Module 1 71 78 8092 5401 0 LABEL Access Hole Cover 1 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 69 Service Manual Figure 8 22 Electronics Enclosure Assembly Standalone Screen 1 of 2 8 70 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 22 Electronics Enclosure Assembly Standalone Screen 2 of 2 8 71 2001 May Rev M 1202688 Service Manual Item o Z 8 JO O1 P DN Part Number Not Available Not Available Not Available 78 8094 5267 1 78 8094 5268 9 Not Available 78 8094 5847 0 78 8092 4140 5 78 8092 4145 4 Figure 8 22 Electronics Enclosure Assembly Standalone Description Qty ELECTRONIC ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY Standalone ENCLOSURE MGI 4 285 Sta Vee vd LAAN ble E Me COR IRS CAE Yolk A 1 PANEL
151. INDOW VIDEO ANALOG TO TO VIDEO OUT A e CNOFE SE gt Ee IPB Y e TP2 ES A SYNC ACQUISITION VIDEOIN A MM DETECTOR Sync TIMING OFFSET i 750 I BLACK e i LEVEL H SYNC CONVERT I ais da i SYNC LED TO CN1107 ON IPB lt VERT DELAY VERT LINES HORIZ DELAY pki HORIZ PIXELS GAIN PORT INTERLACED LEDs SELECTOR a ODD EVEN gt PASSES FINE PIXEL DEL PARAMETER AND ACQUISITION CONTROLLER a ges FROM ag w oF IPB EXTERNAL T Ee EE PLL MODULE LED OPTION INTERNAL PLL CLK PLL CLOCK awar e as INTERNAL CLOCKS LINE CLOCK gt PIXEL CLOCK CLOCKO gy gt SEREK DELAY TI GATE EXTERNAL EXTERNAL CLOCK gt ee CLOCK1 5 CLOCK gt 1 GATE on1111 TRANSLATOR DAUGHTER BOARD COPPER Heen EE sees TXD TXD1 Jfe F4 U6 Te EPROMS be 5VCC e FILTER he TO HOST 4 la X TF6 RS422 U10 U11 ac LATCH TXD2 ft je KEYPAD RTS FS1 5 e FILTER e gt or 5 fe Fs POND wv PH 42v e 1 m o FIBER ya DS1 RESET RX E INT OPTICS 6 F7 SERIAL LOGIC E a LT CONVERTER _RXD PORT We TO CN1110 TXD NG ON IPB 8 Le F5 FS2 U15 Lo FETS re AN GES Da SERIAL ne PORT CET op R182 MA RS232 wi Le D53 JUMPER SH yy Un le y DI XTAL RS422 ee OPTO W4 COUPLERS Ko RS232 A wit CD1 JUMPER ADs2 u7 CD2 CN1112 RS232 CTS2 zn LATCH CTS1 gt PO 5 NO 4 Lex 5 VCC ER TO HOST 5 L IS 5 VCC RESET OR Ca LOGIC RX gt KEYPAD 6 OR FIBER 7 BXD OPTICS CONVERTER 8 kel XD FE FS4 o EE SW1 SW2 SWITCH CON
152. Inside EE 1 dl We nie EE 2 PANELS Coven ta a it tk eas etd RAA MR d eege de 1 ELECTRONICS FAN ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 24 1 GABLE RESTRAINT AN KNANG EE wee ey eee aa eee 1 IMAGE PROCESSOR BOARD IPB nawasa nama dat eke Yee een ween WE 1 MACHINE INTERFACE BOARD MIDI 1 9 78 8094 5116 0 POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD PDB 1 10 78 8092 4146 2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER BOARD SCB 1 11 78 8094 5140 0 CABLE ASSEMBLY IPB SCB 1 12 78 8094 5141 8 CABLE ASSEMBLY MIB SCB 1 13 78 8094 5142 6 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Optics Data 1 14 78 8094 5144 2 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Optics Control 1 15 78 8094 5146 7 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Optics Power 1 16 78 8094 5148 3 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Optics Atten 1 17 78 8094 5150 9 CABLE ASSEMBLY BP MF 1 18 78 8094 5151 7 CABLE ASSEMBLY RF Tag 1 19 78 8094 5152 5 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Densitometer 1 20 78 8094 5154 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY Internal Local Panel 1 21 78 8094 5156 6 CABLE ASSEMBLY 24 VAC U 2 2202 ennen naarn annn aeea 1 22 78 8094 5157 4 CABLE ASSEMBLY Solenoids
153. KEIB Refer to Figure 2 16 4 f an optional footswitch is to be used connect it to the UKEIB Refer to Figure 2 17 2 10 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation UKEIB FIBER OPTIC HOST KMI o REE O FTSW Nas S 0 0 ACH B CH _ MAGER KEYPAD L 8 8 owo of Jo I RCV Footswitch Figure 2 17 5 Connect the fiber optic cable to the UKEIB Refer to Figure 2 18 6 Connect the fiber optic cable to the TDB F at the rear of the IMAGER Refer to Figure 2 18 7 Connect the UKEIB power cord For installations outside the U S and Canada the UKEIB is supplied with a harmonized power cord with no wall plug For these locations attach the proper type plug obtain locally The UKEIB uses a universal power supply that requires no modification for input voltages in the range of 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz UKEIB FIBER OPTIC HOST o o FTSW o O ACH BCH MG KEYPAD RCV o o A Lead B Lead TDB F Fiber Optic Cable L WO 0 WWO0 B Lead Figure 2 18 2 3 5 Video Source to VEIB to FIB 1 Check set the jumpers in the VEIB Refer to Procedure 2 4 3 2 Use an analog cable to connect the video signal from the modality to the appropriate Video In connector on the VEIB Refer to Figure 2 19 3 If the modality provides a pixel clock signal use an analog cable to connect it to the appropriate Ext Clock In conne
154. Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message Input Log Output Log Cartridge has less than 20 K204 The media is low on None None sheets remaining P133 laser imager X 7 52 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 21 EC134 Supply cartridge empty Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Cartridge is empty P134 K218 Supply cartridge is None ALM 10 empty on laser imager 1 Summary The SCB has counted 125 sheets since the cartridge was first loaded Sequence of Events 1 When a new cartridge of film is loaded the film count in SCB NVRAM is set to 125 2 For each film picked up the SCB decreases the film count for that cartridge 3 When the count reaches 0 P134 Cartridge is Empty is displayed on the local panel The cartridge lid is closed and the supply door solenoid is energized to open the door gt Note The pickup arm is driven down to the cartridge a second time after each sheet is fed to check for film empty using the film out sensor for feedback A cartridge may also be declared empty if the film out sensor is deactuated when the empty check is made Phone Fix Operator Correctable Replace cartridge Cause Film jams in the cartridge cause improper sensing of the film out sensor Solution Clear the jam On Site Technician Correctable Check proper operation of the Film Out and Pickup Bottom Sensors The
155. M 952 Host alarm Media jam in transport K211 Media is jammed L165 Jam to Processor Open left door and remove in laser imager X jam in area 2b P165 Check local panel Summary The media is jammed after exposure The platen exit sensor came on but the mid transport or processor entry sensor did not come on Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing Phone Fix Operator Correctable Clear the jam On Site Technician Correctable General Troubleshooting Tip Refer to paragraph 7 2 for Sensor Troubleshooting Analysis Cause The mid transport sensor or processor entry sensor is loose in its mounting caused by the mounting legs of the sensor being rounded Solution Replace the sensor Cause The set screw on one of the drive motors is loose Solution Secure the loose screw Theory Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 61 Service Manual 7 6 30 EC166 Film pickup problems Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Imager has difficulty K211 Media is jammed L166 PICKUP TRY picking up media in laser imager X L166 DOUBLE PICKUP or Replace cartridge P166 Check local panel L166 NO_PICKUP Summary L166 PICKUP TRY One pickup attempt has failed If the next pickup attempt succeeds no further errors are logged and nothing is displayed on the local panel This error is transparent to the user If succeeding pickups f
156. MOM VF PORT MODALITY I USER SR ban RE LATCH ra VF T PORT PARITY CHECKER TO CN1107 TEST ON IPB IMAGE DEIB CONTROLLER L O FROM Cid IPB ENABLE pi SELECT TEST e SELECT PORT 1 SELECT PORT 0 Ss FIBER OPTICS CONVERTER SE SWITCHABLE FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS FIBER Py CONVERTER Su LG EFI RXD 3 BCH paved KR Be oe TXD a TO UKEIB 6 OR i KEIB Ha a wa FIBER VCC 5 GEN RCVR gt on 4 6 12 9 RXD l gt Gi TXD 10 TO TRANSLATOR DAUGHTER BOARD COPPER CN1111 OR CN1112 VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD VIB Kodak DryView 8700 8500 LASER IMAGER IMS Interface Boards Functional Block Diagrams Standard Sheet 3 2001 March Rev L N 1202688 P Q R 7 5O GAIN ADI VIDEO IN PORTO O VIDEO OUT O DOUBLE VIDEO Ne PH GAIN W
157. March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl Grasp bearing on left end and gear on right end then remove drum Pull stripper away from drum and secure with latches 8700 410C Figure 4 8 Caution The surface of the drum is easily damaged Do not lay the drum on its side Instead lay a roll of tape on a table then stand the drum on top of the tape The type of tape is irrelevant as long as the core of the roll has a diameter greater than 2 inches 51mm Roll of Tape ES 8700 1076 Figure 4 9 gt Note After a new drum has been installed the processor temperature adjustment must be performed procedure 3 1 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 7 Service Manual 4 2 2 Processor Rollers 1 Remove power and remove the processor drum 4 2 1 L gt Note There are three sets of rollers in the processor The top and middle sets are in the upper half of the housing and the bottom set is in the lower half of the housing The middle and bottom sets each have ten rollers The top set has only nine rollers When replacing rollers in the top set do not install a roller in the topmost location closest to the handle on the processor cover The springs on the roller retainers are position specific and must not be removed If a spring is damaged replace the retainer assembly L gt Note The arrows on the retainers should all point in the direction of Film Flow Remove 3 screws per clip
158. N CN1111 CN1112 UKEIB GENESIS CABLE KODAK FIBER OPTIC CONVERTER RS422 HOSTS NOTE CENTER 5V GND COMPACT KEY PAD RTS CTS RS232 HANDSHAKING 12V 12V NOT CURRENTLY USED SIEMENS EXTERNAL FIBER OPTIC CONVERTER TOUCH SCREEN KEYPAD THE INTERFACE BOARDS SHOWN ON THIS SHEET ARE USED IN STANDARD VERSIONS OF THE IMAGER THEY REPLACE THE BOARDS SHOWN ON THE IMS FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM SHEET 1 AS FOLLOWS EITHER THE DIGITAL INTERFACE BOARD DIB THE VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD VIB OR THE SCSI INTERFACE BOARD SIB CAN BE USED IN PLACE OF THE FIBER INTERFACE BOARD FIB THE TRANSLATOR DAUGHTER BOARD COPPER TDB C REPLACES THE TDB FIBER Q R 10 H187_3008EC A B C Processor Temperature Adjustment Specification Special Tools Measurement Adjustment 122 2 to 122 8 degrees C 252 to 253 degrees F for all three zones Temperature Meter with Probe for measurement MPC using MPC for Windows software for adjustment Left Side View gt Front Probe Using the MPC 1 Select Processor Subsystem 2 Select Calib button to display processor calibration window 3 Adjust temperatures as necessary by clicking on appropriate arrows or by entering positive or negative values in numeric fields below arrows Each click produces about a 0 06 degree C change Processor Drum Stripper Adjustment Specification Special Tools Measurement Adjustment 0 00
159. ND E ao a 47V SW 47V E S S S 3 3 gt oe 16 31 7 N SW 17V 4 A d gt gt lo a SISAS N DGND Ee 35 3 DGND DGND 3 9 S 2 Q QI 2 2 31 5 2 Z a alalala 8 EOLTEST gt SS 9 L DGND DGND 3 oj a A Eloi d OF ol a TO CN1208 ON SCB K Le Ge 51315 gt gt gt a YTEMP 36 34 10 POND 5V FUSED CN1401 2 4 12 13 19 21 23 25 26 27 29 30 32 33 34 SHEET 2 a lt A O 0 PARES SEN 18 35 11 a NEW MODEM an TO CN1302 ON MIB SEL ah SS re EN CN708 1 23456789 BOARD U S SHEET 2 INTLK TY NN DN a a A F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 Fo F10 F11 F12 F14 F13 38 14 INTEK RIN 39 15 40 16 o o AN pia CN703 13 25 12 24 11 23 10 22 9 21 8 20 7 19 6 18 5 17 4 16 3 15 2 14 1 CN704 1 6 27 38495 Y ol lefjw Y pa APP ERREE AA pam ba a mimi o Ol TORRE BULKHEAD 2125 ai a dd noo bal ta Ko o Lo lo 4 UY CNt012 13 25 12 24 11 23 10 22 9 21 8 20 7 19 6 18 5 174163152141 CNtoit 1 62738495 LOS POWER LOS ATTENUATION TO CN1304 THRU CN1012 ON SHEET 2 TO CN1307 THRU CN1011 ON SHEET 2 MODEM CHIP de JA RJ 11 P2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PHONE LINE PC CONNECTION F G Kodak Dry View 8700 8500 LASER IMAGER IMS Functional Block Diagram Standard Plus Sheet 1 2001 March Rev L S 10 H188_3005EC Kodak DryView 8700 8500 LASER IMAGER IMS Functional Block Diagram Multi Dual Sheet 1 2001 March Rev L 1202688 A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S
160. NG Ball 3125 ID X 5000 OD X 1562 W 2 78 8094 5129 3 990 SWITCH ASSEMBLY 00 000 eee eee 4 9 78 8094 5079 0 BRACKET A Sensor Pickup NN NENNEN NEE evans Ei NN SEN EEN EN 2 10 78 8094 5080 8 PLATE Sensor Rotation Pickup 1 11 78 8094 54 77 6 NUT Motor Pickup 04 0 a ive idee ENEE Aenea wed eee DBA deeds 1 12 26 1011 6510 3 GROMMET 760 OD X 285 ID with 070 Grooves 2 13 48 80945583 1 COVER Relay Pickup 35 pia mercat a rd A Id a 1 14 Not Available le 2 15 26 1011 6729 9 TUBING 125 ID X 250 OD AR 16 78 8094 5168 1 HARNESS ASSEMBLY Pickup 500 1 17 78 8094 5483 4 HARNESS ASSEMBLY Pickup Vacuum 501 1 18 Not AVailabl 2 TE WRAP 8 24 Eege SEET aah a van aed ae Kaban CN 8 19 Not Available MOUNT Cable Tie 6 20 26 1003 7115 7 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 11 21 26 1002 3982 6 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 25 0 Sems External Tooth 2 22 DY 1102 0663 7 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 2 23 26 1003 7120 7 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 16 24 26 1003 7121 5
161. NG 2 3 74 0500 5366 4 ADJUSTER Left Hand 1 4 78 8095 9524 8 MOUNT Left Hand 1 5 78 8003 8593 8 RING Retaining External E Ring 00 cece cece eee 2 Gan 78 8092 4078 7 BLADE Stripper ici bite ala Reed betas eek whe is d 1 7 26 1011 7845 2 SCREW Shoulder Hex Socket M3 4 8 6 B092 4089 4 PIN AQJUSTET 73 3 kaaa aa hae PA ANER ae done Va dE BARE BR KEE d A 2 9 78 8095 9525 5 MOUNT Right Hand 1 10 74 0500 5364 9 ADJUSTER Right Hand Xa kaa Yeahs daw NEEN EEN ae na ee ee 1 11 78 8095 9431 6 BRACKET Mount Right Hand 1 12 26 1011 6336 3 SCREW Shoulder Hex Socket M4 x 16 2 13 74 0401 8320 9 TORSION SPRING KIT Includes left hand green and right hand yellow SHINO Sc ta o otek tt Mile Aes A E E E ere hae T 1 14 78 8095 9521 4 SCREW Adjuster 0 ccc cece cece eee tence ene een see 2 15 78 8010 7213 9 SCREW Cap Hex Socket M3 x 6 2 17 78 8095 9393 8 BRACKET Mount Left Hand 1 18 70 0701 4523 3 WASH ER RS AS A ARS 2 19 26 1012 1130 3 LUBRICANT Krytox Not shown AR 20 26 1004 1786 9 ADHESIVE Loctite 222 Not shown AR 8 64 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 20 Exit Assembly Included with item 37 2001 May Rev M 120268
162. Not Shown AR 31 78 8063 3967 3 CABLE KEIB 9 pin Copper 100 m 330 ft Not shown AR Note 1 The Keypad Fiber Electronic Interface Box KFEIB is stocked as a service part per Revision L of this manual Note 2 Plenum Rated 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 81 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 8 82 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 9 Diagrams Section 9 Diagrams 9 1 Diagrams 2001 May Rev M 1202688 9 1 Service Manual 9 2 BLANK PAGE 1202688 2001 May Rev M 10 FIBER INTERFACE BOARD FIB 100MB FORWARD CHANNELS IMAGE DATA STATUS 10MHz CRYSTAL y N1114 been FIBER RCVR RCVR CIRCUIT 2 1 TAXI MUX RCVR CN1113 e USER o FIBER _RCVR RCVR CIRCUIT IMAGE XILINX SOURCE EPROM 5MB BACK CHANNELS COMMANDS PARAMETERS CN1116 FIBER USER 1 ara be DRIVER fe CN1115 FIBER USERO Yuta be DRIVER fe TRANSLATOR DAUGHTER BOARD FIBER 5VCC KW Ds2 FIBER RXD2 A1 CHANNEL RCVR SS A TXD2 FIBER B1 CHANNEL yumg Po Ds RXD1 lt TXD1 TO HOST K OR KEYPAD sudo FIBER AO CHANNEL Roya ma Ai FIBER RESET BO CHANNEL aam bn 5 vco NW ae DS5 NOTE G MEMORY DAUGHTER BOARD MDB
163. OARD IPB fi te e iif PTICS MODULE 1 A EE rap IMAGE DATA GA CN1107 CN1105 06 CN701 DINO 11 IMAGE DATA SCALE IMAGE CONTRAST er Al INTER 1 1 BO TRE STROBE gt gt Ge GE gt POLATION PA TABLE Y 2 DATAO 20 POWER DIODE COLLIMATOR AZ d RAM RAM 3 2 D LASER DIODE p gt LPARERR PARITY EARER q SEN DATA1 PARENB TS I i 4 DATA2 21 DIODE SERVO AS BARSEL 2 DATA2 3 e 12 BIT DAC it DIMSK8 11 COMMAND 2 DATA3 Se PHOTO DETECTOR ka DATA3 VIDEO DATA e OPTICS B10 DATA4 ea gt Fees K PARDO 9 PARAM BUS S PATAG E B16 IMAGE 10 24 A12 PARSTB PAR STROBE i e DATA5 A 817 MUXSEL He DATAS pa Aig DRUDISB al e DATA6 gt DAC CONTROL 818 EOTO END OF TRANSFER i DATA6 pA a AHE A19 E EN ae al peor er al 15 e 8 INTERLOCK B19 Bear gt kb IN CONTROL amp La PARAMETER FORMAT UN IPB 16 DATAS 27 OPTO gt LD OFF gt A21 RTX 7 MEMORY RAM CONTROL INTERFACE 17 DATAS 9 COUPLERS a DE SMHzZ TIMING HA DATA9 a EXP CORRECTION 304 RESET a6 DATAQ 39 E OPTICAL SENSE a27 2V RET 91 DATA10 11 Bo7 SV RET 22 DATA10 30 A28 5 2V NA 23 DATA11 12 5 2V lt D DATA11 EH 24 31 A29 a B29 17V RET pa PARITY ES 17V dem Dc OUT PARITY A304 26 32 B30 Y 57 STROBE nA 5V RET K NOVRAM STROBE A31 eee Le 28 33 B31 wa 29 SOL NG po A l 30 SOL 34 ON NOT USED he X AXIS DRIVE 40 37 RESONANT SCANNER N ki gt EPROM SCANNER DRIVER CN1007 CN702 CN705 SYNC CN1
164. OM IM 952 Host alarm Top cover is open P178 K215 A cover is open on None ALM 16 laser imager X Summary The top cover of the 8700 8500 is open thus opening interlock switch SW802 Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis Phone Fix Operator Correctable Close the top cover On Site Technician Correctable Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis 7 66 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 35 EC179 Left side door open Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Close left door P179 K215 A cover is open on None ALM 16 laser imager X On Site Technician Correctable Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 67 Service Manual 7 6 36 EC202 203 Service override switch out or fail Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm P202 Override switch is None None open K202 Laser imager Xis L203 OVERRIDE P203 Printer malfunction not operational INTERLOCK_FAIL Summary P202 The service override switch is in the pulled out electrically closed position P203 The service override switch is pulsed high and low alternately every 1 second If the interlock is pulsed high and a low is detected by the SCB P203 is declared The SCB shuts down all motors solenoids and the local panel for safety reasons The IMAGER
165. OOOOOOO OO OO OO 0 OO 0 OO OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 0000 FIBER OPTICS DIGITAL IN ACH B CH PORT 0 PORT 1 C C ei 7 Figure 2 25 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 3 Connect the fiber optic image cable to the DEIB Refer to Figure 2 26 4 Connect the fiber optic cable to the FIB at the rear of the IMAGER Refer to Figure 2 26 DEIB DOOOOOOO OO OO OO OO OO 0 Y OO OO OO OO OO OO OO 0000 DOOOOOOO OO OO OO OO OO 0 OO OO OO OO OO DOON FIBER OPTICS DIGITAL IN A Lead Fiber Optic Cable Figure 2 26 5 Connect the DEIB power cord For installations outside the U S and Canada the DEIB is supplied with a harmonized power cord with no wall plug For these locations attach the proper type plug obtain locally The DEIB uses a universal power supply that requires no modification for input voltages in the range of 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 2 3 9 Digital Source to DIB 1 Use a digital cable to connect the modality to the appropriate port on the DIB at the rear of the IMAGER Refer to Figure 2 27 DIB o L 1HOd o Digital Image Modality 0 1HOd Figure 2 27 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 15 Service Manual 2 3 10 Kodak DryView 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER or Kodak Digital Science 969 HQ LASER IMAGER to 8700 8500 IMAGER At the 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER or 969 HQ IMAGER route the fiber optic cable through the slot
166. Operations menu and select Subsystem SCB Select the Cmd button to display the Command window Type show adc 9 in the Command field then press Enter or click OK Calculate the average of the comma separated numbers displayed in the Response field L gt Note The response actually includes 30 numbers however the average of the first 8 numbers is sufficient for this purpose The numbers should be in the range of 1000 to 3000 OY Ol A NN 8 Type show adc 10 in the Command field then press Enter or click OK 9 Calculate the average of the comma separated numbers displayed in the Response field 10 If the difference between the average values calculated in steps 8 and 9 is greater than 200 perform the following adjustment procedure If the difference is less than 200 perform the pickup arm height calibration 3 10 3 16 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 3 Adjustments Adjustment A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death L gt Note When performing the following procedure move the actuator in small increments The adjustment is very sensitive Remove the supply cartridge Open the left side door Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position PEO US st Use a long Phillips head screwdriver to loosen the screw that secures the actuator for the sen
167. PTE TEST EPROMS to send an image from the DEIB DIB to the IMAGER e Use your scope or logic probe to check signals from DEIB DIB to host gt Note On an IMAGER stand alone with a touch screen keypad memory is not cleared unless Best Fit is selected 7 38 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 9 EC68 Timeout waiting for pixels from EIB or IB Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host Alarm None K68 Image acquire failed L68 TIMEOUT_EIB ALM 68 Try acquiring again Summary The Image Processing Board IPB has timed out waiting for image data from the DEIB DIB This could happen either because the host system is not sending data is sending invalid data the DEIB DIB is not transferring the data or the DEIB DIB configuration is incorrect Sequence of Events 1 The IPB downloads parameters to the DEIB DIB during the power up sequence e The DIEB DIB Enable LED will light indicating that it has a valid parameter set e The Port 0 or 1 will also light e The IPB will not download the parameters for that port again as long as acquires are successful Error State If the IPB does not receive acknowledgement from the DEIB DIB that it successfully received the parameter set EC39 will be logged Refer to QS for EC39 Error State If an acquire fails EC64 68 will be logged and the IPB will reload the parameters to the DEIB DIB on the next acquire after the first failed acquire
168. Return to CD ROM Collection Menu Kodak DryView 8700 8500 LASER IMAGERS SERVICE MANUAL Rev M et 78 6970 6528 8 Revision History The original issue and revisions of the Service Manual for the Kodak DryView 8700 8500 LASER IMAGER are identified as follows Issue Date Rev A 1 96 Rev B 4 96 Rev C 9 96 Rev D 12 96 Rev E 3 96 Rev F 5 97 Rev G 8 97 Rev H 7 98 Rev J 4 99 Rev K 3 00 Rev L 3 01 Rev M 5 01 Text Pages Changed in Rev Current Revision M Title a Title and a pages 1 4 6 7 7 1 this section was previously Section 8 8 1 30 31 44 61 thru 65 this section was previously Section 9 9 1 this section was previously Section 7 the revision level of the Functional Diagrams did not change M DEEN RS E L Gg M b L Warnings and Cautions Warnings and Cautions for Kodak DryView 8700 8500 LASER IMAGER Safety Instructions Read and understand all instructions before using This equipment is operated with hazardous voltage which can shock burn or cause death Remove wall plug before servicing equipment Never pull on cord to remove from outlet Grasp plug and pull to disconnect Do not operate equipment with a damaged power cord Do not use an extension cord to power this equipment Position the power cord so it will not be tripped over or pulled Connect this equipment to a grounded outlet Use
169. Section 2 Installation 2 4 5 EVEIB Pixel Clock Source Jumpers W5 and W6 specify the pixel clock source The clock may be external provided by the source modality or internal generated by a Phase Lock Loop module installed in the EVEIB The jumpers are factory set and should not need to be changed unless a PLL module is added or removed Refer to Figure 2 33 Termination Jumpers W1 through W4 determine whether or not the Video In and Sync ports are terminated at 75 ohms For each port if the jumper is installed termination is provided This is the default setting The jumper should only be removed if a T connector is being used on the port Refer to Figure 2 33 Sync Detect Potentiometer Jumper W8 determines whether or not the manual sync detect potentiometer R6 is enabled Refer to Figure 2 33 By default R6 is disabled The following paragraphs describe the situation in which R6 might need to be enabled The width of the horizontal sync pulse should be approximately 7 5 of the horizontal line time It it is significantly different lt 5 or gt 10 the EVEIB may not be able to detect horizontal or vertical sync Two modalities known to have this problem are the ADAC 4100 and the Toshiba X Vision Before enabling R6 and performing a manual sync detect adjustment be sure to try each of the 16 combinations of settings for Vertical Sync Detect and Black Level Window available in the Advanced Video Parameters screen in MPC
170. See Figure 8 23 1 2 78 8094 5874 4 FRAME ASSEMBLY sci cit a nd d oad Rete ea tac de KG Re wate ee 1 3 78 8094 5817 3 EXPOSURE MODULE ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 13 1 4 78 8094 5789 4 PICKUP MODULE ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 10 1 5 78 8095 9400 1 PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 16 1 6 7E2665 ROLLBACK ASSEMBLY RF Tag See Figure 8 7 1 7 78 8094 5700 1 TRANSPORT MODULE ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 12 1 8 78 8094 5738 1 POWER MODULE ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 21 1 9 78 8094 5822 3 PROCESSOR ENTRANCE ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 15 1 10 78 8094 5165 7 HARNESS ASSEMBLY 818 POWER SWITCH 1 11 78 8094 5138 4 GATE DOOR SOLENOID ASSEMBLY 1 12 78 8025 4725 3 DECAL Field Change Record 1 13 78 6094 5290 3 PLATE Late geet NANANG GG WAS SA aA Ao anna ts WON 1 14 26 1009 8112 0 NUT Mach Hex Metric M6 X 1 0 2 18 78 8095 9493 6 PLATE Bearing EEN NNN rr eee edi ra 1 19278 60094 53547 INS STOD adie tite a Cee d dae das wi date ANAN CRE RN 1 20 70 8094 536 1 2 PIN TOPs ita de as a is Wace oe EE 1 21 78 80945962 0 SPACER LINK EE 1 23 78 8094 5365 3 BRACKET Bearing
171. Site Technician Correctable 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 107 Service Manual 7 6 74 EC623 Bad transfer function Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction None L623 ALM 57 P623 BAD_TRANSFER_FUNCTION Summary The TFT s on the SCB have invalid data Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the IMAGER On Site Technician Correctable 7 108 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 75 EC624 Bad densitometer data Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM X IM 952 Host alarm AIQC malfunction P624 AIQC off L624 Bad Densitometer Data Summary Bad Densitometer Dmin of the film is greater than 3 Data Note this could be caused by film that is past the expiration date or has been stored at higher than spec temperatures It could also be caused by a developer temperature that is too high Each step of the calibration sheet is not as dark or darker than the previous step i e density is NOT increasing monotonically Note this could be due to a fogged calibration sheet Phone Fix Operator Correctable Try another cartridge If this fixes the problem the bad cartridge may be taken to a darkroom and the top 10 sheets removed if fogging is suspected as being the problem On Site Technician Correctable 1 Problem Fogged film Solution Remove fogged film 2 Problem Dmin gt 3 Cause Film has been stored i
172. They communicate over the serial interface between the IPB and SCB 6 26 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 7 Troubleshooting Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 1 General This section contains component troubleshooting procedures process flowcharts an error code index and troubleshooting QuickSheets for the error codes 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis 7 2 1 Sensor Locations Refer to Figure 7 1 for locations of all sensors in the film path Densitometer Sensor SW301 Exit Tray Processor Sensor SW304 Entry Sensor Film Out SW302 l u Sensor SW502 Double Feed behind SW501 Sensor SW405 Picker Down Sensor SW501 Tongue Depressor a Picker Mid Sensor SW406 Sensor SW504 Cartridge Door era Interlock SW806 Sensor SW601 Picker Up Sensor SW503 Mid Transport Sensor Cartridge SW404 Open Sensor SW603 Cartridge Present Sensor SW604 Platen Exit Sensor SW403 Platen Bottom Sensor SW701 Platen Entry Sensor SW402 8700 328A SW405 not used in later production machines Figure 7 1 Sensor Locations 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 1 Service Manual 7 2 2 Sensor Troubleshooting Sensor Substitution For troubleshooting purposes the filter present sensor can be temporarily substituted for any other flag type sensor Caution Any time a flag type sensor is removed the snap on legs of the
173. When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the power module 4 9 1 gt Note When reassembling check the labels on the wires to ensure that they are connected to the correct terminals The terminal numbers are marked on the circuit breaker 8700 156C Figure 4 86 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 75 Service Manual 4 9 4 Processor Circuit Breaker CB902 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the power module 4 9 1 L gt Note When reassembling ensure that the wires are connected to the correct terminals If in doubt refer to the schematic located on the underside of the power supply cover When the circuit breaker is mounted right side up terminal 1 is the upper terminal Disconnect 2 8700 158C Figure 4 87 4 76 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 9 5 Power Supply Cooling Fans and Vacuum Pump Circuit Breaker CB903 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous volt
174. X O m a AAA Figure 6 5 6 3 1 8 Video Interface Board VIB The VIB converts video image data to a digital format and transfers it to the IPB over the image source interface The video image must be a composite video signal meeting the RS170 343 or equivalent standard and is usually the output of a D A converter The VIB also provides an input for the clock that samples the D A converter The video is digitized to 9 bits pixel The VIB supports external clock sampling up to 110 MHz by allowing a maximum of 32 passes for one acquisition The same Phase Locked Loop PLL module as used in the VEIB can be plugged into the VIB to provide the clock for synchronous digitization when an external clock is not available The VIB can accept video signals with interlaced or progressive scan modes The VIB has two video interfaces for image acquisition only one of which may acquire at any one time Each interface consists of a video input video output and a pixel clock input The VIB interfaces to the IPB through the image source interface connector CN1107 It provides a 9 bit image output to the IPB along with a strobe the VIB receives its parameters over a 10 bit parameter bus and returns command status over a 2 bit command bus Both functions provide a strobe signal The VIB receives its power clock and power up reset from the IPB through CN1107 6 3 2 Laser Optics System LOS 6 3 2 1 General Description The LOS consists of a mod
175. a a me ga casted 2 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 21 Power Module Assembly continued Item No Part Number Description Qty 40 78 8094 5500 5 POWER SUPPLY 5 2VDC PS2 For VIB machines only 1 41 Nor Available LABEL Wiring Diagram du KEEN ENN ar ee ANE tenn odes Hewes Rees 1 42A 26 1011 6229 0 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10 A 277 VAC CB901 with M3 X 0 5 mounting threads 1 42B 26 1011 8003 7 CIRCUIT BREAKER 10 A 277 VAC CB901 with 6 32 mounting threads ALT 43 Not Available BRACKET Air Power Module 1 44 26 1007 3192 1 TERMINAL BLOCK TS901 1 45 26 1008 9213 7 WASHER Metric Plain M 2 46 Not Available LABEL Voltage Taps 1 48 Not Available COVER Power Module 1 49 78 8094 5515 3 PWA Fan Control Board 1 50 26 1006 9839 3 BUSHING Strain Relief Nylon 1 51 26 1011 5429 7 WASHER Insulator 006 THK 1 53 78 8095 9432 4 COVER Power Supply Mounting 1 54 26 1001 8018 6 WASHER Metric Lock 3 2 ID X 6 0 OD X 0 2 Thk External Tooth 4 BB Not Available ADHESIVE condo ogi dau hameau Meudon Miao ind tu AR 56 78 8094 5512 0 CABLE ASSEMBLY Power
176. a relay on the MIB which is controlled directly by interlock switches on the platen and left side doors Data Strobe l Image Data Line Sync l SE Optical Sense 5 Status Bits I Exp Correction Interlock X Cntl O I Diode Intensity Cnt LDOFF Y 0 2 I Differential Revrs SCB Cro Ping Pong FIFOs Sen F Cntl 0 2 I Y Axis Cntl Video Data LD Cntl 0 2 X Connector Exp Correction LD Slow DAG el mero Com Left Door gow PAG Status Detection ower amp Platen Volt Reg s Interlocks 9 Y DAC Bits Laser Power Home Status I Mir Cnil I Attenuator Stepper Motor Polarizer Optical Switch Figure 6 6 X Driver Resonant Scanner Scanner Driver IPD Diode Driver Laser Diode Diode Servo 12 Bit DAC Photo Detector Optics Y Driver Galvo Scanner Servo Controller 16 Bit DAC Temp Controller Volt Reg s 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 3 3 Machine Control System MCS 6 3 3 1 General Description The MCS electronics control the electromechanical components which affect the movement and processing of film The electronics also control the LOS communicate with the IPB and read RF tag data Four of the 14 boards are located in the Electronics Enclosure Assy EEA The rest of the boards are located on the various modules of the system 6 3 3 2 MCS Components The MCS consists of the following boards plus the motors solenoids and sensors distributed throughout the system Ref
177. able L WO 0 WNOO Figure 2 15 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 9 Service Manual 2 3 4 Host Control to UKEIB to TDB F Caution The switches in the UKEIB must be set before any cables are connected to it Use only approved cables and ensure that the cables are connected to the proper connectors on the UKEIB If the switches are not set correctly when cables are connected or unapproved cables are used or cables are connected incorrectly components within the UKEIB may be damaged gt Note Refer to subsection 5 4 for pinouts of the various host adapter cables gt Note A translator keypad is required for hosts programmed with OEM commands other than Siemens The translator keypad translates the OEM commands to Kodak commands that can be interpreted by the IMAGER Different translator keypads are required for different OEMs A Siemens SHPT is not required for the IMAGER The TDB translates the Siemens commands For setup instructions refer to the MPC for Windows Comm parameters 1 Set the switches in the UKEIB Universal Keypad External Interface Box as required Refer to Procedure 2 4 1 2 Connect the host adapter cable to the UKEIB Refer to Figure 2 16 Host Adapter Cable UKEIB TI i HOST ray 0 0 E da pa RCV Keypad Cable Translator Keypad Figure 2 16 3 If a translator keypad is required connect the keypad cable to the keypad and the U
178. ables 2 out of imager Figure 4 60 4 52 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembly 8700 20A To separate platen and optics module remove 3 brackets M3 Allen Figure 4 61 4 6 2 Platen Access Plate Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the front panel 4 1 1 a Remove 4 8700 161C Figure 4 62 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 53 Service Manual 4 6 3 Platen Bottom Sensor SW701 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove the platen module 4 6 1 Remove the platen access plate 4 6 2 Locate SW701 on the underside of the platen E 7 Remove 2 6 8700 1620 Disconnect Figure 4 63 4 54 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 6 4 Beam Power Board BPB 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These volt
179. ack home sensor failed Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X L226 CARTRIDGE_BAR_HOME ALM 60 P226 is not operational SENSOR_FAIL Summary The cartridge rollback bar home sensor is not functioning Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing for the Load Cartridge Sequence flowchart Phone Fix Operator Correctable Close the cartridge open the left side door and look for any jams near the rollback bar Try rotating the rollback bar to the home position On Site Technician Correctable Problem MIB board blew chip U8C1 when opening cartridge Cause Harness to rollback motor is incorrectly mounted causing the harness to rub on the frame Solution Secure harness away from frame Replace MIB General Troubleshooting Tip Monitor the sensor with MPC Refer to Section 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis Theory Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing 7 78 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 47 EC227 Rollback motor failed Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log OM IM 952 Host Message Message alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L227 CARTRIDGE_ P2927 X is not operational ROLLBACK_MOTOR_ FAIL L226 CARTRIDGE BAR HOME SENSOR FAIL L225 CARTRIDGE RACK SENSOR FAIL Summary The rollback motor has failed to operate during the cartridge load process L gt Note Failure of the rollb
180. ack home sensor or rollback rack sensor will cause the same result Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing for the Load Cartridge Sequence flowchart Phone Fix Operator Correctable Close the cartridge open the left side door and look for jams etc near the rollback bar Try rotating the rollback bar to the home position arrow up on the user knob On Site Technician Correctable Problem MIB board blew chip U8C1 when opening cartridge Cause Harness to rollback motor is incorrectly mounted causing the harness to rub on the frame Solution Secure harness away from frame Replace MIB General Troubleshooting Tip Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis and Section 7 3 Motor Solenoid Trouble Analysis Theory Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing for flow charts of machine functions during film load and drive 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 79 Service Manual 7 6 48 EC228 Tongue depressor sensor failed Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Error Log OMX IM 952 Host Message alarm Printer malfunction Make K210 Printer error L176 sure transport in area 2 is Check local panel SUPPLY COVER OPEN ERROR latched P228 and Cartridge on laser imager X could not be opened Replace of cartridge L177 P176 or Cartridge could not SUPPLY_COVER_ CLOSE_ERROR be closed Opening door will expose XXX sheets P177 Summary The tongue depressor sensor did not change states properly during c
181. ages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the power module 4 9 1 gt Note When reassembling ensure that the wires are connected to the correct terminals If in doubt refer to the schematic located on the underside of the power supply cover When the circuit breaker is mounted right side up terminal 1 is the upper terminal Disconnect 2 8700 159C Remove Figure 4 88 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 77 Service Manual 4 9 6 24 VAC Circuit Breaker CB904 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the power module 4 9 1 L gt Note When reassembling ensure that the wires are connected to the correct terminals If in doubt refer to the schematic located on the underside of the power supply cover When the circuit breaker is mounted right side up terminal 1 is the upper terminal Disconnect 2 8700 165C Remove Figure 4 89 4 78 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 9 7 Line Filter LF901 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is p
182. ages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove the platen module 4 6 1 Remove the platen access plate 4 6 2 Locate the BPB on the underside of the platen ED BIO Remove 2 8700 162 Figure 4 64 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 55 Service Manual 4 6 5 Platen Kicker Solenoid Y706 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the platen module 4 6 1 4 Remove the platen access plate 4 6 2 Pa Remove eve a 8 A a SH Disconnect 8700 11C Figure 4 65 4 56 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 6 6 Platen Door Interlock Sensor SW703 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove the front panel 4 1 1 Remove the platen access plate 4 6 2 Ope
183. ail no more errors will be logged until the failed pickup retries match the number set in MPC SCB Config Pickup Retries L166 NO PICKUP IMAGER has failed to pick up the film after the number of attempts set in MPC SCB Config Max Pickup retries The local panel will display The imager has difficulty picking up media Replace cartridge P166 L166 DOUBLE_PICKUP One double feed has been detected by the multifeed board Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing Phone Fix Operator Correctable Problem Double pickup and no pickup Cause Films stick together and double feed or as top sheet is being lifted and fed the sheet underneath it is pulled forward and mispositioned This happens most at the beginning of the cartridge When the next attempt is made to feed a sheet it will not pickup the film is too far forward to feed correctly The situation usually corrects itself on subsequent pickup retries Solution e Remove the cartridge and try fanning the film e Try a new cartridge On Site Technician Correctable Solution Refer to paragraph 7 2 for Sensor Troubleshooting Analysis 1 Problem Some of the early machines had a weaker solenoid that was intermittent in operation Solution Replace with newer solenoid The weaker solenoid had the part 9532 197388 01 2 Problem False Double Pickup Cause Multifeed board is misadjusted Solution Adjust according to the service manual procedure Theory
184. al J Installing and Conditioning the Drum Install the drum in the processor Reassemble and close the processor Apply power to the system and wait for approximately 5 minutes for drum warmup Open the processor assembly Caution A Hot Surface A The processor drum is hot Take care when working in this area Be Oy eS 5 Use a lint free cloth TEXWIPE to wipe silicone oil over the surface of the drum 6 Repeat the process to thoroughly rub in the oil until the full bottle is used or the drum repels the silicone 7 Wipe off excess silicone oil from the drum 8 Use the oil soaked cloth to lightly coat the processor rollers with silicone oil Rotate the rollers to cover all surfaces 9 Close up the processor 10 Apply power to the system and run transport film through the system until there is no excess conditioner visible on the film 11 With the processor at normal operating temperature check the stripper gap and adjust as necessary procedure 3 2 12 Issue a calibration print and confirm that image quality is acceptable 5 16 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 5 Additional Information 5 5 7 Cleaning the Platen Cleaning Interval Every PM Supplies Required 3M Auto Pak Tack Cloth Procedure 1 Remove the film cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 F
185. al Frame 8 12 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 7 of 12 Partial Frame Ground 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 13 Service Manual Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 8 of 12 1202688 2001 May Rev M 8 14 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 9 of 12 53 Ground Strap 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 15 Service Manual Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 10 of 12 1202688 2001 May Rev M 8 16 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 11 of 12 D E E a sA e CN602 ee l SS 70 Partial e Frame ai 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 17 Service Manual Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 12 of 12 8 18 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty OA Not Available MACHINE ASSEMBLY Standalone 1 OB Not Available MACHINE ASSEMBLY Dua 1 1A Not Available ELECTRONIC ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY Standalone See Figure 8 22 1 1B Not Available ELECTRONIC ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY Dual
186. an Correctable Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis 7 72 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 41 EC221 Pickup top sensor failed Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message CI Input Log W Output Log Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L221 CARTRIDGE TOP SENSOR FAILED ALM 60 P221 X is not operational Summary The pickup top sensor SW503 has failed to operate during the pickup cycle run during powerup diagnostics Sequence of Events This error code can occur only during the powerup diagnostic that cycles the film pickup assembly Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable Use the sensor test screen of MPC to check out the pickup top sensor and the other sensors related to film pickup It is possible that vibration of the pickup assembly during cycling can cause intermittent operation of the sensors 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 73 Service Manual 7 6 42 EC222 Pickup middle sensor failed Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message Input Log W Output Log Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L222 CARTRIDGE MIDDLE SENSOR FAIL ALM 60 p222 X is not operational Summary The pickup middle sensor SW504 has failed to operate during the pickup cycle run during powerup diagnostics Sequence of Events This error code can occur only during the powerup diagnostic that cyc
187. artridge lid opening As a result the left door solenoid has been energized to open the door Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing for the Open Cartridge Lid flowchart Phone Fix Operator Correctable On Site Technician Correctable 1 Cause Tongue depressor arm is bent Solution Reform arm 2 Cause Transport interlock SW407 is faulty Solution Repair replace switch General Troubleshooting Tip e Test proper operation of tongue depressor sensor with MPC Diag SCB Sensors e Test solenoids with MPC Diag Sol or use jumper to access solenoids Refer to paragraph 7 3 Motor Solenoid Trouble Analysis 7 80 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 49 EC229 Supply door could not be opened Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message CI Input Log W Output Log Supply door failed to None L229 SUPPLY_DOOR_OPEN_FAIL None open P229 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 81 Service Manual 7 6 50 EC301 HIB parity error Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message Input Log W Output Log Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L301 HIB_ VERSION ERROR ALM 60 P301 X is not operational 7 82 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 51 EC302 HIB register read write failed Local Panel Message Printer malfunction P302 2001 May Rev M 1202688 HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message J Input Log W
188. as whole numbers Therefore the Celsius readings provide a more accurate measurement 3 2 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 3 Adjustments Measurement Procedure 1 When Ready is displayed on the the local panel open the top cover of the IMAGER 2 Remove the top cover from the processor clamshell Caution A Hot Surface A The surfaces around the slot in the top of the processor are hot and hot air exits through the slot Do not touch the surfaces around the slot and do not hold the block above the slot for prolonged periods of time 3 Use stainless steel cleaner to wipe clean the slot at the top of the processor and the two exhaust slots 4 Check the Zone 2 temperature Insert the probe in the center of the slot in the top of the processor Refer to Figure 3 3 L gt Note When looking straight down into the slot in the top of the processor three rollers are visible Insert the probe between the two rollers closest to the front of the machine As the rollers turn they will draw the probe in toward the drum 5 Allow the block to rest squarely in the slot see Figure 3 3 Left Side View gt Front Figure 3 3 6 The meter reading will vary slightly and within approximately one minute should go through a high low cycle For example the high reading may be 122 7 C and the low reading may be 122 3 C Both the high reading and the low reading must be in the range of 122 2 122 8 C Note the
189. at requires cleaners solvents 2 Clean the processor rollers that are accessible without further disassembly see Figure 5 6 Do not remove the rollers Use a soft lint free pad to wipe the rollers clean with alcohol 3 Clean the stripper blade by wiping it with alcohol and a lint free cleaning pad Clean These Rollers 8700 187A Figure 5 6 2001 May Rev M 1202688 5 5 Service Manual 5 5 4 10 000 Cycle Checklist After every 10 000 cycles the Local Panel displays a message prompting the user to schedule a PM call The user can remove this message by opening and then closing the filtration assembly door with power on A PM should be set up at your and the user s convenience 1 Check the Error Log and the Print Log In the Error Log look for film feed problems for example In the Print Log look for inconsistent readings in DPatch beam power and kicker feed 2 Perform processor 10 000 cycle cleaning procedure 5 5 6 L gt Note After completing cleaning place the used cleaning pads in the disposal bag provided in the 10 000 cycle PM kit Tie wrap the bag and dispose of it properly Check the stripper gap and adjust as necessary procedure 3 2 Check processor slip ring and brush alignment and adjust as necessary procedure 3 11 Clean the platen using 3M Auto Pak Tack Cloth procedure 5 5 7 Do a calibration sheet and check the D Log E curve Replace the c
190. ause The video cable is disconnected or bad Solution Check replace video cable On Site Technician Correctable 1 Cause The number of passes for a VEIB connected to a 8700 8500 IMAGER must be double that of a VEIB connected to an 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER or 969 or 959 IMAGER Solution Change the video passes parameters per the MPC help screen documentation 2 Cause This is a common setup problem when adjusting parameters with a VEIB Solution Refer to the installation procedure in the service manual 3 Cause The PLL is not seated fully due to the plastic standoffs being too long Solution Modify the standoffs so the PLL seats fully or replace with part number 26 1007 2402 5 7 42 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 11 EC75 Local panel failed Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message Input Log W Output Log None K203 The local panel is L75 LOCAL PANEL ERROR None bad on laser imager X 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 43 Service Manual 7 6 12 EC85 Image memory is full Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM 952 Host alarm IMX K85 Image Memory is full L85 MEM FULL FAI MOV or FAI BSY Summary Not enough image memory is available to perform the store This is a normal condition but may be caused by factors that are not part of normal operation gt Note On a stand alone IMAGER with touch screen keypad you must select Best Fit to clear mem
191. ber TDB F includes faceplate See NO era fee rc res NAA NAA AR 71A 78 8092 4115 7 MEMORY DAUGHTER BOARD MDB 16 MEG 8 Bit See Note 1 AR 71B 78 8092 4116 5 MEMORY DAUGHTER BOARD MDB 32 MEG 8 Bit See Note 1 AR 71C 78 8092 4117 3 MEMORY DAUGHTER BOARD MDB 32 MEG 12 Bit See Note 1 AR 72A 78 8094 5492 5 MODEM BOARD US See Note 1 AR 72B 78 8092 4154 6 MODEM CONNECT BOARD OUS See Note 1 AR 73 78 8092 5434 1 SUPPORT Ferrite Video Interface Board See Note 1 AR Note 1 Not shown 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 73 Service Manual Figure 8 23 Electronics Enclosure Assembly Dual Screen 1 of 2 1202688 2001 May Rev M 8 74 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 23 Electronics Enclosure Assembly Dual Screen 2 of 2 8 75 2001 May Rev M 1202688 Service Manual Figure 8 23 Electronics Enclosure Assembly Dual Item No Part Number Description Qty O Not Available ELECTRONIC ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY Dual Tac Not Available s ENCLOSURE Main 40 000 ae As e EN dee Ze Kat Oi Seek ide 1 2 Not Available PANEL Inside 1 3 sac 10 0094 5267 1 gt PIN HINGE icc Kal ena Mas Prades hen Rew LIRA en en AD ead een LI 2 4 78 8094 5268 9 PANEL Cover 1 5 Not Available ELECTRONICS FAN ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 24
192. blade by wiping it with alcohol and a cleaning pad This type of blade must not be cleaned with Troubleshooter 3 Wipe the stripper parts dry and reassemble them as shown in Figure 5 11 During reassembly a Install new torsion springs if the assembly uses the lighter type springs b If the assembly uses heavy springs install the washed springs Note that the two springs are not identical The red spring installs on the right side of the processor as viewed from the front Caution When the stripper is installed the long side of the springs must rest against the machine frame or the assembly will not function right c Apply Krytox lubricant to all four shoulder screws before installing them d Install the stripper assembly in the processor Shoulder Blade Shoulder a Screws i Ss Screw 8500 404C Figure 5 11 2001 May Rev M 1202688 5 13 Service Manual H Lubricating the Processor Roller Bearings 1 Slide all the rollers to one side of the processor 2 Use a soft cloth or towel to remove any previous lubricant or dirt from the bushings shafts at the ends of the rollers 3 Slide the rollers to the other side of the processor and repeat the cleaning procedure on that side gt Note Cleaning is completed when the cleaning cloth does not pick up
193. bration process takes approximately one week Send the meter and probe in for calibration prior to going on vacation This will ensure that they will be available for use when needed 5 3 Serial Number Label Location The serial number label is located on the frame behind the left door of the IMAGER Use this serial number to report all service activity Customers should be instructed to provide the model and serial number when requesting service See Figure 5 1 Serial Number Figure 5 1 5 4 Adapter Cable Pinouts Figure 5 2 through Figure 5 4 provide the pinouts for the various host adapter cables that can be connected to the copper TDB or the UKEIB Figure 5 5 provides the pinout for the 37 to 26 pin DDR to UKEIB adapter cable RS422 Host Adapter Cable 78 8077 4159 6 37 Pin 9 Pin Signal 1 1 GND 21 2 RXD 3 7 RXD 20 3 TXD 2 8 TXD 4 5 8 9 JJ 22 23 26 27 Figure 5 2 5 2 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 5 Additional Information RS232 Host Adapter Cable 78 8071 8331 0 25 Pin 9 Pin Signal 2 4 TX 3 6 RX 7 1 GND 6 E 5 Figure 5 3 Genesis Cable GE only 25 Pin 9 Pin Signal 1 1 GND 9 2 RXD 8 3 TXD 22 7 RXD 21 8 TXD Figure 5 4 37 to 26 Pin DDR to UKEIB Adapter Cable 78 8063 4008 7 37 Pin 26 Pin Signal 1 1 GND 21 2 RX14 3 3 RX1 200 11 1X1 2 12 TX1 22
194. ccess 7 Thoroughly vacuum the chute area chimney 8 Replace the chute cover plate 8 screws and the clam shell cover 4 screws Remove 4 g Chute Cover Plate 7 Remove 8 P ng Clean 3 slot areas 8700 402C Figure 5 8 B Removing the Drum and Rollers Caution Before handling the drum remove any jewelry rings bracelets watches etc that could accidentally contact the surface of the drum Wear protective gloves while cleaning gt Note A waste container preferably a sink is needed to clean the processor If a sink is not available an empty 14 by 17 inch film cartridge can be used Be aware that this cleaning procedure produces fumes that may be objectionable to a customer Try to find a cleaning area where complaints will be minimized 1 Remove the hot drum reference procedure 4 2 1 Set it on a drum stand 2 Examine the surface of the drum for damage in the film path area Look for cuts and gouges L gt Note If the drum is damaged do not proceed with drum cleaning in the following procedures The drum must be replaced However the other components of the processor must be cleaned 3 Remove the hot processor rollers reference 4 2 2 Place them in the sink or cartridge 2001 May Rev M 1202688 5 9 Service Manual C Removing and Disassembling the Stripper Assembly Some stripper assemblies have blades covered with plastic mylar Kapton Also some have heavy torsion springs The
195. cessor warming Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Please wait XXX minutes K222 Film processor X is None None for processor to finish not ready Minutes to warming P511 ready TTT Summary If the temperature is below 122 2 C P511 Processor warming xx minutes until ready is displayed 7 90 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 58 EC522 Bad densitometer Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm ore Summary The densitometer has failed Sequence of Events Phone Fix Operator Correctable On Site Technician Correctable Replace the densitometer 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 91 Service Manual 7 6 59 EC542 Jam in processor Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Media jam at processor K211 Media is jammed in L542 Lift top cover and remove laser imager 1 Check Jam in processor interior all media in area 4 P542 local panel Summary The media is jammed in the processing drum The processor entrance sensor came on but the densitometer sensor did not come on Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing for a description of machine functions as film is driven through the processor Phone Fix Operator Correctable Clear jam Make sure the processor cover latches gt Note All images on the current sheet are erased from memory and will have to be ref
196. ch BRACKET Lever LEVER Switch ROD Prop CLIP Rod ID X 3125 OD X 078 External E Ring 8 21 Service Manual Figure 8 3 Hood Assembly 1202688 2001 May Rev M Item E 2 Ow gt 0 JO O1 RON 2001 May Rev M Part Number 78 8094 5339 8 78 8094 9024 2 78 8094 9025 9 Not Available 78 8094 5334 9 26 1003 7492 0 26 1011 6259 7 DY 1102 0663 7 78 8094 5452 9 26 1003 7120 7 78 8092 4042 3 HINGE SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M5 X 0 8 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 6 1202688 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 3 Hood Assembly Description HOOD ASSEMBLY Kodak HOOD ASSEMBLY GE HOOD ASSEMBLY OEM except GE HOOD MOUNT Rubber Vibration 2 SCREW Cap Hex Socket Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 2 LOCAL PANEL ASSEMBLY 0 00 00 ccc cece cee teen eee 1 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 5 BRACKET Pivot Service Manual Figure 8 4 Front Panel Assembly H d i
197. channel 2 to pin 8 of U3 on the Rotating Processor Board RPB Caution Energizing K801 will apply 117 VAC to the slip rings of the RPB Energize K801 by shorting the side of R4J8 that is connected to pin 20 of CN1308 to ground on the Machine Interface Board MIB The signals on channel 1 amp 2 should be out of phase If the signals are not out of phase the wiring to the RPB is out of phase 2 Slip Ring Brush Check that the slip rings and brushes are properly aligned see paragraph 3 11 There should be no signs of arcing Arcing will cause an interruption in the power to the RPB The brush holder mounting holes are slotted so the holder could be cocked with respect to the slip rings Adjust or replace as necessary Note that the holder is mounted with two screws and is longer on one end Adjust as shown in Figure 7 22 If assembled incorrectly the brushes touch the slip ring only with one corner 7 86 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin AC Phasing MB T SCB CN1005 A CN1306 CN1309 CN1210 U8K1 1 Po 8 13N 11 7 Y AHD mji gt Pr SE U1J1 U7J1 cr Ti U3 Pi KA sep war war 3 pos A ALT ei JP La 2 2 CT P2 1801 U6 MIB CN1308 CN1009 pa 24 19 10 1 USHI TP
198. ck b Identify an area that includes maximum whites but does not include any overwhite text This is critical 6 Click and drag to create a rectangle that surrounds the true black and true white areas identified in the previous step then select the OK button gt Note At this point the IMS samples the video and passes the digital values to the MPC The MCP adjusts the black level based on the sample and turns on the appropriate LED in the VEIB to indicate the gain white level This sampling and adjusting continues at approximately 4 second intervals 2 30 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 7 The Gain amp Black Level Fine Tune window opens and displays the minimum and maximum digital values along with the black level and VIB EVEIB only the digital gain gt Note If all the values are zero the acquire has failed and the cause should be investigated L gt Note The following step does not apply to the VIB EVIB 8 At the VEIB adjust the appropriate gain pot until LED 6 or LED 7 turns on Remember that the state of the LEDs is updated at approximately 4 second intervals 9 At the MPC select the Close button in the Gain amp Black Level Fine Tune window L gt Note Because this is a rough gain and black level adjustment the digital values displayed at this point are not important They will become important when the final adjustment is performed later in this procedure 10 Select t
199. cquiring again ACQ Parity EIB 0 or1 Summary The IMS detected a parity error in the data from the EIB Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the EIB and the IMAGER On Site Technician Correctable DEIB Check with OEM to ensure that the parity and word format in the MPC IMS DEIB Config screen matches the host 7 34 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 6 EC65 Data Overflow or Underflow Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Memel L65 ba Summary A data overflow or underflow has occurred possibly because the VEIB is set up for internal pixel clock PLL but requires an external clock Phone Fix Operator Correctable On Site Technician Correctable VEIB Check the external clock jumpers on the VEIB 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 35 Service Manual 7 6 7 EC66 Image memory address has crossed the boundary of available memory 7 36 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 8 EC67 Too many pixels received from EIB or IB Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IMX 952 Host alarm None K72 Memory error L67 FIFO OVERFLOW ALM 67 Try Acquiring again Summary Too many pixels received during an acquire Sequence of Events The IMS is expecting a certain number of pixels from the EIB IB based on the values entered for Horiz Active Pixels in the config screen If the input module receives more pixels than
200. cs module Optics Module GN702 EN703 Nam O Gain O Offset CN704 Figure 3 6 Caution To avoid damage to the Y galvo driver board wear an anti static wrist strap when adjusting the offset potentiometer Take care not to touch any other components on the Y galvo driver board 5 Use an insulated screwdriver to adjust the offset pot A 1 4 turn of the pot moves the density patch approximately 0 5 mm Turn the pot clockwise to increase the distance between the top of the film and the top of the density patch turn the pot counterclockwise to decrease the distance L gt Note Do not adjust the gain pot The gain pot affects the image size in the Y direction 6 Install the front panel and the supply cartridge 7 Power up the imager and repeat the measurement procedure 3 8 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 3 Adjustments 3 5 Exit Transport Sensor Actuator Theory of Operation The sensor actuator is mounted on a shaft A spring is wrapped around the other end of the shaft As film exits the imager it pushes on the spring which rotates the shaft and actuator slightly counterclockwise unblocking the sensor Once the film has cleared the spring the spring drops back into the slot in the exit guide which rotates the shaft and actuator slightly clockwise blocking the sensor Specification With the spring resting in the slot in the exit guide the
201. ctor on the VEIB Refer to Figure 2 19 VEIB oooo00000000 FIBER OPTICS Go000000000 VIDEO bso VIDEO Ade A DDDDDDDDDDO ACH B CH ppppp50000O IN PORT 0 PORT 1 o e O QO Soo 6 Modality Pixel Clock Figure 2 19 2001 March Rev L 1202688 241 Service Manual 4 Connect the fiber optic image cable to the VEIB Refer to Figure 2 20 5 Connect the fiber optic cable to the FIB at the rear of the IMAGER Refer to Figure 2 20 VEIB DDDDDDDDDDO FIBER OPTICS Oooopocopocop0g VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO EYA EE OUT PORT 0 PORT 1 tale O B8228822855 O O O OO A Lead FIB Fiber oe Optic Cable Figure 2 20 6 Connect the VEIB power cord For installations outside the U S and Canada the VEIB is supplied with a harmonized power cord with no wall plug For these locations attach the proper type plug obtain locally The VEIB uses a universal power supply that requires no modification for input voltages in the range of 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 2 3 6 Video Source to VIB 1 Use an analog cable to connect the video signal from the modality to the appropriate Video In connector on the VIB at the rear of the IMAGER Run the analog cable through the ferrite core as shown on the machine label Refer to Figure 2 21 2 If the modality provides a pixel clock signal use an analog cable to connect it to the appropriate Ext Clock In connector on the VIB at the rear
202. cuits Sensor Ever V signal to Ground SCB A Flag Sensor baa 5 A 4 pal E 3 210 yr 218 Power QE Distribution 8700 283L Figure 7 4 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 5 Service Manual 7 2 5 Interlock Switches The interlock switches in the IMAGER are pulsed high and then low every second for safety reasons The following table explains the functionality SCB Sends to Interlock Switch SCB Interprets Output State of Switch Low High Short Low Undefined If the SCB sends out a low to an interlock switch and receives back a high e An interlock failed error code EC203 through EC206 will be logged after 1 second e The watchdog timer circuit on the SCB will shut down the SCB after 8 seconds turning off all motors heaters local panel communications etc The rotating segment display on the SCB will go blank gt Note The watchdog timer circuit could also shut down the SCB if the CPU locked up and could not check the interlocks every 8 seconds There are pulldown resistors on the SCB for the interlock inputs Therefore a low output to the interlock with a low feedback is undefined L gt Note The service override interlock is a special case Refer to EC203 7 6 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 3 Motor Solenoid Trouble Analysis 7 3 1 Motor Locations Refer to Figure 7 5 for motor locations in the IMAGER 2001 May Rev M Feed Motor M401 Rollbac
203. d CER v CN305 peed Ee BE 227 i PUMP AU if D Py l l E A N R CENT TP A 200 240 1 901 902 29887 et aea AN U13 NG id RED 2 602 2 2602 37 A E D SPARE en vac 2k 90336 54 904 4 Fa nai CR Bee S male M502 ae aie R29 D4 D9 BLK 1 SS 601 1 2601 36 e SC GND E INPUT 3 937 CN908A_CN908 925 7 2543 BE mi 4 oe AHE ws DH A ile 1 943 5 943 8 2544 e beer Se Y WHT 15 610 35 A HOME ay 940 9 2801 CN809 CN811 THERMAL J2 DS 6 5 I mes or DRV BLU 4 609 BAR HOME 2609 34 A m g CN308 age se 926 944 10 2839 899 17 FILTRATION SWITCH NE Sg ES A 3 l NOTE circuit Gone PH GRN 3 608 2608 3g o DE 5V 2314 14 314 TL BLK SEE NOTE SE GES 945 11 2840 7 840 2 FAN U20 it cided orn BE Ch nen 607 2607 32 Jl Ug EXIT A 2315 15 315 2 RED Ke SW304 BELOW CERIO 939 on 12 2841 8 841 TRIAC i included on latest y BLK 1 606 2606 Bike 2316 187 316 3 GRN pi al EXIT TRAY 24vac CN294 SE 947 ae a V OPENS SEENoTE Version of boards g CN413 TON 2317 17 317 4 BLU DRV el SENSOR 1 914 6 29157 E Soe ae ae ele NGG WE panei leas 2 N WHT 5 440 2440 30 o 2318 18 318 5 WHT T 922 o a BLU 4 439 TONUP 2439129 4 nA e CN504 SE 948 1 851 BED ie 859 1 1 351 WHI DEP PR GEN 3 438 2438 28t o TPA 2507 U 7 ______ 507 71 BLK mised 2 916 8 DE 2 852 y 860 2 352 SANVEL 1 4 SENSOR ple RED 2 Y 2437 27 e RICK 2508 8 508
204. d Drum Stand e Bag with Tie wrap for cleaning waste disposal e Isopropyl Alcohol e Krytox Lubricant Protective Gloves A Caution Wear protective gloves for any cleaning procedure that requires cleaners solvents Procedure A Cleaning the Processor Exhaust Slots and Chute 1 Remove power from the IMAGER and unplug the power cord A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Raise the top cover and pull out the processor assembly to its fully extended position L gt Note Be aware as you begin disassembly and cleaning that the drum and rollers should be cleaned within 10 to 15 minutes after power removal when they are still warm to hot 3 Remove the clam shell cover Figure 5 8 A Caution Hot Surface AN When the imager is initially powered down the processor drum and rollers are hot Take care when working in the processor area 4 Scrape off debris and vacuum from the slot areas Put on gloves and use Troubleshooter and a pad to wipe clean the two exhaust slots and the slot at the top of the processor 5 Use isopropyl alcohol to remove any residue left by the Troubleshooter 6 Remove the eight screws securing the cover plate over the chute area see Figure 5 8 5 8 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 5 Additional Information L gt Note Not all machines include this cover plate for chute a
205. d by the mounting legs of the sensor being rounded Solution Replace the sensor Problem Films are not being kicked out of the optics platen consistently Cause The optics is not square with the transport assembly because one of the shipping screws was left in Solution Remove the shipping screw Problem Films are not being kicked out of the optics platen consistently Cause The optics is being pushed towards the back of the machine this causes the film that is being ejected from the optics platen to not hit between the two drive rollers in the transport Instead it is stubbing on the rear roller Solution Determine why the optics is not centered Problem The films are not being kicked fully and do not enter the transport nip rollers consistently Cause The platen kick solenoid nylon bushings Refer to Service Manual IPB Figure 8 14 item 29 are too tight and bulge This extra dimension does not allow the kicker to travel to its full extension Solution Loosen the screen holding the nylon bushing General Troubleshooting Tip MPC Log Printer Log Kick Count will show how many times the kicker solenoid was energized to kick the film out of the optics platen this number should be 1 with an occasional 2 showing in the log Theory Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing 7 60 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 29 EC165 Jam before processor Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX I
206. d from memory and will have to be refilmed On Site Technician Correctable Cause Exit switch is sticking in roller Groove is worn where the switch hits the roller Solution Cut out the area that is worn off to widen the groove 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 95 Service Manual 7 6 62 EC549 Processor filter not present Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Please insert filter L549 FILTER WAS CHANGED P549 On Site Technician Correctable Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis 7 96 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 63 EC550 Clean processor and replace filter Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Preventive maintenance and None L550 CHANGE_FILTER None cleaning recommended Please schedule with service See Operator s Guide for details P550 Summary The filter count in SCB NVRAM has exceeded 10 000 prints Phone Fix Operator Correctable Place a service call On Site Technician Correctable Perform PM procedure and replace filter Refer to Service Manual PM procedure 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 97 Service Manual 7 6 64 EC551 552 553 Processor heater 1 2 3 failed Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is L551 552 553 P551 552 553 not operational PROCESSOR HEATER1 2 3 FAIL 551 zone 1
207. e 2 AR CABLE Genesis GE 100m 330 Ft See Note 2 AR POWER SUPPEY EIB ctas greet fant edt sl a E 1 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 25 External System Interfaces Cabling continued Item No Part Number Description Qty 18 78 8063 3672 9 FAN VEIB 22424 eyed a eee eth mana oo eek EE aus eis 1 19 78 8077 4315 4 PLL 110 MHZ VEIB Aer de A dt us ee Bee Abe whe EE he db AR 20 78 8092 4173 6 KEYPAD Compact 12 Volt AR 21 78 8094 5482 6 CABLE Extension 10m 33 ft Compact Keypad Not shown AR 22 78 8094 5481 8 CABLE Extension 30m 98 ft Compact Keypad Not shown AR 23 78 8094 5480 0 CABLE Extension 60m 198 ft Comnpact Keypad Not shown AR 24 26 1000 4144 6 RECEPTACLE Wall Outlet Not Shown AR 25 26 1011 8096 1 COVER Wall Outlet Black Not Shown AR 26 78 8077 4087 9 KEYPAD Remote AR 27 78 8075 2602 1 CABLE KEIB 9 pin Copper 3 m 10 ft Not Shown AR 28 78 8063 3964 0 CABLE KEIB 9 pin Copper 10 m 33 ft Not shown AR 29 78 8063 3965 7 CABLE KEIB 9 pin Copper 30 m 98 ft Not shown AR 30 78 8063 3966 5 CABLE KEIB 9 pin Copper 60 m 198 ft
208. e L212 Handshake acquisition error None L214 Line length error None L216 Hardware real time error None L217 Software loading real time error P221 K202 L221 ALM 60 Pickup top sensor failed P222 K202 L222 ALM 60 Pickup middle sensor failed P223 K202 L223 ALM 60 Film present sensor failed P224 K202 L224 ALM 60 Pickup motor failed P225 K202 L225 ALM 60 Cartridge open rack sensor failed P226 K202 L226 ALM 60 Rollback home sensor failed P227 K202 L227 ALM 60 Rollback motor failed P228 K210 L176 or ALM 60 Tongue depressor sensor failed L177 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 25 Service Manual pn Le Jeu Description P506 P507 P509 P510 pati p512 ee LI Bad densitometer CS p542 P543 P544 P549 P550 SE P552 P553 P554 P567 P605 P625 P633 System near calibration limits film almost fast P634 System near calibration limits film almost slow P910 K202 ALM 60 Imager detects no communication from IMS or K1 7 26 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 Troubleshooting QuickSheets This subsection includes QuickSheets for all the error codes generated by the system 7 6 1 Error Code Descriptions The following table lists the error codes with a brief description of the problem Table 7 1 Error Code Descriptions Error Code Description of Problem EC39 EIC or IB not detected by IPB EC48 No End of File EOF EC59 IPB unable to load param
209. e nen 2 96 0000 0346 5 MIDDLE RETAINER ASSEMBLY 2 96 0000 0347 3 BOTTOM RETAINER ASSEMBLY 00 0 cece eee eens 2 78 8092 4003 5 INSULATION TOP oi o Met M Pine dated naw hed ate 1 96 0000 0943 9 INSULATION Bottom 1 78 8092 4001 9 STANDOFF Retainer 12 78 8094 5910 6 CLIP Inner o 6 26 1003 5775 0 SCREW Mach Metric FL PHIL 90 Deg Countersunk M4 X 0 7 X 6 0 12 78 8092 4093 6 PLATE Feb 1 26 1011 5699 5 PHOTOINTERRUPTER DS4 See Note 1 1 Note 1 Part includes both lens cap and photointerrupter Use lens cap only do not solder in new photointerrupter 1202688 8 59 2001 May Rev M Service Manual Figure 8 17 Processor Frame Assembly Figure 8 17 Processor Frame Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty 0 Not Available PROCESSOR FRAME ASSEMBLY 1 1 Not Available FRAME Processor 1 2 Not Available COVER Processor 1 3 78 8092 4352 6 SHROUD Processor 1 4 78 8095 9384 7 PIN Hinge Processor 1 8 60 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 18 Processor Drum Assembly
210. e pickup No arm to top position Move pickup arm to top position from multifeed detector 8700 214A Figure 7 14 Prepare to Feed Film Sequence 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 17 Service Manual 7 4 8 Feed Film to Platen Entrance Run feed motor to move film toward platen 10 seconds elapsed Platen entry sensor low Actuated Yes Turn off Film jammed after feed motor multifeed detector and before platen entry sensor Is double feed sensor low 2 Actuated 8700 2154 Figure 7 15 Feed Film to Platen Entrance Sequence 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 4 9 Close Out Pickup Cycle Move picker arm to cartridge bottom Is picker down sensor low 2 Blocked Continue moving arm down to overdrive by 26 steps Pickup arm could not be moved to proper position Cups contact film Is film out sensor low 2 Actuated Pickup cycle is completed 8700 216A Figure 7 16 Close Out Pickup Cycle Sequence 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 19 Service Manual 7 4 10 Load Film into Platen Film has been pre staged at platen entrance Load film command from cart control module Platen entry sensor While film is in the sensor the sensor s state is changed Turn platen motor on Actuate platen top align ment and gate solenoids No
211. e strobe signals If both pin 6 and pin 7 are low less than 2 volts in an idle state host not sending any data the host is tri stating the strobe signal DEIB or DIB Chip Non inverting input Inverting input Output If Siemens is tri stating the signal order a modified DEIB 78 8079 0737 9 Order this part only if you are getting EC59 or EC68 and you know the modality is providing a tri stated output 7 32 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshooting 2 Problem EC59 Cause If this is a new setup the DEIB DIB parameters may be incorrect Solution Use a script file if available If this fails try different parameters Header Line mode is the most common Header mode 3 Problem Acquires fail with EC68 or EC59 Cause If the IMAGER reply to the host s header information takes longer than the host is willing to wait host wait timing is out of spec the host will error out and stop sending data Solution Set MPC Setup IMS System Memory management to First fit This will speed up the IMAGER reply after the header data but will result in slightly decreased memory performance If this does not solve the problem try the following procedure a Set MPC IMS EIB Config Header Mode to Ignore Header Line This will also speed up the IMAGER reply to the host header b Enter the values for Pixels Per Line and Image Lines that you retrieved earlier from the Image Show screen c Be aware that while in Ignore H
212. eader Line mode MPC Image Show will now display the values you just entered in the DEIB config screen even if the host is not sending any data d If Ignore Header mode fixes the problem it can be used as a permanent fix only if the host sends a single size image If the host changes image sizes Ignore Header Mode cannot be used e If Ignore Header mode fixes the problem you may want to set Memory Management in MPC back to Best Fit to maximize utilization of memory 4 Problem Digital acquires work with 969 but fails with the IMAGER Cause The 8700 8500 IMAGER cannot process digital image data as fast as the 969 IMAGER 969 6 Mpixel max 8700 8500 4 Mpixel max Solution The digital transfer rate of the host must be less than 4 Mpixels per second Have the OEM tech configure the modality for 952 setup This will send a digital transfer rate of 1 Mpixel per second gt Note The following hosts have a fast digital transfer rate Picker MR and CT General Troubleshooting Tips e Use the other port on the DEIB DIB e Use the DEIB DIB SMPTE TEST EPROMS 959SM 8 2 5 to send an image from the DEIB DIB to the 969 IMAGER e Use your scope or logic probe to check signals on the modality red green blue 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 33 Service Manual 7 6 5 EC64 IPB detected parity error during acquisition Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm None K72 Memory Error L64 ALM 64 Try a
213. ear mid transport sensor align solenoids No 4 second elapsed Processor entry sensor low 2 Yes Yes Deactuated Turn off platen top solenoid Turn off platen motor Figure 7 19 Drive Film Up through Transport Sequence 7 22 Turn off platen and transport motors 8700 198A 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 4 13 Drive Film Through Processor to Exit Tray Mid trans port sensor hi No No 17 seconds elapsed 15 seconds elapsed Exit tray sensor hi Yes Blocked deactuated Yes Yes Unblocked Jam in densitometer Yes Turn off No transport motor 11 seconds elapsed Densito meter sensor low Yes d I Jam in processor Yes Unblocked Jam in exit area 10 seconds elapsed Processor entry sensor low Wait 1 2 seconds for D Patch to be read Does image have a D Patch Yes Unblocked No Run exit motor at high speed 15 seconds elapsed Densito meter sensor hi Yes Blocked Yes No Turn on exit motor at low 7 seconds elapsed 2 Exit tray sensor low Yes speed Jam in densitometer Blocked Yes Jam in exit area Hold for 1 second End of sequence Figure 7
214. eassembl 4 1 4 Electronics Enclosure Cover A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 3 Loosen 8 0 4 Lift cover up and away from frame Za Y A 8700 29C amp Figure 4 6 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 5 Service Manual 4 2 Processor Exit Assembly 4 2 1 Processor Drum A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER 3 Grasp the handle on the front of the processor exit assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position 4 Remove e ring and disengage support arm Remove 8700 86C Figure 4 7 Caution A Hot Surface A When the IMAGER is initially powered down the processor drum and rollers are hot Take care when removing the drum Caution The surface of the drum is easily damaged by fingernails and jewelry Handle the drum with one hand on the large gear and the other hand on the opposite endcap Do not touch the gray silicone surface of the drum 4 6 1202688 2001
215. ed low by the optics module The local panel will display Printer is performing Self Test until the temperature reaches specifications Error State If the optics module does not achieve a 46 56 C 115 132 F temperature within 15 minutes EC123 Optics Module Temp error is declared Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable Tech Tip You can check the YTempe signal on the SCB at the top leg of R7N3 It should be high when the SCB optics cable is disconnected and pulled low by an optics module that is up to temperature If the signal is not correct check reseat the optics control cable from the SCB to the optics module Be sure to reseat all three connections including the bulkhead connection L gt Note This status message may be displayed longer than minutes till ready on the local panel if the optics is not up to temperature 7 48 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 17 EC126 SCB unable to detect EOL signal from optics module Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is L126 OPTICS NO EOL ALM 60 P126 not operational Summary The SCB is unable to detect the EOL signal from the optics module for each line of the film Sequence of Events The SCB is expecting a LINESYNC signal EOL from the optics module for each line of the film If it does not receive
216. efer to paragraph 7 4 for flow charts of machine functions during film drive Phone Fix Operator Correctable Clear the jam If the problem persists try a new cartridge of film On Site Technician Correctable General Troubleshooting Tip Refer to paragraph 7 2 for Sensor Troubleshooting Analysis Problem Cause The platen entry sensor is loose in its mounting probably caused by the mounting legs of the sensor being rounded Solution Replace the sensor Theory Refer to paragraph 7 4 for flow charts of machine functions during film drive 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 59 Service Manual 7 6 28 EC164 Jam exposure Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Media jam in platen K211 Media is jammed in L164 JAM_EXPOSURE Open left door and laser imager X Check local remove jam in area 3 panel P164 Summary The media is jammed in the exposure area while entering leaving the platen Either the platen entry sensor did not turn off or the platen bottom sensor entering or the platen exit sensor leaving did not come on Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing Phone Fix Operator Correctable Clear the jam On Site Technician Correctable General Troubleshooting Tip Refer to paragraph 7 2 for Sensor Troubleshooting Analysis Solution Refer to paragraph 7 2 for Sensor Troubleshooting Analysis Cause The platen entry sensor is loose in its mounting cause
217. em with panels open in order to solve field problems The laser interlock is not overridden by the service override switch 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 25 Service Manual 6 3 4 Operator Interfaces Local Panel The local panel supports two users and allows each to set contrast and density and to run contrast density and calibration tests When the system is connected to a network the density and contrast information is sent over the network The supply button on the local panel closes the film cartridge and unlocks the supply door The local panel also displays system status and error messages In addition it has power on and alarm indicators Optional Keypad The system will support two keypads the standard touch screen keypad and a compact keypad The compact keypad provides format selection image acquisition and printing functions A character representing each key is translated into the appropriate SuperSet command by the TDB The compact keypad is powered by the TDB and will operate up to 200 feet from the system gt Note The compact keypad is no longer available 6 3 5 System Firmware and Software Firmware All of the boards in the IMS and the MIB and SCB in the MCS have programmable devices for which firmware has been developed Software The IMS and MCS have separate operating software The operating software for the IMS resides in PROM on the IPB and the operating software for the MCS resides in PROM on the SCB
218. embly out to its extended position Disconnect 8700 141C Figure 4 38 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 33 Service Manual 4 4 Pickup Assembly 4 4 1 Pickup Module Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the front panel 4 1 1 y 4 Remove 2 Figure 4 39 8700 123C 4 34 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 2001 March Rev L lt 0 SE Remove 4 8700 1206 Disconnect Figure 4 40 Loosen 4 M4 Allen Support module from below and slide toward Disconnect 2 front of imager 8700 74C Figure 4 41 Service Manual 4 4 2 Vacuum Relay K501 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the front panel 4 1 1 L gt Note When reassembling check the labels on the wires to ensure that they are connected to the correct terminals The terminal numbers are marked on the relay Remove 2 fC Remove 87
219. emove the right side panel 4 1 3 2 Remove the electronics enclosure cover 4 1 4 3 To gain access to the Machine Interface Board MIB swing out the panel that holds the memory boards 4 Check the voltages by connecting a voltmeter to the appropriate test points on the MIB The table below lists the test points Figure 3 9 on the following page shows the test point locations If any of the voltages are out of specification perform the adjustment procedure MIB Test Points TP5H1 5V TP7G1 LOGIC GND TP518 17V TP6I1 17V TP7K1 24V TP6K1 GND TP519 AGND 2001 May Rev M 1202688 3 11 Service Manual Pp 0000000 00 GOOD QO QO CO0000000000000000000000 3M ASSY 78 8094 5102 0 TP5H1 TP518 TP519 pen TP6K1 TP7K1 TP7G1 5V 17V AGND 17V GND 24V LOGIC GND Figure 3 9 3 12 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 3 Adjustments Adjustment 1 Remove the rear panel 4 1 2 Loosen the two screws that secure the power module Slide the power module out of the imager Do not disconnect the power module cables Remove the plastic plugs covering the adjustment potentiometers Rotate the appropriate output adjustment potentiometer s as required Refer to Figure 3 10 ar D OUTPUT OUTPUT ADJ ADJ 45V 17V 17V 24V O O O O 1 2 3 4 Figure 3 10 2001 May Rev M 1202688 Service Manual 3 7 2 5 2 VDC Power Supply PS902 A Warning When the power cord is plu
220. emove three hex nuts M3 Remove the coax cable retainer Remove two hex nuts DN OD O PS 9 Remove the coax cable clip 10 Remove four hex nuts and remove the cover from the RF Tag Interface Board and RF Reader Board 11 Unplug the coax cable from the RF Tag Interface Board Remove El E ld Remove 2 J 6 8 Remove retainer Disconnect plug H Remove clip on i O O a Remove 4 LaS Top View Bottom View Figure 4 59 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 51 Service Manual 4 6 Exposure Assembly 4 6 1 Platen and Optics Module Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Remove the front panel 4 1 1 gt Note When reassembling be aware that the cables which connect to CN701 and CN702 on the optics module are easily reversed The thicker cable connects to CN702 Remove 2 M3 Allen Disconnect 4 5 Vi 8700 75C Disconnect ground Disconnect Slide module c
221. ensity when the attenuator is in the wide open position non attenuating The attenuator is a rotating polarizing filter within the Optics Module The Beam Power Monitor board then reports the results of the intensity of the laser beam back to the SCB via the BPWR signal line Error State If the Maximum Laser Power reading is outside of 50 to 70mw EC602 is generated The laser must be power cycled to clear the error state Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable 1 Problem Cause Optics module bad Solution Replace the optics module Make the following checks first e Check the Beam Power Monitor aperture for dust or debris in the chute e Reseat cables to Optics Module SCB and MIB 7 102 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 69 EC603 Invalid optical density range Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Message Message Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L603 ALM 60 P603 X is not operational INVALID OPT DENSITY RANGE Summary If the Attenuator Dynamic range is outside of 80 120 EC603 invalid Optical Density Range is declared The machine must be power cycled to clear the error Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable Cause Bad optics module Solution Replace the optics Make the following checks first 1 Check the Beam Power Monitor aperture for dust or debris
222. er 5 16 ID X 13 16 OD with 1 8 groove 2 27 78 8613 4823 9 GROMMET Rubber 312 ID X 625 OD WI 437 DIA X 062 with groove 1 29 26 1011 6201 9 SPACER Nylon Round 312 OD X 171 ID X 125 for 8 screw 2 33 26 1011 8159 7 SCREW Shoulder Metric 6 0 DIA X 6 M5 X 0 8 X 6 Thd Hex Socket 2 40 78 8005 0188 0 SPRING External 375 OD X 045 eee ees 1 44 78 8094 5112 9 PWA Beam Power Board 1 46 Not Available HARNESS ASSEMBLY Platen 1 47 26 1003 3187 0 WASHER Lock 3 8 INT Tooth 8700 Only 4 48 26 1011 6194 6 SPRING External 3 00 OD 35 Wire Dia X 14 0 1 50 26 1011 6202 7 SWITCH Interlock 16A 250 VAC SW703 1 51 26 1003 7487 0 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 20 0 Sems External Tooth 2 53 26 1011 6387 6 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 2 54 26 1003 7118 1 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 12 0 Sems External Tooth 2 56 26 1003 7121 5 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 0 Sems External Tooth 57 58 8 52 77 8007 4484 7 BUSHING Snap Nylon cor cea A ile lc 1 Not Available MOUNT Cable Tie 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure
223. er X is L605 ATTEN_TEST_FAIL ALM 60 Printer malfunction not operational Summary The optics module attenuator could not rotate to a position which gives proper output power Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable Problem Cause Optics module is bad Solution Replace the optics Make the following checks first 1 Check the Beam Power Monitor aperture for dust or debris in the chute 2 Reseat the cables to the optics module SCB and MIB 3 If the problem remains replace the optics module 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 105 Service Manual 7 6 72 EC620 No film model found Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction L620 NO FILM MODEL ALM 57 P620 Summary The film model for the film in the cartridge could not be found in SCB NVRAM and the default film model was not found in SCB NVRAM Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable 7 106 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 73 EC622 Corrupt film tables Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is L622 ALM 57 P622 not operational CORRUPT FILM TABLES Summary The Transfer Function Tables TFT s on the SCB have failed the power up checksum test Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power Cycle The Machine On
224. er malfunction K202 Laser imager X L509 ALM 17 P509 is not operational PROCESSOR WARMUP FAIL Summary If the drum temperature is below 122 25 C P511 Processor warming xx minutes until ready is displayed If the processor does not warm up in the time calculated by the SCB and displayed on the local panel EC509 Processor failed to warm up in allotted time is generated The top cover must be lifted to clear this error Phone Fix Operator Correctable On Site Technician Correctable 1 Problem EC 552 or EC 553 Slow warm up drum heater fail Cause Heater fuse is blown The current fuses are known to have about a 3 to 4 year life before they fail due to age A new style fuse is being redesigned L gt Note Some of the early IMAGER s did not have the connection clip soldered to the fuse leads This created a poor connection with resultant premature failure of the fuses Solution If a fuse has failed due to age replace all three fuses Refer to Service Manual disassembly section Solder connection clips to the fuse leads using a heat sink to keep the heat away from the fuse 2 Problem EC 551 552 553 Rotating Processor Boards blowing Cause Heat sink for transistor is not mounted correctly causing the transistor to burn out Solution Order a new RPB and inspect the new board to ensure that the transistor is sandwiched between the two heat sinks 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 89 Service Manual 7 6 57 EC511 Pro
225. erence Designation RF Tag Subsystem See paragraph 6 2 6 for descriptions of the boards including an RF Tag included in the RF Tag Subsystem Interface Board RF Reader Board and RF Antenna Board Beam Power Board Reads power of laser at platen Fan Control Board Controls power to filtration fan LPB Local Panel Board Provides buttons for operator input and LCD to display menus and status information MFB Multi Feed Board Detects number of sheets entering transport from supply cartridge Pos Processor Gomm Board Provides communication between APE and S08 PCB RPB Rotating Processor Board Controls drum temperature Communicates with SCB via PCB System Control Board Controls electromechanical functions and communicates with IPB 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 17 Service Manual 6 3 3 3 EEA Electronics Figure 6 7 shows the location of the MIB NMB PDB and the SCB as well as the interface connectors to the rest of the system on the EEA The MIB NMB and SCB are located behind the swing out inner panel on which the IMS boards are mounted The PDB is mounted on the back side of the EEA All of the signal and control interfaces to the MIB and SCB go through shielded bulkhead connectors to minimize RFI problems This approach also improves the modularity of the EEA DC power is brought into the EEA from the PMA through CN1013 to the MIB The MIB distributes the power to the rest of the boards within the EEA The boards are
226. ervice Manual 7 6 60 EC543 Jam in densitometer Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Media jam at processor K211 Media is jammed in L543 Jam at densitometer area Lift top cover and laser imager 1 remove all media in area 4 Check local panel P543 Summary The media is jammed in the processing module at the densitometer The densitometer sensor came on but the exit sensor did not Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing for a description of machine functions as film is driven through the processor Phone Fix Operator Correctable Clear the jam gt Note All images on the current sheet are erased from memory and will have to be refilmed On Site Technician Correctable 7 94 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 61 EC544 Jam at exit Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Media jam near exit Lift K211 Media is jammed in L544 Jam to Exit top cover and remove jam laser imager 1 Check local in area 5 P544 panel Summary The media is jammed in the processing module going to the exit assembly The exit sensor came on but never went off Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing for a description of machine functions as film is driven through the processor Phone Fix Operator Correctable Clear jam L gt Note All images on the current sheet are erase
227. ese voltages can cause severe injury or death 3 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER then unplug the power cord 4 Remove the ventilation plate from the upper left corner of the power module to gain access to the terminal block above the transformer Refer to Figure 2 8 5 Move the black wire to the terminal that most closely matches the AC line voltage 6 Replace the ventilation plate O Go Figure 2 8 2 6 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 2 3 Cable Connections 2 3 1 Compact Keypad to TDB C L gt Note The compact keypad is no longer available but may still be on site in some customer locations 1 If a keypad extension cable is being used connect it to the compactkeypad cable Refer to Figure 2 9 2 Connect the keypad cable or keypad extension cable to the TDB C at the rear of the IMAGER Refer to Figure 2 9 TDB C o Keypad 8 Keypad Extension S Cable Cable Ges f O WWOO Compact Keypad Figure 2 9 2 3 2 Touch Screen Keypad to KFEIB to TDB F L gt Note The KFEIB Keypad Fiber External Interface Box only supports touch screen keypad users A UKEIB is required for host control users 1 Connect the keypad cable to the keypad and the KFEIB Refer to Figure 2 10
228. ess than 4 Mpixels per second Have the OEM tech configure the modality for 952 setup This will send a digital transfer rate of 1 Mpixel per second gt Note Hosts with a fast digital transfer rate include Picker MR and CT General Troubleshooting Tips e Use the other port on the DEIB DIB e Use the DEIB DIB SMPTE TEST EPROMS to send an image from the DEIB DIB to the IMAGER e Use your scope or logic probe to check signals from DEIB DIB to host 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 41 Service Manual 7 6 10 EC68 Video Timeout waiting for pixels from EIB or IB Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm None K68 Image acquire failed L68 TIMEOUT_EIB ALM 68 Try acquiring again Summary The IMS has timed out waiting for the full number of pixels from the VEIB VIB Sequence of Events The IMS is expecting a certain number of pixels based on the Horiz Active Pixels and Image Lines parameters in MPC IMS EIB Config If it does not receive the full number of pixels and lines EC68 is logged The most likely causes of EC68 for the VEIB VIB are e The parameter settings are incorrect and the VEIB is therefore trying to digitize during a sync pulse e The video signal is not stable e g due to an intermittent connection e The Double Gain parameter and or the gain pot in the VEIB is not providing sufficient video amplitude for the VEIB to digitize consistently Phone Fix Operator Correctable C
229. essor on the TDB and the microprocessor on the IPB is handled through a dual port RAM which resides on the IPB The communication parameters for the two serial ports on the TDB are passed from the IPB to the TDB through the dual port RAM after a power up reset The two serial ports on the TDB are jumper selectable for either RS 232 or RS 422 operation Both ports have only receive and transmit signals There is no hardware handshaking on either port They will support baud rates up to 19 2K The TDB will accept different command sets and translate them into a common command set In this way the IPB will only require a single command set to be active 6 3 1 5 Image Interface Boards DIB FIB VIB The system is capable of being configured for either a digital fiber or video input The digital input may be from 1 or 2 sources and may be either 831 952 959 protocol or 969 protocol The fiber input is capable of being connected to 1 or 2 external EIBs The design allows two different types of EIBs to be connected at the same time When 2 EIBs are connected only one input on each can be used The video input may be from one or two sources and may either provide an external clock or use a plug in phase lock loop PLL board for internal clock generation 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 13 Service Manual 6 3 1 6 Digital Interface Board DIB The DIB provides for two digital host copper connections to the system through the IPB The interfaces are
230. eters to EIB or IB EC64 IPB detected error during acquisition EC65 Data overflow or underflow EC66 Image memory address has crossed the boundary of available memory EC163 Film jammed after multifeed detector and before platen entrance sensor EC164 Film jammed on platen entrance or exit sensor EC165 Film jammed on mid transport sensor 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 27 Service Manual Error Code Description of Problem 7 28 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin Error Code Description of Problem 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 29 Service Manual 7 6 2 EC39 EIB or IB not detected by IPB Local Panel HQ Keypad Message ErrorLog OM IMX 952 Host Alarm Message None K65 Image acquire failed L39 ALM 39 Try acquiring again EIB NOT DETECTED Summary The input module sent a command to the DEIB or VEIB on Fiber A and did not receive a response on Fiber B Sequence of Events 1 When the imager is powered up the IPB or Input Module loads the parameter set to the VEIB or DEIB through fiber optic cable A 2 The Enable LED on the VEIB or DEIB lights to indicate that it has received the parameter set and is in a ready state On the DEIB the User 1 or User 2 LED also lights at this time 3 The VEIB or DEIB sends a response back to the input module on fiber optic cable B If the input module does not receive a response from the VEIB DEIB EC39 is logged
231. evel is unacceptable try any of the following e Assuming that fine tuning has been done try selecting a different sampling area use different row and column settings when performing the MPC gain adjustment e Try adifferent image see Step 1 of this procedure e The Black Level setting can be increased by one or two digits to darken up the image Dmax This will also darken up the image Dmin slightly e f still having problems contact TAC a PST member or the local video expert Make final adjustments to framing parameters to obtain the full frame The preceding fine tuning steps may have shifted the horizontal delay so that a pixel is lost on the right or left side of the image To check for this print a film with clear borders change the Border setting in the Image Parameters window to 4095 View the image If a pixel is missing from the left or right side add or subtract one pixel from the Horizontal Delay setting Be sure to change the Border setting back to 0 when fine tuning is complete Proceed to Procedure 2 5 9 4 2 5 9 4 Set Customer Preferences When performing the following procedure note that the method of setting customer preferences varies depending on the control source For compact keypad and host control users density and contrast are set at the local panel of the IMAGER Refer to the User Guide for the 8700 IMAGER for details For compact keypad and host control users smooth sharp image processing is set
232. ever pull on cord to remove from outlet Grasp plug and pull to disconnect Do not operate equipment with a damaged power cord Do not use an extension cord to power this equipment Position the power cord so it will not be tripped over or pulled Connect this equipment to a grounded outlet Use only the power cord supplied with this equipment Do not place a portable multiple socket outlet power strip on the floor Mount the power strip on a wall or on the underside of a table 2001 March Rev L 1202688 V Service Manual WARNING Not protected against ingress of liquids including bodily fluids N WARNING For continued protection against fire replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and fuse rating WARNING This equipment is not contained in a sealed cabinet Therefore it must not be used in locations where it can come in contact with liquids including bodily fluids N CAUTION This equipment is intended to connect to other medical devices Only qualified service personnel may perform installation and service maintenance N CAUTION U S Federal law restricts this device to the sale by or on the order of a licensed health care practitioner CAUTION Do not substitute or modify any part of this equipment without approval of Eastman Kodak Company N CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules Those
233. expected the acquire fails and EC67 is logged The most likely causes of EC67 for the VEIB VIB are e The parameter settings are incorrect and the VEIB is therefore trying to digitize during a sync pulse e The video signal is not stable e g due to an intermittent connection e The double gain parameter and or the gain pot in the VEIB is not providing sufficient video amplitude for the VEIB to digitize consistently On Site Technician Correctable Video 1 Cause The number of passes for a VEIB connected to aN 8700 8500 IMAGER must be double that of a VEIB connected to an 8800 969 or 959 IMAGER Solution Change the video passes parameters per the help screen documentation 2 Cause This is a common setup problem when adjusting parameters with a VEIB Solution Refer to the installation procedure in the service manual Digital 1 Cause If this is a new setup the DEIB DIB parameters may be incorrect Solution Use a script file if available If that fails try different parameters Header Line mode is the most common Header mode 2 Cause If the IMAGER reply to the host s header information takes longer than the host is willing to wait host wait timing is out of spec the host will error out and stop sending data or will send the header data twice etc Solution Set MPC Setup IMS System Memory management to First fit This will soeed up the IMAGER reply after the header data but will result in slightly decreased me
234. g When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 3 Remove the electronics enclosure cover 4 1 4 Caution To avoid damage to sensitive electronic components always wear an anti static strap when handling PWAs or EPROMs NG open 103C Disconnect cables 9 6 Disconnect power wires 4 7 Remove screws 6 Figure 4 100 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 89 Service Manual 4 10 7 New Modem Board NMB A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 3 Remove the electronics enclosure cover 4 1 4 Caution To avoid damage to sensitive electronic components always wear an anti static strap when handling PWAs or EPROMs O O i 50 D gt 4 Disconnect cable s 6 Remove connector standoff screws 2 Figure 4 101 4 90 1202688 2001 March Rev L 2001 March Rev L Section
235. g between them and allows only one of these ports to be active at a time The modem module on the NMB is only approved for use in the U S and Canada For O U S applications the modem module is removed An external modem is connected from an approved medical isolation transformer refer to Figure 6 11 Removing the modem module makes the RJ11 input inoperative and allows either the external modem or the MPC to be connected to the RS232 input The two versions of the NMB one with and one without the modem module have different part numbers 6 20 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation New Modem Board Image Processor Board Figure 6 10 U S Canada a RJ 11 New Modem Board with Modem Chip DB9 Female O USS Medical Isolation Isolated Transformer RJ 11 DB9 Female External Modem New Modem Board without Modem Chip Input Power From Line Figure 6 11 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 21 Service Manual 6 3 3 7 RF Tag Subsystem The RF Tag Subsystem reads cartridge ID information from the RF tag inside the film cartridge and reports it to the MCS It can also write data onto the tag Each cartridge tag currently includes e A four byte tag ID e Five bytes of tag details such as the number of blocks on the tag and the number of bytes per block e Eight data blocks four bytes per block containing the same categories of information that are
236. gged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Specification PS902 must output 5 2 0 2 VDC for the VIB Special Tools Digital Voltmeter Measurement 1 Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 2 Remove the electronics enclosure cover 4 1 4 3 Connect a voltmeter to TP31 and TPGND2 in the lower right corner of the VIB Refer to Figure 3 11 If the voltage is out of specification perform the adjustment procedure VIB TP31 TPGND2 5 2V GND Figure 3 11 3 14 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 3 Adjustments Adjustment 1 Remove the rear panel 4 1 2 Loosen the two screws that secure the power module Slide the power module out of the imager Do not disconnect the power module cables Remove the power module cover Refer to Figure 3 12 Rotate potentiometer VR51 next to the terminal block on PS902 as required ar D 8700 154C Figure 3 12 2001 May Rev M 1202688 Service Manual 3 8 Multifeed Board MFB Actuator L gt Note This procedure should be performed only if the MFB or associated hardware has been replaced Special Tools Maintenance Personal Computer MPC MPC for Windows software package Measurement Connect the MPC to the MPC port on the rear of the IMAGER Power up the MPC and start the MPC for Windows program Open the Operations menu and select Diagnostics Click on the SCB button or open the
237. gh or low state It will float the lines when idle This is referred to as tri stating the signal This causes certain revisions of DEIB S to inconsistently interpret the data from Siemens Solution For new installations When one of the above mentioned modalities is included in your site plan specify that a DEIB T Kit 78 8079 0736 1 be shipped instead of the regular DEIB Kit For existing accounts If acquires are failing with EC59 or 68 perform the following checks Use an oscilloscope or meter to test for the presence and level of the strobe signals 7 40 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin If both pin 6 and pin 7 are low less than 2 volts in an idle state host not sending any data the host is tri stating the strobe signal DEIB or DIB Chip Non inverting Input Inverting Input Output If Siemens is tri stating the signal order a DEIB T 78 8079 0737 9 Order this part only if you are getting EC59 or EC68 and you know the modality is providing a tri stated output L gt Note On a stand alone IMAGER with a touch screen keypad you must select Best Fit to clear memory 2 Problem EC68 Cause If this is a new setup the DEIB DIB parameters may be incorrect Solution Use a script file if available If that fails try different parameters Header Line mode is the most common Header mode 3 Problem Acquires fail with EC67 68 or 59 Cause If the IMAGER s reply to the host s header
238. ground wire from the VEIB EVEIB to the OEM ground If the noise goes away there is a ground loop problem 2 26 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 2 5 9 2 Enter Rough Video Parameters L gt Note Load video parameters from a script file whenever possible refer to Step 6 of Procedure 2 5 4 If a script file is not available for the modality enter parameters manually This requires that an oscilloscope be used to measure some parameters other parameters are calculated based on these measurements Refer to the video parameter help screens in MPC for Windows 1 Select the EIB subsystem 2 Select the first VEIB VIB EVEIB user from the component select dropdown list box L gt Note If an EVEIB is being used verify that the Video Input parameter setting in the Video Parameters window is correct Also verify that the Passes parameter setting is correct The EVEIB digitizes incoming video slightly slower than the VEIB The VEIB would sometimes work with the number of passes set lower than the recommended setting but the EVEIB will not acquire if the setting is incorrect 3 Select the Config window display button Enter rough parameter settings then select the Save button L gt Note When the Save button is selected the video parameters are loaded into the VEIB VIB EVEIB If the save operation fails when using a VEIB EVEIB check the fiber optic cables use a flashlight the VEIB EVEIB power supply and input mod
239. gt REG IEN ZONE2 1320 SERIAL TCN1308 CN1307 GRN 17V CNN ZONE3 97 96 Q SOL oP ATTEN 2723 272571253725 CN720 1 1 CN1207 Mo l 24 724 15 THERMISTOR RESISTANCE at 21 27 C SENSOR N1 WHT 17V 72 4 ZONES 1 2 3 1060 10949 EACH Gees GEN i 1 PDB N 2722 BLK AGND att 7023 on CN1206 l i i y RED BPWR ROTATING PROCESSOR BOARD FLICKER BOARD 50 OPTICS 40 i Wi 2721 k EGNE 21 721 2 A EN i Ge l l 2720 ant 72 1 ELEC ENCLO COOLING FANS 4 2 5 V SE TRANSMIT DATA i l l M1001 M1002 M1003 i i l S THERMISTORS JP1 YELLOW ama H CN1014 GRN 44 ik Gik FiK GYOD LED2 VISUAL XMIT STATUS i L Tsg06 1 2 4 3 5 6 2 1 5 CN907 2 1 TS905 ng 11 4051 1058 1055 ra GAN 2 3 LED2 D2 IR FREQUENCY DATA TO SCB Le i BEAM POWER MONITOR BOARD 2924 12 1052 1054 1056 Se ab Ge Ge a O ROE CORO A i ut 2 A 6 5 17 24 VOLT 5 2 VOLT 2 SC ZB MAX LED I 7 9 O17 0 BLU l CN1004 l Va Y Y Y LY SUPPLIES SUPPLY 3 932 au RS PA Y 15D Na H CN1013 CN1401 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 PS901 PS902 IE mat KE 6 6 il l CN1001 CN1003 ICN1009Y CN1011 L U10 e 1 1 2 15D 50D 9D NC POWER TS904 A ul NOE CN1005 ee Auge MODULE Ts903 3 2 1 SRi NEUTRAL 5VCC HEA i 15D V 2319 CN301 Ng HOME D ASSEMBLY 931 SR2 ACI F1 1 4 AMP lt TPA D11 4 GRN 2320 2
240. gure 5 9 5 10 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 5 Additional Information D Cleaning the Aluminum Foil and Cooling Tray 1 Wearing protective gloves use a cleaning pad moistened in Troubleshooter to clean the surface of the aluminum foil inside the processor Figure 5 10 2 Wipe the cleaned surfaces of the aluminum foil with isopropyl alcohol to remove any residual Troubleshooter Caution The cooling tray is factory polished Do not mar the smooth finish 3 Use isopropyl alcohol to wipe down the cooling tray If a heavy buildup of FAZ is present remove the tray four screws and clean it with Troubleshooter Then wipe it with alcohol 4 Vacuum out the interior of the processor as necessary 5 Replace the cooling tray if it was removed Aluminum Foil Cooling Tra y 8700 401C Figure 5 10 2001 May Rev M 1202688 5 11 Service Manual E Cleaning the Drum L gt Note The drum and rollers must be warm to hot when you apply Troubleshooter to them 1 Before cleaning the drum spread out the processor rollers and the stripper parts on the bottom of the sink or empty cartridge Then spray them with Troubleshooter until they are entirely covered with the cleaner about 1 3 to 1 2 half of the can Allow them to soak for at least 5 minutes while you are cleaning the drum 2 Place the drum seated on its stand in the sink or empty cartridge and place a static shielding bag over the electronic compone
241. harcoal filter if the cycle count since the last filter replacement is greater than 7 500 gt Note After you replace the charcoal filter if the cycle count is less than 10 000 you must reset the counter via MPC SETUP SCB CONFIG FILTER COUNT 8 Replace the power module filter 9 Clean the electronic enclosure filter 10 Clean the grease filter in the backpack Figure 5 7 and reverse the filter s orientation sides when reinstalling it 11 Record the PM in the Service History Log pl Hi Sc 0 5 6 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 5 Additional Information 5 5 5 30 000 Cycle or Yearly Checklist 1 Perform steps 1 through 8 of the 10 000 cycle checklist During processor cleaning Replace the felt air barrier with a new one procedure 5 5 6 1 2 Replace the electronic enclosure filter Replace the grease filter in the backpack Figure 5 7 4 Record the PM in the Service History Log Felt Air Barrier 8700 188A Grease Filter is in Inside Cover of Backpack Figure 5 7 2001 May Rev M 1202688 5 7 Service Manual 5 5 6 Cleaning the Processor Maintenance Interval Every 10 000 prints Cleaning Supplies Required e Soft Lint free Cleaning Pads Cloths and Paper Towels e 3M Troubleshooter Cleaner e 3M Stainless Steel Cleaner e Dow Corning Silicone Oil e Static Shielding Bag an
242. he 16 MP version has an 8 bit pixel width the 32 MP version is available with an 8 bit or a 12 bit pixel width The MDB is built with 4 banks of memory Each bank consists of thirteen DRAMs in a ZIP package Each bank has an 11 bit address bus 13 bit data input bus 13 bit data output bus and 3 bits of control The memory is organized for 12 bit image pixels having 1 bit of parity A fully configured board provides for a 12 bit data path and has 52 DRAMs The memory banks can be depopulated for an 8 bit image plus 1 bit parity configuration The four least significant bits 0 3 are depopulated A depopulated board provides for an 8 bit data path and has 36 DRAMs The address for each memory bank is provided through one of two address multiplexers which also double as the address drivers One multiplexer drives banks 0 and 1 and the other drives banks 2 and 3 They take the lower 22 bits of the input address and convert these to row and column addresses to the DRAM A single control signal from the IPB switches the multiplexers between the two DRAM addresses The presence or absence of a pull down resistor at the IPB connector is used to indicate to the IPB whether a MDB is an 8 or 12 bit version The IPB masks the four least significant bits for an 8 bit MDB A pin is grounded at the IPB connector to indicate to the IPB whether a MDB is installed at that connector location Another pin is grounded at the IPB connector to indicate to the IPB whether
243. he 95 100 patch in the SMPTE should now be visible 2 Adjust the black Turn the brightness knob until the image starts to fill in Continue until the black in the image starts to turn grey At this point the 5 0 patch should be visible Back off the brightness until there is an equal balance in the visual ratio of 096 to 5 as 100 to 95 These two patches are the key 2 34 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 3 Adjustments Section 3 Adjustments 3 1 Processor Temperature Specification There are three temperature zones in the processor Viewed from the front of the machine Zone 1 is at the left end Zone 2 is in the center and Zone 3 is at the right end The temperature measured in all three zones must be in the range of 122 2 122 8 C 252 253 F L gt Note This procedure should be performed whenever the processor assembly processor drum rotating processor board RPB processor communication board PCB or system controller board SCB is replaced or if drum temperatures are suspected of causing image quality problems Special Tools Temperature meter with probe and block Maintenance Personal Computer MPC MPC for Windows software package L gt Note A probe with a bar type element must be used to perform this procedure Probes with circular type elements will not provide accurate readings The temperature meter and probe must be calibrated together as a pair at least once per year If the
244. he Bad Clock Delay button in the Video Fine Tuning window Select the OK button when the Successful Acquire and Successful Print messages are displayed 11 The image is acquired using each of 16 different coarse clock delay settings The 16 images are printed on one sheet of film The coarse delay setting is printed above each image Identify any images that exhibit vertical line pixel shifting Ignore any other image problems at this time 12 In the Bad Clock Delays window select those images identified in the previous step then select the OK button 13 Select the Fine Pixel Clock Delay button in the Video Fine Tuning window Select the OK button when the Successful Acquire and Successful Print messages are displayed 14 The image is acquired and printed using 16 different combinations of fine pixel and clock delays The 16 images are printed in a 4 1 format on 4 sheets of film The clock delay and fine pixel delay are printed above each image Identify the single best image then proceed to Step 18 L gt Note Performs Steps 15 through 17 if a single best image cannot be identified when the images are printed in 4 1 format 15 Select the Print 1 Up button in the Video Fine Tuning window 16 Select an image to print in the Video Fine Tuning Print Full Size window image numbers are printed above each image on the 4 1 prints then select the OK button Select the OK button when the Successful Print message is displayed Examine
245. he Save button 10 Select the System window display button Modify the parameter settings as needed then select the Save button 11 If the system includes a second user select the second user from the component select dropdown list box Repeat Steps 6 through 10 12 After all the IMS parameters have been loaded power cycle the IMAGER 2 24 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 2 5 5 Load SCB Parameters 1 Select the SCB subsystem 2 Select the Config window display button Modify the parameter settings as needed then select the Save button 2 5 6 Load AIQC Parameters 1 Select the AIQC subsystem 2 Select the Config window display button Select the Display Defaults button Modify the parameter settings as needed then select the Save button 2 5 7 Load Keypad Parameters 1 Select the Keypad KPD subsystem 2 Select the first keypad from the component select dropdown list box 3 Select the Config window display button Modify the parameter settings as needed then select the Save button L gt Note The following step applies to touch screen keypads only 4 If custom formats are to be loaded for this keypad select the Load window display button Select the format the letter designations correspond to the labels displayed on the keypad s custom format buttons Specify the custom format file name and location in the Load Keypad Custom Format window then select the OK button 5 Repeat
246. he drum assembly side to side and verify that the slip rings and brushes remain in full contact Readjust as necessary 3 1 mm min 2 3 mm min l Brushes Centered Front to Back Alignment Slip Rings F Brush Assembly Brushes Centered Side to Side 8700 97C Alignment Figure 3 17 Brush to Slip Ring Alignment 2001 May Rev M 1202688 3 21 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 3 22 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl Section 4 Disassembly Reassembly 4 1 Covers and Panels 4 1 1 Front Panel Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove bracket 3 screws Lift front panel up and away from frame 8700 68C Figure 4 1 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 1 Service Manual 4 1 2 Rear Panel Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER 4 Grasp the handle on the front of the processor exit assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Locate
247. heck the Beam Power Monitor Board and ensure that no dust or debris is locking the beam 7 114 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 81 EC635 Dpatch slow Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm 635 MIDTONE SLOW Summary EC635 Midtone slow The Dpatch density is outside of control limits Sequence of Events The first Dpatch after a calibrate sheet is targeted to be 1 3 However the actual density of the first Dpatch after the calibrate sheet is read and its value becomes the target Example First Dpatch after a cal sheet is 1 1 1 1 now becomes the target Dpatch density On Site Technician Correctable Look in the MPC Log Printer Log Dpatch and retrieve the Dpatch log The readings should be consistent gt Note Density test and contrast test Dpatches are not logged zech Cause Some of the densitometers have a bent mounting bracket that causes the timing of the Dpatch reading to be off Solution Readjust the bracket to 90 degrees Problem 8800 only Actual Dpatches are not normal 1 0 to 1 4 but Printer Log Dpatch shows very low densities 45 tp 70 Cause Dmax is set to 3 2 Solution Set to 3 1 Software update 4 2 will fix this problem D O Cause Dpatch is not 7 or 1mm from the top edge of the film Solution Check the registration of the film in the optics platen If the film is being positioned correctly adjust the position
248. hes Press the key to free it up respond is stuck down Need to access the keypad Press the PRINT ERASE and service screen the SEQUENTIAL ACQUIRE large bottom key keys simultaneously Keypad says Not This is normal if you are in the Select the IMS button The TDB communicating with laser while EIB screen and have attempted will reset and about ten seconds you are connected with MPC an acquire or attempted the later the keypad should Gain black level procedure communicate 7 8 3 Local Panel of 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER Problem Description Problem Isolation Procedure Parameter settings on the 8800 The SET button must be pressed local panel do not take effect after making changes to the parameter settings Also the correct USER must be selected The 8800 local panel does not The service switch inside the Throw the switch to the LOCAL respond front panel set to MPC Keypad position 7 126 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 9 MPC Trouble Analysis Problem Description Problem Isolation Procedure Cannot connect with the MPC Gain Black Level Adjustment 1 Video Gain Black Level RETRIEVE image procedure takes longer than normal one to two minutes for a 512 x 512 image 2 The Gain Black level numbers 0 and 512 do not change or do not appear to be working correctly 1 8800 Set the service switch to the MPC position MPC baud rate and IMAGER or 8800 baud rate do n
249. hes are normal 1 0 to 1 4 but the Printer Log Dpatch shows very low densities 45 to 70 Cause Dmax is set to 3 2 Solution Set Dmax to 3 1 Software update 4 2 will fix this problem Problem Cause Dpatch is not 7 1mm from the top edge of the film Solution Check the registration of the film in the optics platen If the film is being positioned correctly adjust the position of the Dpatch by adjusting the optics module offset Refer to the optics offset adjustment in the Service Manual Compare MPC Log Printer Log Dpatch recorded densites to an external densitometer measurement of Dpatch There may be some differences between IMAGER and external densitometer readings light source is a different wavelength but the differences should remain proportional If the IMAGER Dpatch readings in MPC are invalid check the densitometer 7 116 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 83 EC910 Printer Malfunction Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Message Printer malfunction P910 The laser imager is ALM 60 not communicating Summary EC 8700 8500 System Symptom 1 IPB is not communicating to SCB keypads or MPC Symptom 2 IPB is communicating to keypads and MPC but is not communicating to SCB 8800 System 8800 to 8700 8500 Troubleshooting 8800 to 8700 8500 Schematic SCB RX Data LED Troubleshooting EC910 Overview e lf the SCB has not received a command from the IPB
250. ht to disengage connectors Figure 4 98 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 87 Service Manual 4 10 5 System Controller Board SCB 1 2 3 Connect the MPC to the MPC port on the rear of the IMAGER Power up the MPC and start the MPC for Windows program Do either of the following to select the SCB subsystem e Click on the SCB button e Open the Operations menu and select Subsystem SCB Select the Config button to display the IMAGER Imager Setup window Note the Total Prints count and the Maximum Pickup Retries and Language settings A Warning 6 7 8 When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 Remove the electronics enclosure cover 4 1 4 Caution To avoid damage to sensitive electronic components always wear an anti static strap when handling PWAs or EPROMs NG open 8700 103C Disconnect cables 11 On Remove screws 9 Figure 4 99 gt Note 4 88 After a new SCB has been installed set the IMAGER Imager Setup parameters to the values noted in Step 5 and perform the processor temperature adjustment procedure 3 1 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 10 6 Machine Interface Board MIB A Warnin
251. ic converter compact Keypad 2 18 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 2 4 3 VEIB Pixel Clock Source Two jumpers in the VEIB specify the pixel clock source The clock may be external provided by the source modality or internal generated by a Phase Lock Loop module installed in the VEIB The jumpers are factory set and should not need to be changed unless a PLL module is added or removed Refer to Figure 2 31 VEIB Main PWA PS Internal Clock External Clock Figure 2 31 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 19 Service Manual 2 4 4 VIB Pixel Clock Source Two jumpers on the VIB specify the pixel clock source For an internal clock generated by a Phase Lock Loop module installed on the VIB set the jumpers to E1 E2 and E4 E5 For an external clock provided by the source modality set the jumpers to E2 E3 and E5 E6 The jumpers are factory set and should not need to be changed unless a PLL module is added or removed Refer to Figure 2 32 Continuous Acquire Mode When a jumper is connecting pins E7 and E8 the VIB operates in continuous acquire mode This may be useful when attempting to examine the source video signal However for normal operation the two pins must not be connected place the jumper block on a single pin this is the factory setting Figure 2 32 2 20 1202688 2001 March Rev L
252. ice Manual Item No OO OO NB ON 8 50 Part Number Not Available 96 0000 3347 0 78 8094 5536 9 26 1007 4493 2 78 8094 5524 5 26 1003 7500 0 26 1008 5460 8 78 8094 5485 9 Figure 8 13 Exposure Module Assembly Description EXPOSURE MODULE ASSEMBLY OPTICS MODULE PLATEN ASSEMBLY See Figure 8 14 SCREW Cap Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 0 Hex Socket 6 V CLAMP Optics SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M6 X 1 0 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 1 WASHER Metric Lock M6 0 External Tooth 1 CABLE ASSEMBLY 701 Platen Ground 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 14 Platen Assembly Geen CB 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 51 Service Manual Figure 8 14 Platen Assembly Item No Part Number Description Qty OA 78 8094 5536 9 PLATEN ASSEMBLY 8700 1 OB 78 8092 5490 3 PLATEN ASSEMBLY 8500 1 1 78 8094 5129 3 990 SWITCH ASSEMBLY 0 0 eens 1 2 26 1011 6389 2 NUT Mach Lock 8 32 8 3 78 8094 5271 3 SPRING Alignment Arm EE 4 4 78 8095 9367 2 SPRING Kicker 1 5 78 80
253. ilmed On Site Technician Correctable Jam at Drum Stripper Interface Jam Position Film is found jammed right at the interface between the drum and stripper Film Description Leading edge of film clear d min line has a bent or severely damaged corner This results when one corner of the leading edge of the film gets caught behind the stripper or between the drum and stripper The total length of the film gets crunched accordion style Cause 1 Film is too aggressively adhering to the drum 2 Larger than 7 Mil stripper gap as measured at the corners Solution Properly adjust stripper gap to 007 001 using procedure in service manual L gt Note Stripper Adjustment e As film is fed through the processor the drum expands slightly over time due to absorption of chemicals from the film This expansion is only in the film path while the stripper adjusts ride on a part of the drum that does not expand Because of this the gap should be checked and adjusted if necessary at every service call e The stripper may not be perfectly straight It is acceptable to have stripper that is closer to the drum at the ends than at the center The ends are to be 007 001 The stripper should always bow away from the drum in the center and not towards the center of the drum If the film corners strip the rest of the film will follow Replace any stripper that is closer to the drum in the center than on the edges 7
254. in the chute 2 Reseat the cables to the optics module SCB and MIB 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 103 Service Manual 7 6 70 EC604 Invalid laser dynamic range Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Error Log OM X IM 952 Host alarm Message Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L604 ALM 60 P604 X is not operational INVALID LASER DYN RANGE Summary If the Laser Dynamic Range is outside of the 200 to 4000 range EC604 Invalid Laser Dynamic Range is declared The machine must be power cycled to clear the error Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable 1 Cause Optics module is bad Solution Replace the optics Make the following checks first a Check the Beam Power Monitor aperture for dust or debris in the chute b Reseat the cables to the optics module SCB and MIB c If the problem remains replace the optics module 2 Cause The control cable between SCB and optics has a loose fitting connection at the firewall due to the cable securing screws bottoming out before the cables are fully seated Solution First check the control cable to see if the cable is loose and the securing screws are bottomed out Then shim the screws and sockets as needed to tighten up the two cables 7 104 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 71 EC605 Attenuator test failed Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm P605 K202 Laser imag
255. ing edge of film first 4 inches of film and especially leading edge corners are undamaged The remaining 13 inches of trailing edge are severely wrinkled accordion style 1 Cause Hump in the cooling section felt or failure of the felt to lie flat This causes the leading edge of the film to dig into the felt and jam at the cooling section Solution Verify the cooling section felt pad is flat and smooth Try to smooth as required 2 Cause Processor motor shorted MIB drive board Refer to 3 5 MIB for driver locations Wiring harness is rubbing on frame and shorted to ground Solution Repair wiring harness Replace MIB 3 Cause Motor stopped because of shorted driver on MIB Wiring harness rubbing on frame and shorted to ground Solution Repair wiring harness Replace MIB 4 Cause Developer housing not properly closing This causes the idler rollers to not fully contact the drum Solution e Ensure that the clam shell rests on the top of the end bearings and still latches If there is a gap there the roller springs are compressed to their fullest inhibiting roller rotation Or there is interference somewhere else that prevents full contact of the processor rollers e Instruct the user to make sure that the clam shell is latched securely after they have opened it They should push firmly after the clam shell latches e Lubricate the idle rollers with Krytox lubricant 26 1012 1130 3 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 93 S
256. ings e E ring spare 78 8656 4001 1 For processor prop rod Additional Supplies Required for 10 000 Cycle PMs not included in Kit e Krytox Lubricant 26 1012 1130 3 e 3M Stainless Steel Cleaner and Polish 1 can 96 0000 0064 4 e Isopropyl Alcohol 108261 e Insulated Rubber Gloves 5303TL These must be worn for any cleaning procedure that requires cleaners solvents e Transport Film 1546993 For cleaning excess conditioner from drum after cleaning procedures e Lint free Cloths TEXWIPEs 1C8271 e Paper Towels 26 1005 2874 9 Additional Parts Required for 30 000 Cycle PMs e Felt Air Barrier 1 96 0000 0939 7 e Electronic Enclosure Filter 1 78 8094 5979 1 e Metal Grease Filter 1 26 1011 6788 5 e Felt Plate Assembly Kit 74 0401 8989 1 Required only for one time update of felt plate assmebly to new configuration Included as part of Mod 22 5 4 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 5 Additional Information 5 5 3 EM Call Checklist If the number of cycles since the last PM is greater than 7 500 use the 10 000 Cycle Checklist see next paragraph rather than this EM Call checklist If less than 7500 1 Power off open the processor cover reference procedure 4 2 1 and check the drum for damage Do not remove it for inspection If the drum is damaged replace it Perform step 2 below before installing the new drum Caution Wear rubber gloves for any cleaning procedure th
257. is not working between the SCB of the 8700 8500 IMAGER and the 8800 the 8800 never receives the error e Check or change the MPC Output module Comm 1 config and comm setups as follows a First set the Config to 8700 8500 printer and save it b Then set the Comm parameters to default via the PRINTER button and save c The laser must be power cycled for any changes to take effect L gt Note Communication parameters between 8800 and 8700 8500 IMAGER are 19200 7 e 1 EOM None Protocol Packet Char pacing 0 e f reconfiguring the Output Module does not fix the problem refer to the following schematic diagram Schematic 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER to 8700 8500 IMAGER 4 Rx LED DS10B1 8700 flashes on 8800 System Controller 5 Tx LED DS10B2 3 DPRI Rx LED 2 LFIB Tx LED flashes on flashes on flashes on SCB Dual Local Output ee Printer Fiber Module 1 SE NOD Remote Interface Cortana Les Interface Board transmits HIB LFIB SA status le request to L E Ce RRE SCB every 2 DPRI Ix Rx 1 seconds LED state state Use the LED s to determine where the communication is failing Use the
258. k Motor M601 other side Transport Motor M402 Platen Motor M403 1202688 Figure 7 5 Processor Motor M301 Exit Motor M303 Pickup Motor M501 8700 327A 7 7 Service Manual 7 3 2 Motor Troubleshooting MPC Diag SCB Motors will enable each of the motors for 10 seconds e The motor enable signals from the SCB to the MIB can be monitored at the service port between the SCB and MIB The motor enable signals are high when the motor is enabled e The MIB outputs a 24 volt 50 duty cycle signal to the motor Refer to Figure 7 6 The signal can be viewed at the MIB test points AN E E EC o fo be Le Le 24V TT OV Signal with Motor Disconnected 8700 330A Figure 7 6 7 8 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 3 3 Solenoid Locations Refer to Figure 7 7 for solenoid locations in the IMAGER 2001 May Rev M Feed Solenoid Y402 Tongue Depression Solenoid Y401 Transport Gate Solenoid Y403 Platen Top Solenoid Y701 Platen Align Solenoids 4 Y702 5 Y705 1202688 KE Rai Figure 7 7 Cartridge Door Solenoid Y801 Vacuum Valve Solenoid Y501 Left Side Door Solenoid Y802 Platen Kicker Solenoid Y706 8700 326A 7 9 Service Man
259. ker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Loosen Remove O Ma A Disconnect Remove 4 8700 155C Figure 4 92 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 81 Service Manual 4 9 10 5 17 17 and 24 VDC Power Supply PS901 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the power module 4 9 1 L gt Note When reassembling check the labels on the wires to ensure that they are connected to the correct terminals The terminal numbers are marked on the power supply Disconnect 3 8 Disconnect 3 8700 149A Figure 4 93 4 82 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 9 11 5 2 VDC Power Supply PS902 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the power module 4 9 1 gt Note When reassembling check the labels on the wires to ensure that they are connected to the correct terminals The terminal numbers are marked on the power supply Disconnect 5 Remove 2
260. kup errors Solution Refer to the appropriate EC QuickSheet for the jamming problem 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 31 Service Manual 7 6 4 EC59 IPB unable to load parameters to EIB or IB Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IMX 952 Host alarm None EC59 Acquire failed L59 EIB Par Write Error or ALM 39 L59 ACQERR EIB 0 Or 1 ALM 65 Summary EIB Parameter Write Error the IPB could not load parameters into the EIB ACQERR EIB EOT End of Transmission was not received from the host during the acquire Sequence of Events Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the EIB and IMAGER On Site Technician Correctable EC59 EIB Parameter Write Error Check that the MPC is configured for the correct EIB or IB EC59 ACQERR EIB 1 Problem EC 59 with Siemens Cause Some Siemens camera boards the newer version do not keep their STROBE signal levels at a high or low state It will float the lines when idle This is referred to as tri stating the signal This causes certain revisions of DEIBs to inconsistently interpret the data from Siemens Solution For new installations When one of the above mentioned modalities is included in your site plan specify that a Modified DEIB Kit 78 8079 0736 1 be shipped instead of the regular DEIB Kit For existing accounts If acquires are failing with EC59 or 68 perform the following checks Use an oscilloscope or meter to test for the presence and level of th
261. l densitometer readings light source is a different wavelength but the differences should remain proportional across the steps If the IMAGER densitometer readings in MPC are invalid check the densitometer 2 Check the processor temperatures e f processor temperatures are incorrect adjust them using MPC Refer to the service manual adjustment e f the temperatures look OK check the Beam Power Monitor board and ensure that no dust or debris is blocking the beam 7 112 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 79 EC633 System near calibration limits film almost fast Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm System is operating None L633 FILM_ALMOST_FAST None near calibration limits P633 Summary Film Almost The film speed is between 3 3 and 3 4 This may be a normal condition Fast caused by film variability but may also be caused by other factors Note Film speed can be viewed in MPC AIQC DIogE Phone Fix Operator Correctable Try another cartridge or another lot of film On Site Technician Correctable 1 Compare MPC AIQC DIogE densities to an external densitometer measuring the same calibrate sheet There may be some differences between IMAGER and external densitometer readings light source is a different wavelength but the differences should remain proportional across the steps If the IMAGER densitometer readings in MPC are invalid check the
262. lay Solid State Relay SSR which turns on the vacuum pump M501 Pickup Motor Drives the pickup arm M502 Vacuum Pump Motor Provides vacuum for suction cups SE oe SES SES 6 2 6 Rollback Assembly The Rollback Assembly is located in the middle of the system under the Pickup Assembly It is responsible for opening and closing the film cartridge and reading the RF tag data on the bottom of the cartridge The Rollback Assembly contains the following electrical components M601 Rollback Motor Drives the roller which opens and closes the cartridge SW601 Rollback Motor Home Senses that the roller is in the home position Sensor SW603 Cartridge Open Sensor Senses that the cartridge is open SW604 Cartridge Sensor Senses that the cartridge is present RF Antenna Board Transmits to and receives RF energy from the RF tag RF Tag Subsystem Includes Reads the data on the RF tag on the bottom of the the following components cartridge Also has the ability to write to the RF Tag RF Tag Interface Board Contains a micro which receives commands from the SCB processes the commands and sends them to the RF Reader Board see paragraph 6 3 3 7 for details RF Reader Board Receives commands from the RF Tag Interface Board Processes the commands for transmission of data to the RF Antenna Receives RF data from the antenna and routes it to the RF Tag Interface Board 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 5 Service Manual 6 2 7 Exposure Asse
263. left edge of the sensor actuator must line up with the left edge of the sensor Adjustment Rotate the actuator counterclockwise as required to line up the left edges of the sensor and actuator The actuator can be rotated a full 360 the spring will slip on the shaft See Figure 3 7 O Actuator kam Sensor Figure 3 7 2001 May Rev M 1202688 3 9 Service Manual 3 6 Local Panel Display Contrast and Buzzer Volume A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Raise the top cover of the IMAGER 2 Locate the potentiometer access holes in the local panel housing Turn the contrast potentiometer clockwise to darken the display counterclockwise to lighten the display 4 Turn the volume potentiometer clockwise to increase the buzzer volume counterclockwise to decrease the volume Volume TH O kp Figure 3 8 3 10 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 3 Adjustments 3 7 Power Supply Voltages 3 7 1 5 17 17 and 24 VDC Power Supply PS901 A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Specification PS901 must output the following DC voltages 5 1 0 1 VDC 17 3 0 3 VDC 17 8 0 3 VDC 24 3 0 5 VDC Special Tools Digital Voltmeter Measurement 1 R
264. les the film pickup assembly Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable Use the sensor test screen of MPC to check out the pickup middle sensor and the other sensors related to film pickup It is possible that vibration of the pickup assembly during cycling can cause intermittent operation of the sensors 7 74 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 43 EC223 Film present sensor failed Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message CI Input Log W Output Log Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L223 CARTRIDGE FILM SENSOR FAIL ALM 60 P223 X is not operational Summary The film out sensor SW502 has failed to operate during the pickup cycle run during powerup diagnostics Sequence of Events This error code can occur only during the powerup diagnostic that cycles the film pickup assembly Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable Use the sensor test screen of MPC to check out the film out sensor and the other sensors related to film pickup It is possible that vibration of the pickup assembly during cycling can cause intermittent operation of the sensors 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 75 Service Manual 7 6 44 EC224 Pickup motor failed Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message Input Log W Output Log Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager L224 CARTRID
265. less than 0 5 volts this could have several causes double or triple termination bad cables bad video etc e The video signal amplitude may be okay but the signal may be bad e One or more of the following parameters may be set incorrectly Double Gain Black Level and or Source 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 29 Service Manual 11 Try acquiring be sure the Sync Enable and Acquire LEDs are all on e f successful proceed to Step 12 e f unsuccessful try acquiring two or three more times If still unsuccessful reset the IMAGER and the MPC and try two or three more times If still unsuccessful double check Steps 1 through 10 12 Adjust the following framing parameters to obtain the full frame rough draft only this will be done again during fine tuning e Vertical Delay and Image Lines e Horizontal Delay and Horiz Active Pixels 13 Perform video fine tuning 2 5 9 3 Fine Tune Video Parameters L gt Note When printing images from MPC the images are replicated Replicate reproduces the image from the host exactly without any smoothing This is done so that any blurring or ghosting will be evident and not disguised by processing the image When printing images from the keypad the selected interpolation value smooth to sharp is used to process the image This may make the image look better but may also hide other problems Therefore it is best to print from MPC when performing fine tuning 1 Display a SMPTE pa
266. lip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left door via its mechanical release 4 Open the platen access door see Figure 5 13 H Platen Access Door ke 8700 189A Figure 5 13 Caution The bottom anti reflective surface of the platen is easily damaged by fingernails and jewelry Prior to cleaning the platen remove any jewelry rings bracelets watches etc which may accidentally come in contact with the bottom surface of the platen If the 3M Auto Pak cloth catches on parts inside the platen take care not to damage the parts when removing the cloth Check for and remove any torn pieces of cloth 5 If the Print Log indicated inconsistencies in beam power or attenuator readings use compressed air to blow away foreign material from the beam power monitor access hole see Figure 5 14 6 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the transport out fully 2001 May Rev M 1202688 5 17 Service Manual 7 Reach through the opening in the back of the platen from the inside and clean the back outside of the platen see Figure 5 14 8 Use an Auto Pak cloth to wipe clean the bottom surface of the platen L gt Note The 3M Auto Pak cloth will not remove large particles Use a flashlight to locate and fingers to remove large particles 9 When finished cleaning the platen close and latch the platen access door Clean These
267. ls are set correctly the 95 and 5 patches on the film will be equally visible If a SMPTE pattern is not available use a customer image and check the grey scale steps Again using the lowest available contrast setting inspect the film for visual distinction of the first two and last two steps of the grey scale Note A low contrast setting produces low contrast in the middle of the scale and high contrast at the ends of the scale Step 2 should not blend into step 1 and step 15 should not blend into step 16 If the OEM monitor is adjusted properly refer to Procedure 2 5 9 5 its grey scale can be used for comparison purposes If the VEIB VIB EVEIB is set up CORRECTLY What is normally seen using a contrast test is that the contrast test 1 Dmax 0 square is lighter than a dark border and Dmin 100 square is equal to or slightly darker than a clear border It is not until later contrast tests that image Dmax and Dmin equal film Dmax and Dmin This is acceptable gives good quality images and results in the 95 and 5 patches on a SMPTE test film being equally visible If desired the image Dmax can be forced to match the border Dmax there are two ways to accomplish this e Inthe Image Parameters window set the Match Border parameter to Yes 2 32 1202688 2001 March Rev L 27 28 29 Section 2 Installation e Increase the Black Level value by one or two digits This will darken up the image Dmax and will also darke
268. lugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the power module 4 9 1 gt Note When reassembling check the labels on the wires to ensure that they are connected to the correct terminals The terminal numbers are marked on the line filter Disconnect 3 Remove 2 8700 157C Figure 4 90 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 79 Service Manual 4 9 8 Power Latch Relay K901 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the power module 4 9 1 L gt Note When reassembling check the labels on the wires to ensure that they are connected to the correct terminals The terminal numbers are marked on the relay Remove 2 a 0 Disconnect 6 L Na G A ne Figure 4 91 8700 152C 4 80 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 9 9 Cooling Fan Motor M901 A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit brea
269. mbly The Exposure Assembly is located in the lower portion of the system over the Power Module Assembly It consists of the Laser Optics System LOS and the Platen Assembly The Platen Assembly positions the film for exposure The Platen Assembly contains the following electrical components Helerence Description Designation p SW701 Platen Bottom Sensor Senses that the film is at the bottom of the platen SW703 Platen Door Interlock Sensor Senses that the platen door is closed 6 2 8 Frame Assembly The Frame Assembly is the skeleton of the system It supports all of the rest of the assemblies There are components on it which are not part of any other assembly The Frame Assembly contains the following electrical components Designation SW803 Left Door Machine Interlock Machine interlock that senses that the left door is open SW804 Left Door Laser Interlock Laser interlock that senses that the left door is open SW805 Power Switch Used to latch power relay in the Power Module Assembly SW806 Supply Door Interlock Machine interlock that senses that the supply door is open Y801 Supply Door Solenoid Unlocks the supply door Y802 Left Door Solenoid Unlocks the left door 6 6 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 2 9 Power Module Assembly The Power Module Assembly PMA provides power for the system and is located at the bottom of the system It contains an isolation transformer which steps dow
270. mbly Reassembl 4 4 9 Vacuum Solenoid Y501 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the pickup module 4 4 1 Disconnect 2 6 Remove 2 Disconnect 8700 128C Figure 4 51 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 43 Service Manual 4 5 Rollback Assembly 4 5 1 Rollback Module Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove the front panel 4 1 1 and open the left side door Loosen two screws and disconnect connector Loosen two screws attaching end of module Remove two screws attaching large connector BU Sh Ee D Disconnect Distribution Board cable from clip to provide cable slack Ka Disconnect Remove cable from clip Loosen 2 Loosen 2 8700 66C Figure 4 52 L gt Note In Figure 4 53 the front edge of the rollback module is raised up to provide a better view of the cable connection and the Distribution Board 8 Disconnect the large cable plug 9 Remove two screws attaching the Distribution Board plug
271. me 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 7 Service Manual Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 2 of 12 Partial Frame 8 8 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 3 of 12 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 9 Service Manual Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 4 of 12 10 82 i N GROUND 67 KR 70 lt kz 67 i M Mol J GN8o9 a 1 Fe l H a SW804 70 git ll pa Te CN301 CN60 a 6 KR 4 CN51 ia SW802 81 gt SC E K801 SW806 CN501 xy o CN806 NG NG O CN807 fi CN802 7 f gi ab O y NG H CN1403 IT CN1402 Sty CN1014 Fe ee CN903 NG a GO CN1009 K To 2 lt _CN1010 Nag CN1005 DD CN1001 ai 83 CN1002 8 10 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 5 of 12 CN701 CN703 CN704 EN LT N KI Pi A S Al i gt si Ground to Power Mod CN702 CN1011 Partial Frame CN1007 CN1006 CN1004 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 11 Service Manual Figure 8 2 Machine Assembly Screen 6 of 12 Partial CN310 Parti
272. ments 3 11 Processor Drum Brushes This procedure must be performed every PM and when indicated by troubleshooting Specification Brush surfaces must completely contact slip ring surfaces Minimum height of ground brush must be 3 1 mm Minimum height of other brushes must be 2 3 mm Measurement 1 Remove power and unplug the power cord A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER Grasp the handle of the processor exit assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position 3 Check the side to side and front to back alignment of the brushes with respect to the slip rings The alignment must be as shown in Figure 3 17 and there must be no sign of arcing burns Arcing will interrupt power to the RPB If necessary adjust as instructed below 4 Remove the processor drum see procedure 4 2 1 and check the height of the brushes If they are below the minimum heights shown in Figure 3 17 replace the brush assembly see procedure 4 2 4 Adjustment L gt Note The brush assembly is mounted with two screws and is longer on one side If installed incorrectly the brushes will touch the slip ring on only one corner 1 Loosen two screws and adjust the brush assembly side to side so the brush surfaces completely contact the slip ring surfaces Then tighten the two screws 2 Slide t
273. mer has shut down the SCB Sequence of Events The interlock switches in the IMAGER are pulsed both high and low every 1 second for safety reasons The following chart explains the reasoning SCB Sends to Switch SCB Interpretation of Interlock State Hi Door closed Low Door open Low HI Short Low Undefined On Site Technician Correctable Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis 7 70 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 39 EC206 Left side door interlock failed Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is not L206 ALM 60 P206 operational LEFT INTERLOCK FAIL Summary The left side door interlock has failed and the SCB watchdog timer has shut down the SCB Sequence of Events The interlock switches in the IMAGER are pulsed both high and low every 1 second for safety reasons The following chart explains the reasoning SCB Sends to Switch SCB Interpretation of Interlock State Hi Door closed Low Door open Low HI Short Low Undefined On Site Technician Correctable Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 71 Service Manual 7 6 40 EC208 Left side door could not be opened Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm The left door has failed to None L208 LEFT DOOR FAIL None open P208 On Site Technici
274. meter then press F1 The MPC for Windows Help file will open and display the topic associated with the highlighted parameter 2 5 3 Set the System Clock 1 Select Clock from the Utilities menu 2 Enter the date and time in the Clock window then select the OK button 2 5 4 Load IMS Parameters 1 Select the IMS subsystem 2 Select Output 0 Comm 0 from the component select dropdown list box to the right of the subsystem buttons 3 Select the Comm window display button 4 Select the Printer Defaults button then select the Save button 5 Select the first user from the component select dropdown list box gt Note Users are identified by slot comm e g Input 1 Comm 0 or modality name depending on the User Display setting in the Preferences window 6 If a script file is available for this user select the Script window display button Specify the script file name and location in the Select Script File window then select the OK button If a script file is not available or the script file settings need to be modified proceed to the next step 7 Select the Comm window display button Select the appropriate Defaults button modify the parameter settings as needed for host control users then select the Save button 8 Select the Image window display button Modify the parameter settings as needed then select the Save button 9 Select the Host window display button Modify the parameter settings as needed then select t
275. mory performance If this does not solve the problem try the following procedure a Set MPC IMS EIB Config Header Mode to Ignore Header Line This will also speed up the IMAGER reply to the host header b Enter the values for Pixels Per Line and Image Lines that you retrieved earlier from the Image Show screen c Be aware that while in Ignore Header Line mode MPC Image Show will now display the values you just entered in the DEIB config screen even if the host is not sending any data 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 37 Service Manual d If Ignore Header mode fixes the problem it can be used as a permanent fix only if the host sends a single size image If the host changes image sizes Ignore Header Mode cannot be used e If Ignore Header mode fixes the problem you may want to set Memory Management in MPC back to Best Fit to maximize utilization of memory 3 Problem Digital acquires work with 969 but fail with the IMAGER Cause The 8700 8500 IMAGER cannot process digital image data as fast as the 969 IMAGER 969 6 MPixel max 8700 8500 4 MPixel max Solution The digital transfer rate of the host must be less than 4 Mpixels per second Have the OEM tech configure the modality for 952 setup This will send a digital transfer rate of 1 MPixel per second L gt Note Hosts with a fast digital transfer rate include Picker MR and CT General Digital Troubleshooting Tips e Use the other port on the DEIB DIB e Use the DEIB DIB SM
276. mounted on the cover of the system and interfaces to the System Control Board SCB through a 50 conductor shielded cable 6 2 2 Densitometer Assembly The densitometer is a subassembly of the Processor Assembly It provides an analog signal which represents the density of the D patch on the film to the SCB through a 15 conductor shielded cable 6 2 3 Processor Assembly The Processor Assembly is located in the top of the system It is responsible for receiving the film from the Transport Assembly developing it over a hot drum cooling it passing it through the densitometer and delivering it to an output tray in the cover The Processor Assembly contains the following electrical components M301 Drives the processor drum M303 Exit Motor Drives the exit rollers SW301 Processor Exit Sensor Senses the film as it enters the densitometer SW302 Processor Entrance Sensor Senses the film as it enters the processor assembly EE Description Designation SW304 Transport Exit Sensor Senses the film as it enters the exit assembly P Processor Communication Board Board which communicates through an optical interface to the RPB to provide temperature status and control from the SCB CB RPB Rotating Processor Board Board responsible for controlling the temperature of the processor drum under software control from the SCB 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 3 Service Manual 6 2 4 Transport Assembly The Transport Assembly is located
277. multiplexed which allows only one interface to be active at a time They are designed to handle the 831 952 959 and 969 protocols with a maximum pixel width of 12 bits The inputs on each interface are optically isolated and are RS422 compatible on the request and re transmit lines The maximum image transfer rate is 4 MP sec The host system is responsible for ensuring that the 3 MP sec average transfer rate is not exceeded The DIB interfaces to the IPB through the image source interface connector CN1107 It provides a 12 bit image output to the IPB along with an input parity error detected signal and a strobe The DIB receives its parameters over a 10 bit parameter bus and returns command status over a 2 bit command bus Both functions provide a strobe signal The DIB receives its power clock and power up reset from the IPB through CN1107 The DIB has test pattern generation circuitry The test image data is stored in an EPROM which is supplied and installed by Kodak The image is transferred at a 2 MP sec rate The maximum image size is 512x509 in 831 952 959 format and 512x511 in 969 format There are two defined forms of image transmission The first is 831 952 959 digital protocol In this format a line by line handshaking is performed which requires a request for each line The host terminates each line except the last with an EOM The last line is terminated with an EOT The second is 969 protocol The entire image is transferred at once
278. must be power cycled to correct the problem Sequence of Events SCB Sends to Override Interlock Feedback and SCB Interpretation of the State Interlock SE li undefined EC Short HI open Low closed normal non service mode service mode L gt Note There is a pull up resistor on the SCB If the interlock is disconnected the SCB will be in the normal non service mode state On Site Technician Correctable P202 Check override switch with ohmmeter P203 Check wiring harness to service interlock for a short to ground 7 68 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 37 EC204 Supply door interlock failed Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X L204 ALM 60 P204 is not operational FRONT_INTERLOCK_FAIL Summary The cartridge door interlock has failed and the SCB watchdog timer has shut down the SCB Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis On Site Technician Correctable Refer to paragraph 7 2 Sensor Interlock Trouble Analysis 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 69 Service Manual 7 6 38 EC205 Top cover interlock failed Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is L205 ALM 60 P205 not operational TOP_INTERLOCK_FAIL Summary The top cover interlock has failed and the SCB watchdog ti
279. n MA 5 64 26 1003 7754 3 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 10 Sems Internal Tooth 2 65 78 8656 4005 2 RING Retaining External Eng 1 66 78 8656 3998 9 RING Retaining External Eng 10 67 26 1000 2561 3 PIN Dowl 094 DIA X 500 3 68 26 1000 0813 0 PIN Dowl 062 DIA X 625 2 69 78 8163 0115 0 BEARING 385 ID X 625 OD X 062 3 70 12 7996 2818 0 RING Retaining External Eng 1 71 26 1011 6330 6 BELT Stock Drive 0186 P 40 DP 235 Grooves 250W 1 72 26 1011 6326 4 BELT Stock Drive 0186 P 40 DP 98 Grooves 250 W 1 73 26 1011 6329 8 BELT Stock Drive 0186 P 40 DP 170 Grooves 250W 2 74 26 1011 6327 2 BELT Stock Drive 0186 P 40 DP 150 Grooves 250W 1 LOTO dalwa beh weed Not Used 76 78 8094 5475 0 SPRING Guide Left Hand 1 77 12 7994 9492 2 SPRING External 312 OD X 037 Wire Dia X 1 75 6 78 26 1011 6375 1 SPRING External 125 OD X 014 Wire DiaX1 125 1 8 46 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 12 Transport Module Assembly continued Item No Part Number Description Qty 79 78 8005 4385 8 SPRING External 188 OD X 026 Wire Dia X 7
280. n out of spec temperatures or is past expiration date or dev temp is out of spec Solution Check developer temperatures 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 109 Service Manual 7 6 76 EC625 Bad film contrast Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Automatic image Automatic image L625 BAD_FILM_CONTRAST quality control is off quality control OFF P625 Summary Film Contrast Bad Contrast of the calibrate sheet is unacceptable Densities of the steps in relation to each other are out of spec Phone Fix Operator Correctable Cause Fogged film Solution Try another cartridge of film On Site Technician Correctable Check the densitometer adjustment 7 110 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 77 EC631 Film slow Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Automatic image quality Automatic image L631 FILM SLOW None control is off P631 quality control OFF Summary Film Slow The darkest density of step 26 is not above 3 1 for blue film or 3 0 for clear film Phone Fix Operator Correctable Try a different cartridge of film or different lot On Site Technician Correctable e Compare MPC AIQC DIogE densities to an external densitometer measuring the same calibrate sheet There may be some differences between the IMAGER and external densitometer readings light source is a different wavelength but the difference
281. n the 200 240 VAC input voltage to 120 VAC for use within the system and voltage filtering components There are two DC power supplies within the PMA The first is a 450 watt supply which supplies the 5 17 and 24 volts used by the system The second is a 15 watt supply which supplies 5 2 volts for use by the copper connect video interface option The PMA contains the following electrical components Reference DE RC f O Fumeton OOO C901 Filter Capacitor Conditions the 120 VAC of the transformer CB901 Input Circuit Breaker 10 amp breaker protects the input wiring CB902 Processor Circuit Breaker 15 amp breaker protects the processor wiring CB903 Power Supply Breaker 8 amp breaker protects the power supply cooling fans and vacuum pump wiring CB904 24 VAC Circuit Breaker 3 amp breaker protects the 24 VAC wiring 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 7 Service Manual 6 2 10 Electronic Enclosure Assembly The Electronic Enclosure Assembly EEA is located along the right side of the system It provides an RFI enclosure for the system control electronics The EEA provides mounting and interconnect harnesses for the Image Management System IMS electronics and for some of the Machine Control System MCS electronics The position of the boards within the EEA are shown in the IMS and MCS sections of this section Cooling is also provided for the components within the EEA The EEA electrical component functions will be described in eithe
282. n the left side door Open the platen access door L gt Note When reassembling ensure that SW703 is actuated when the platen access door is closed DaN Disconnect 2 Figure 4 66 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 57 Service Manual 4 6 7 Platen Top Solenoid Y701 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the platen module 4 6 1 Ta Remove E Remove PS Disconnect 8700 09C Figure 4 67 4 58 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 6 8 Platen Alignment Solenoids Y702 Y705 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the platen module 4 6 1 Loosen Disconnect ES gt 8700 10C Figure 4 68 2001 March Rev L 1202688 Service Manual 4 7 Air Filtration System 4 7 1 Filtration Fan M801 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages a
283. n the processor cover Remove the tape from the foam sheet that is wrapped around the drum then slowly pull the foam sheet out of the processor Close the processor cover by lifting the cover slightly and pulling the support arm forward Press the blue release lever on the right side of the processor then slide the processor exit assembly back into place Slide the processor latch to the left to secure the processor exit assembly Install the front cover and bracket Close the supply door and left side door Close the top cover by lifting the cover slightly and pushing the support rod backward 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation 32 Install the charcoal filter in housing at back of machine Processor Cover 8700 113C Foam Sheet Release Lever Figure 2 7 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 5 Service Manual 2 2 Voltage Setup Caution The IMAGER can be configured to connect with 200 220 or 240 VAC power sources Before applying power ensure that the IMAGER is set for the voltage that most closely matches the AC line voltage Measure the AC voltage at the wall outlet 2 Remove the tag from the handle of the power module at the rear of the IMAGER The tag indicates the factory set voltage If this setting does not match the line voltage perform the remaining steps of this procedure A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER Th
284. n up the image Dmin slightly Do not go past the point of just matching image Dmax to border Dmax or the 5 patch will start to disappear If the VEIB VIB EVEIB is set up INCORRECTLY Using contrast 1 either the 95 or 5 patch will be gone or faint If using a customer image step 2 of the grey scale will blend with or be only faintly darker than step 1 or step 15 will blend with or be only faintly lighter than step 16 See Step 27 of this procedure for possible solutions The other possible incorrect setup of the VEIB VIB EVEIB is that image Dmax is significantly lighter than film Dmax or that image Dmin is significantly darker than film Dmin Using a contrast test this can be seen by the fact that image Dmax and Dmin do not match film Dmax and Dmin until the last few contrast levels or they never reach film Dmax and Dmin See Step 27 of this procedure for possible solutions If the VEIB VIB EVEIB is set up PERFECTLY All of the following will be true with Match Border set to Yes e Contrast 1 Dmax and Dmin will match the border Dmax and Dmin e Increasing the final Black Level setting by one will make the contrast 1 Dmin slightly darker than a clear border e Decreasing the final Black Level setting by one will make the contrast 1 Dmax slightly lighter than a dark border This would be the perfect situation however in most cases the VEIB VIB EVEIB does not seek black and white level this accurately If the black or white l
285. nc signal connect the yellow BNC cable to the V Sync connector The two 15 pin connectors on the adapter cable connect to the PC longer cable and the monitor cable EVEIB a Port 0 Port 1 Ext Clock IN Fiber Optics H Sync Video Video Video Video A Ch B Ch V Sync Composite IN OUT OUT IN Port 0 Port st O O DO CO O Figure 2 23 4 Connect the fiber optic image cable to the EVEIB Refer to Figure 2 24 5 Connect the fiber optic cable to the FIB at the rear of the IMAGER Refer to Figure 2 24 6 Connect the EVEIB power cord For installations outside the U S and Canada the EVEIB is supplied with a harmonized power cord with no wall plug For these locations attach the proper type plug obtain locally The EVEIB uses a universal power supply that requires no modification for input voltages in the range of 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 13 Service Manual EVEIB 2 A Port 0 Port 1 Ext Clock IN Fiber Optics H Sync Video Video Video Video A Ch B Ch V Sync Composite IN OUT OUT IN Port O Port 1 O O OD OO O A Lead Fiber Optic Cable FIB Figure 2 24 2 3 8 Digital Source to DEIB to FIB 1 Check set the jumpers in the DEIB Refer to Procedure 2 4 6 2 Use a digital cable to connect the modality to the appropriate Digital In connector on the DEIB Refer to Figure 2 25 DEIB DODDDDDDDDDDDDDDODODODDDDDDDDDDD DOO D
286. nd 8M bits The memory is divided between code and data The boot code memory is wired to the chip select boot on the 68332 The program code memory is connected to CSO There are two types of data memory volatile for storing working copies of system data or other temporary data and non volatile for system configuration parameters UO The SCB uses discrete byte wide buffers and latches A single chip select from the MCU controls all of the digital I O Inputs use 74HC541 buffers Outputs use 74HC652 latches Analog signals are signal conditioned buffered and multiplexed into a 12 bit successive approximation ADC 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 19 Service Manual SCB Block Diagram MIB AC Clock From MIB NDB RF TAG BPB MFB LOS PDB PCB LPB Generator IPB Power Supply Watchdog Reset V Sense Shift Register Address Data Bus Control IRQ Chip Selects Universal NVRAM Universal RAM Universal Code Universal Boot Memory Site Memory Site Memory Site Memory Site Figure 6 9 6 3 3 6 New Modem Board NMB Refer to Figure 6 10 for a block diagram of the NMB The new modem is based upon earlier designs used in other Kodak laser imagers but has been simplified in order to fit within the EEA It is a communication interface into the system which has two serial communication ports a standard RS232 on a 9 pin connector and a modem on an RJ11 connector Both interfaces to the IPB are RS232 The IPB handles the handshakin
287. nect to the MPC Be sure MPC Operations Preferences is set to Com 1 19200 baud 3 Connect only the power cable and the TDB remove all other cables and boards Do the keypads communicate 4 H only one component is locking up the IPB troubleshoot that component d If the IPB cannot communicate with the SCB MPC or keypads after all of the above checks are performed check the power supply to the IPB If the power looks okay the IPB is bad L gt Note If the Xilinx Eprom U99 on the IPB is bad it will cause the IPB to fail it s self test with DS2 red remaining lit after a reset If you have an extra Xilinx chip you can try this first otherwise just replace the IPB board 2 Symptom IPB can communicate with MPC or keypads but is not communicating with the SCB Solution Reconfigure the IPB by holding the RESET and CONFIG buttons Then release RESET while continuing to hold down CONF for 15 seconds This resets IPB SCB parameters and MPC comm parameters 7 118 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER to 8700 8500 IMAGER e f the SCB has not received a command from the 8800 MULTI INPUT MANAGER within the last 45 seconds it declares EC910 on the local panel L gt Note The 8800 always requests data and the SCB responds The SCB never initiates communication e EC910 does not show up in the error log The error log is an 8800 function and since communication
288. ns Section 1 Specifications 1 1 Dimensions Height 1279 mm 50 4 in Top Cover closed 1641 mm 64 6 in Top Cover open Width 661 mm 26 0 in Left Door closed 1218 mm 47 9 in Left Door open Depth 813 mm 32 0 in Supply and Filter Doors closed 1392 mm 54 9 in Supply and Filter Doors open Weight 250 kg 550 Ibs 1 2 Electrical Voltage 200 220 240 VAC 10 50 60 Hz 3 Current Draw 9 Amperes maximum Power Consumption 1800 watts maximum during warm up 1 3 Storage Environment Temperature 85 to 60 C 31 to 140 F Humidity 10 to 90 RH Noncondensing 1 4 Operating Environment Temperature 15 to 35 C 59 to 95 F Humidity 20 to 85 RH Noncondensing Vibration 0 01 Gs maximum Magnetic Field lt 100 Gauss Leveling 2 degrees or 3 4 inch difference maximum from front to back and side to side 1 5 Environmental Effects Heat Load 2300 BTU Hr average Floor Load 200 Ib ft2 976 kg m Acoustical Noise 55 dB at one meter 70 dB momentarily 1 6 Host Control e RS232 or RS422 jumper selectable connection to IMAGER or UKEIB e Can be located up to one kilometer 3280 feet from IMAGER when using a UKEIB and fiber cable 2001 March Rev L 1202688 1 1 Service Manual 1 7 Keypad e Available image formats include 1 1 2 1 4 1 6 1 9 1 12 1 15 1 16 1 and 20 1 as well as up to 4 custom formats for custom formats images in the same row must all
289. nts at the top of the drum 3 Wearing protective gloves clean the drum with Troubleshooter as follows a While rotating the drum spray it with Troubleshooter in a downward sweeping motion Make sure that the whole area of the drum that contacts film is sprayed b After a 5 minute wait use a lint free paper towel to wipe the Troubleshooter off the drum in a sweeping motion Wipe the drum in a top to bottom direction Rotate the drum and continue wiping until most of the Troubleshooter is removed Caution The surface of the drum is easily damaged Do not use excessive pressure while cleaning c Repeat steps a and b This should use up most of the can of Troubleshooter 4 Clean the drum with stainless steel cleaner by spraying and wiping in two cycles as described for Troubleshooter cleaning in step 3 Caution Do not rub a dry drum F Cleaning and Installing the Rollers 1 Rinse the processor rollers with hot water to remove the Troubleshooter residue Use isopropyl alcohol if water is not available 2 Wipe the rollers dry and install them in the processor see procedure 4 2 2 5 12 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 5 Additional Information G Cleaning and Installing the Stripper Assembly 1 Remove the stripper parts from the sink and rinse them with hot water to remove the Troubleshooter residue Use isopropyl alcohol if water is not available 2 If the stripper blade has a Kapton covering clean the
290. o e 31 2710 10 710 2 SE P2 50 50 50 24V Se NG CN715 PANEL eet 100V CONTROL 13 AC CLK 13 TP4111 amp _ VA _ 24V 13 2707 7 707 7 PLATEN 1 REG FILTER i a tat 14 14ta PLATMID C Y704 ALIGN BACK a DGND ON PINS 23 Im 5 DGND A 32 2708 8 708 2 SC 10 12 23 25 27 29 31 33 CART DR SOL CN714 LIGHTING 3 PAANAN are 16 VAG PUMP 116 SIE vV 24V si 2705 5 705 r PLATEN pman Kk AF TJ gt 17 o 7 PLATMID B Y703 ALIGN RF TAG INTERFACE BOARD 49 10 oy K EPROM DRIVE L t hs VAC SOL 18 33 2706 6 706 2 ALIGN RF VCC CHARGE ceo LEVELS 12V DiS CN1203 Baal ag Bi CART CLOSE 2 calles Ta aa 15 2703 3 703 e PLATEN READER 1 7 PUMP WTH Lt d Jp3 CNG1 CN610 BOARD CNGO2 a EI pik AGND a TONG DEP EG A PLATMID A ay 5704 704 gt Y702 ALIGN gt 1 2 2653 1 1 24 ok SOL 2b vec 8V PROM vec ANACHI RED RED SCHAN BC CLK PICK EN CN712 me 3 8V 45V E S Teo BLK AGND 2 ei re II RAM 22 PICK F R alpa He Len We 16 2701 1 701 1 PLATEN 3 as 4 LEVELS 3 ANACLK 3 N3 waT 2 WHT BCLK CHAN2 3 U7C1 U7D1 gt o PICK H F ma PLATTOPSLA 135 2702 2 702 2 Y701 Io sol 5 ro VES gt RAM SR 4 4 16 ee BLK 10 BLK AGND 4 A bm ANA 2d PICK HZ 24 CN40t a CN407 ma os Pe gt y 6 ke RxD R232 La CB 3 4 GRN 3 GRN BCHANS DEE DGND wile 524 17 2417 8401147 417 1 TRANSPORT 6 6 17 2658 11 6 DRIVERS 26 204 GATESL A Y403 7 157 6 K BAUD CONV VCC BLK BLK AGND RFI M FEED NIP EN 36 2418 18 418 2 GATE SOL A mal 7 5
291. ocessor exit assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Remove 8700 160C 8700 98C Figure 4 15 L gt Note After a new PCB has been installed the processor temperature adjustment must be performed procedure 3 1 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 11 Service Manual 4 2 6 Rotating Processor Board RPB A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the processor drum 4 2 1 L gt Note When reassembling be aware of the colors of the four wires with spade connectors The color code is printed next to the terminals on the RPB L gt Note After a new RPB has been installed the processor temperature adjustment must be performed procedure 3 1 T BE 5 Remove 3 2 8700 99C Figure 4 16 4 12 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 2 7 Processor Slip Rings A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Remove the processor drum 4 2 1 3 Remove the rotating processor board 4 2 6 Ki re Remove 3 R e di j 2
292. of Events 1 The RPB receives a status request from the SCB and calculates the heater temperatures by reading a voltage based on drum thermistor resistance The three thermistors green orange and blue wire sets have resistances of about e 1090 ohms at room temperature e 1460 ohms at operating temperature 2 If the voltage reading for any of the three heater zones indicates above 290 F an error message is generated Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the IMAGER On Site Technician Correctable Measure the resistance of the thermistors Cause Drum and RPB assy is bad Solution Replace assy Tech Tip The reported temperatures from the processor are logged and can be retrieved via MPC Log Printer Log Processor 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 99 Service Manual 7 6 66 EC561 Invalid densitometer data Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Automatic image Automatic image L561 DENSITOMETER ERROR quality control quality control OFF malfunction P561 Summary The densitometer data is invalid Sequence of Events When the leading edge of the film actuates the densitometer entrance sensor the SCB turns on the densitometer LED and takes a density reading before the film is in the densitometer aperture path The SCB uses this information to auto calibrate the densitometer before each sheet If the values read are not within a reasonable range i e a gain of 1400 through 2000
293. of the Dpatch by adjusting the Optics Module offset Refer to the optics offset adjustment in the Service Manual Compare MPC Log Printer log Dpatch recorded densities to an external densitometer measurement of the Dpatch There may be some differences between IMAGER and external densitometer readings light source is a different wavelength but the differences should remain proportional If the IMAGER Dpatch readings in the MPC are invalid check the densitometer 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 115 Service Manual 7 6 82 EC636 Dpatch fast Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm L635 MIDTONE_FAST Summary EC636 Midtone Fast The Dpatch density is outside of control limits Sequence of Events The first Dpatch after a calibrate sheet is targeted to be 1 3 However the actual density of the first Dpatch after the calibrate sheet is read and its value becomes the target Example First Dpatch after a cal sheet is 1 1 Thus 1 1 now becomes the target Dpatch density On Site Technician Correctable Look in the MPC Log Printer Log Dpatch and retrieve the Dpatch log The readings should be consistent gt Note D Gei Density test and contrast test Dpatches are not logged Problem Cause Some of the densitometers have a bent mounting bracket that causes the timing of the Dpatch reading to be off Solution Readjust the bracket to about 90 degrees Problem 8800 only Actual Dpatc
294. only the power cord supplied with this equipment Do not place a portable multiple socket outlet power strip on the floor Mount the power strip on a wall or on the underside of a table Not protected against ingress of liquids including bodily fluids For continued protection against fire replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating This equipment contains moving parts that may be accessible to the user Loose clothing jewelry or long hair may cause minor personal injury or damage to the equipment Do not operate equipment with the covers open Do not operate equipment with any of the safety interlocks overridden This equipment is not contained in a sealed cabinet Therefore it must not be used in locations where it can come in contact with liquids including bodily fluids A caution E Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics oxygen or nitrous oxide This equipment does not have a gas sealed electronics enclosure and could ignite any flammable or explosive gases present in its environment 2001 March Rev L 1202688 i Service Manual This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules Those limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the
295. or board outputs a video signal to the OEM monitor This same video signal is sent to the VEIB VIB EVEIB The window and level controls adjust this video signal which affects both the image displayed on the OEM monitor and the image printed on the film If the monitor s brightness and contrast are out of adjustment the customer will compensate by adjusting the window and level controls until the image looks good on the monitor The result of this is that the image on the film and the image on the monitor do not match Therefore it is important that after the brightness and contrast have been set correctly the customer does not turn the brightness and contrast knobs Over time the monitor will tend to drift and the brightness and contrast may have to be adjusted by the OEM Check With the SMPTE pattern at OEM defined window and level values the 5 patches both black and white should be visible and should have equal contrast to the enveloping 100 and 0 boxes around them If the 5 patches are not visible or are not equally visible the OEM monitor should be adjusted e Ask the OEM to adjust the monitor e Be there when the OEM adjusts the monitor and ensure that the ambient lighting is the same as the normal lighting the customer uses when filming Adjustment 1 Adjust the white first Looking at the text turn the OEM contrast knob until the whites just start to smear Then back off the contrast just to the threshold of smearing T
296. or both steps 6 and 7 calculate the average of the comma separated numbers displayed in the Response field The two averages must be within 200 of each other and within the range of 1530 to 1850 gt Note The response actually includes 30 numbers However the average of the first 8 numbers is sufficient for this purpose 9 If the average values or range are not within spec perform the following adjustment procedure If they are within spec perform the pickup arm height calibration 3 10 Adjustment A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the imager These voltages can cause severe injury or death Remove the supply cartridge and open the left side door 2 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and extend the assembly fully Hook up a two channel scope to TP1 and TP2 on the Multifeed Board Figure 3 14 You can use a dual channel multimeter if you wish Connect at least one ground lead to TP3 3 18 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 3 Adjustments TP1 TP2 Ground Figure 3 14 4 Use a long Phillips head screwdriver to loosen the screw that secures the actuator for the sensor on the MFB Figure 3 15 k Actuato d E Figure 3 15 5 Move the actuator slightly forward or backward until the scope traces overlay each other at about 5 vdc Use the 2 Volt per Division scale L gt Note On a multimeter the readings should be within 0 2
297. or by entering positive or negative values representing click counts in the numeric fields below the arrows For example if the Zone 1 temperature is too low click on the Zone 1 up arrow or enter a positive value in the related numeric field If the Zone 3 temperature is too high click on the Zone 3 down arrow or enter a negative value in the related numeric field Each click produces a change of approximately 06 C L gt Note The adjustment of one zone will affect the temperature of the adjacent zone Zone 2 will affect Zone 1 and Zone 3 more than Zone 1 or Zone 3 will affect Zone 2 In general if Zone 2 and either outer zone are out of specification adjust Zone 2 first However if there is a difference of more than 2 0 C between Zone 2 and the outer zone s adjust the outer zone s first then Zone 2 then the outer zone s again 6 Wait five minutes for temperatures to stabilize then repeat the measurement procedure L gt Note For adjustments of more than 2 0 C the processor may require more than 5 minutes to stabilize temperatures 7 Once all zones are within specification wait five more minutes then repeat the measurement procedure to verify the adjustment 8 Select the Save button to write the new settings into NVRAM 3 4 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 3 Adjustments 3 2 Processor Drum Stripper Specification With the processor at operating temperature there must be a gap of 0 007 001 inches
298. ory Phone Fix Operator Correctable 1 Cause The IMAGER is having difficulty picking up films This results in repeated pickup tries which slows down the system Solution Try a different cartridge 2 Cause Out of film condition is not noticed by customer until memory is full Solution Encourage customer to watch the keypad or host screen for film out message 3 Cause The user is pushing the system to the limits of its capabilities Solution Add more memory On Site Technician Correctable Setup Set MPC Setup Input System Memory Management to Best Fit This will make the most efficient use of the memory L gt Note On some digital modalities this may cause acquisition errors If so set back to First Fit Setup Set the user with memory full problems to high priority via MPC PC IMS Input System User Priority Setup Siemens There are delay parameters in the MPC COMM Siemens screens that will slow down our response to an acquire command by 1 to 3 seconds This has the effect of slowing down the rate of acquiring to reduce the likelihood of memory full conditions SHPT keypad also has delay parameters in the setup screen Siemens note The SHPT will send a memory full to Siemens but no error will show up in the 8800 8700 8500 error log This is normal The SHPT will poll the laser for memory available and will not attempt an acquire if there is not enough available Thus no EC85 will occur in the error log 1
299. ory Refer to paragraph 7 2 for sensor troubleshooting details and paragraph 7 4 for information on film sequencing 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 53 Service Manual 7 6 22 EC139 Bad cartridge ID Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message Input Log Mi Output Log Could not read RF tag on K209 Problem with supply L139 BAD_CRTG ID cartridge Replace cartridge cartridge on laser imager X P139 Summary The SCB was unable to read the information on the RF tag in the cartridge Sequence of Events Phone Fix Operator Correctable On Site Technician Correctable Refer to the RF Tag trouble analysis procedure in paragraph 7 11 7 54 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 23 EC145 Unsupported media type Local Panel HQ Keypad Error Log Message Message Message Input Log W Output Log Unsupported media type K209 L145 ALM 31 P145 Summary Sequence of Events Phone Fix Operator Correctable On Site Technician Correctable 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 55 Service Manual 7 6 24 EC151 Optics module PLL error Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OM IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is L151 ALM 60 P151 not operational OPTICS OUT OF LOCK Summary At power up and before each print the SCB checks the XPLL line from the optics module The signal is normally high and is pulled low by the optics module when the optic
300. ot Available Not Available Not Available FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY Kodak and OEM except GE See Figure 8 4 1 FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY GE only See Figure 8 4 HOOD ASSEMBLY Kodak See Figure 8 3 HOOD ASSEMBLY GE Geetoureg2 cece eee es 1 78 8094 5713 4 78 8094 9031 7 78 8094 5339 8 78 8094 9024 2 78 8092 4073 8 78 8094 9041 6 5A 5B 6A 6B 7A 78 8092 4071 2 78 8094 9043 2 78 8092 4072 0 78 8094 9045 7 78 8094 5811 6 78 8094 9035 8 78 8095 9538 8 78 8094 5979 1 10 78 8094 5837 1 78 8656 4000 3 13 15 16 26 1006 7882 5 26 1003 7123 1 26 1003 7120 7 Not Available Not Available Not Available Not Used 78 8094 5913 0 26 1003 7121 5 26 1008 9102 2 Not Available 26 1011 6809 9 78 8094 5518 7 1202688 Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 1 Machine and Skins Assembly Description Qty MACHINE AND SKINS ASSEMBLY 1 MACHINE ASSEMBLY Standalone See Figure 8 2 1 MACHINE ASSEMBLY Dual See Figure 8 2 1 HOOD ASSEMBLY OEM except GE See Figure 8 3 1 PANEL Access Kodak and OEM except GE 1 PANEL ACCESS GE OMI e ee KA kha GA Danna hana in NAG a y 1 PANEL Right Kodak and OEM except GE 1 gt PANEL Right GE LU NEE
301. ot match 2 IPB MPC port is locked up 3 IPB to MPC communication parameters are invalid 1 The A drive was last used and the retrieved image is being sent to it by MPC 2 Images are in memory for the user 1 Try Setting MPC Operations Preferences Direct connect to other baud rates 2 Power cycle the IMAGER or 8800 3 Reconfigure the IPB To do this press and hold RESET and CONFIG Then release RESET and hold CONFIG until the TDB red LED goes out This reconfigures the MPC Comm parameters and the IPB to SCB comm parameters to defaults 1 Reselect the C drive using MPC 2 Delete the images in memory using MPC Image Delete Delete only the user images with the problems 8800 Tip MPC monitor program continues to display on your PC even when the service switch is set to local keypad 7 10 Image Quality Trouble Analysis General Image Quality Troubleshooting Tips e Lower the Dmax to minimum from the local panel or keypad This will make some image quality problems more obvious e Make the following checks to see if the problem is confined to one user ls the density test okay but the user image not okay Does the problem affect only one user ls the problem in the image area only and not the border If only one user is having problems troubleshoot the interfaces and check the MPC parameters for that user 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 127 Service Manual 7 11 RF Tag Subs
302. out of the IMAGER A Caution To avoid damage to sensitive electronic components always wear an anti static strap when handling PWAs or EPROMs kat ae Pei Disconnect cables 3 T Remove screws 4 Figure 4 71 4 62 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 8 2 Processor Power Relay K801 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the rear panel 4 1 2 gt Note When reassembling check the labels on the wires to ensure that they are connected to the correct terminals The terminal numbers are marked on the relay NG Disconnect 6 6 Remove 2 Remove 4 4 8700 13C Figure 4 72 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 63 Service Manual 4 8 3 Local Panel A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 2 Raise the top cover of the IMAGER Remove 4 Loosen screws and disconnect 8700 32C Figure 4 73 4 64 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl
303. pace available Parallel port Windows 95 98 Serial port or PMCIA modem with 1200 baud or greater L gt Note The specifications listed above reflect the minimum configuration required to run the MPC for Windows software 2 Fluke DVM Model 87 or equivalent TL 4114 3 Dual trace oscilloscope TL 3348 Band Width 0 to 100 MHz Sensitivity 0 5 mv Accuracy 3 Cable MPC Serial Port 26 1011 4592 3 Connector Assembly 9 Pin Loopback two required 78 8075 2585 8 6 DEIB Test Pattern SMPTE EPROM Kit 78 8063 3993 9 7 Temperature Meter Kit includes Minco temperature meter and 11 inch bar type probe calibrated as a pair 78 8099 9500 0 8 Probe 11 inch bar type 26 1011 8560 6 L gt Note If a new probe is ordered the probe and meter must be sent in for calibration See procedure 5 2 9 Block for use with probe 78 8064 5583 4 10 Connector BNC T F M F 83 1610 0141 3 11 Terminator BNC 75 Ohm 26 1008 4885 7 12 Adapter BNC 83 1610 0154 6 13 Static Protection Kit includes a static dissipative work surface a ground cord two sizes of wrist bands and an alligator clip TL 3397 2001 May Rev M 1202688 5 1 Service Manual 5 2 Temperature Meter and Probe Calibration The temperature meter and bar type probe must be calibrated together as a pair at least once per year Send the meter probe and calibration form to National Calibration and Testing Laboratories 6960 Madison Avenue West Minneapolis MN 55427 The cali
304. probe breaks a new probe and the meter must be sent in for calibration Refer to procedure 5 2 for details The temperature meter must be at room temperature when performing this procedure If the meter has been brought in from a hot or cold vehicle allow it to acclimate to room temperature before use Measurement Setup 1 Raise the top cover of the 8700 8500 2 Open the processor cover Verify that the processor rollers are clean and free of deposits Caution Deposits on the processor rollers could be knocked loose by the temperature probe resulting in damage to the surface of the drum If necessary clean the processor before continuing with this procedure 3 Close the processor cover Remove the four screws that secure the top cover of the processor clamshell Do not remove the cover yet Refer to Figure 3 1 5 Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 from the IMAGER and pull out the service interlock switch 6 Close the top cover of the IMAGER 2001 May Rev M 1202688 3 1 Service Manual Remove 4 Figure 3 1 7 Power up the 8700 8500 8 Install the block on the probe as shown in Figure 3 2 Clean the probe with alcohol Ol O O OS O 2 inches Figure 3 2 9 Set the meter to display temperatures in Celsius L gt Note Celsius temperatures are displayed to one decimal point of accuracy Fahrenheit temperatures are displayed
305. quencing 7 64 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 33 EC177 Supply cartridge could not be closed Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX 952 Host IM alarm Cartridge could not be closed K210 Printer error L177 Opening door will expose XXX Check local panel on SUPPLY COVER sheets P177 Toggles with Press laser imager X CLOSE ERROR supply button for 5 seconds to 7 open the door This will expose XXX sheets in the cartridge P138 Summary Sequence of Events Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing Phone Fix Operator Correctable Cause Film jams Solution Clear jam On Site Technician Correctable 1 Cause Tongue depressor arm is bent Solution Reform arm 2 Cause Transport interlock SW407 is faulty Solution Repair replace switch 3 Cause MIB board has blown driver U8C1 due to the rollback motor leads rubbing against the frame and shorting to ground Solution Reposition and repair leads to motor Replace MIB General Troubleshooting Tip Solenoids Use MPC Diag SCB Solenoids to exercise the solenoid Refer to paragraph 7 3 for additional information on solenoids paragraph 7 2 for Sensor Troubleshooting Analysis Motors Use MPC Diag SCB Motors to exercise the rollback motor Theory Refer to paragraph 7 4 Film Sequencing 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 65 Service Manual 7 6 34 EC178 Top cover open Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log
306. r the IMS or MCS section the EEA contains the following electrical components Reference DB Digital Interface Board IMS FIB Fiber Interface Board IMS Pe IB Image Processor Board IMS MDB Memory Daughter Board IMS MIB Machine Interface Board MCS NMB New Modem Board MCS PDB Power Distribution Board MCS System Control Board MCS TDB Translator Daughter Board IMS VIB Video Interface Board IMS M1001 1003 Cooling Fans MCS 6 8 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 3 Electronics Description 6 3 1 Image Management System The IMS consists of a group of boards which perform image acquisition interpolation filtering formatting and output to the LOS It has interfaces for up to two keypads or hosts through the TDB and interfaces for image sources through four alternate daughter boards The IMS can be configured with either an 8 bit or 12 bit data path and image memory ranging from 16 to 128 megapixels The IPB is the core of the IMS and acts as the back plane All of the other boards in the IMS are daughter boards that plug directly into the IPB The IMS can be configured with combinations of the following boards Reference Designation PB Image Processor Board Image processing MDB Memory Daughter Board Image memory up to 4 boards per system pp Digital Inteiace Board Digtal host mage mage The IMS boards are mounted on an inner swing out panel in the Elec
307. r unapproved cables are used or cables are connected incorrectly components within the UKEIB may be damaged 1 Set the switches in the UKEIB Universal Keypad External Interface Box as required Refer to Procedure 2 4 1 Connect the keypad cable to the keypad and the UKEIB Refer to Figure 2 13 3 If an optional footswitch is to be used connect it to the UKEIB Refer to Figure 2 14 2 8 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 2 Installation UKEIB FIBER OPTIC o Frsw AT O ER SH RCV HOST o o IMAGER o o o KEYPAD Keypad Cable Figure 2 13 UKEIB FIBER OPTIC XMT A CH B CH Or O HOST o o IMAGER o o o KEYPAD o I RCV Footswitch Figure 2 14 4 Connect the KEIB cable to the UKEIB Refer to Figure 2 15 5 Connect the KEIB cable to the TDB C at the rear of the IMAGER Refer to Figure 2 15 6 Connect the UKEIB power cord For installations outside the U S and Canada the UKEIB is supplied with a harmonized power cord with no wall plug For these locations attach the proper type plug obtain locally The UKEIB uses a universal power supply that requires no modification for input voltages in the range of 100 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz UKEIB FIBER OPTIC HOST SEET FTSW XMT Ny O ACH B cH MAGER KEYPAD SE RCV Les o TDB C KEIB C
308. ransport Motor SW403 Platen Exit Sensor Transport Gate ab Solenoid Not present in later production machines FILM TRANSPORT 400 Platen Align Y701 Solenoids Platen Top Y702 A Y703 B Solenoid Y704 C Y705 D Dia Platen Kicker Solenoid Platen SW703 Bottom Platen Door Sensor Laser Interlock PLATEN MODULE 700 J K L Processor Ng Entrance Sensor Drum SW301 Processor Exit Sensor New Densitometer Board LF901 Line Filter M901 Blower CB904 CB903 CB902 CB901 Filtration Filtration Power Proc Main Power Supplies Board TS901 Terminal Strip K901 Relay Kodak DryView 8700 8500 LASER IMAGER IMS Component Locations Adjustment Summaries Sheet 4 2001 March Rev L 1202688 Processor i Communication Board Rotating Processor Board M301 Processor Motor M303 Exit QU ES SW304 Transport Exit Sensor FILM PROCESSOR 300 Receive Circuit Breakers T901 Transformer PS901 5 17 24 Volt Supplies TS902 Terminal Strip EN PS902 5 2 Volt C901 Supply Capacitor POWER MODULE ASSEMBLY 900 N P Q R Ms N Y802 Left Side Door Solenoid FRAME COMPONENTS S SW806 Cartridge Door Interlock Y801 Solenoid Oe Cartridge iw Wa oor
309. ransport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position eo cee ee Disconnect 8700 163C Figure 4 28 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 23 Service Manual 4 3 4 Platen Entrance Sensor SW402 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Remove 8700 18C Figure 4 29 4 24 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 3 5 Platen Exit Sensor SW403 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Remove 8700 166C Figure 4 30 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 25 Service Manual 4 3 6 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning Transport Midpoint Sensor SW404 When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present
310. rations Diagnostics and press the CMD button Inthe Command window type show emul The response should be in the following format SHOW Y EMUL 022845 042 B 012 The number is the film identifier read from the RF tag This response indicates that the RF Tag Subsystem is working correctly 4 Install the original film cartridge in the IMAGER Running the RF Interface Test In the MPC Command window type show rfintf The response should be in the following format SHOW Y INTF 0 12 The number is the firmware level of the RF Tag Interface Board This response indicates that the RF Tag Interface Board is functional Running the RF Reader Test In the MPC Command window type show rfreader The response should be in the following format SHOW Y RFREADER 263 The number identifies the version number of the RF Reader Board This response indicates that the SCB can communicate through the RF Tag Interface Board with the RF Reader Board 7 128 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown 8 1 Illustrated Parts Breakdown IPB This Illustrated Parts Breakdown IPB section contains the information necessary to locate and identify assemblies sub assemblies and specific parts of the Kodak DryView 8700 8500 LASER IMAGER Part Numbers All components available on a replacement basis are listed with their identification number The parts identification list
311. rch Rev L 1202688 4 39 Service Manual 4 4 6 Film Out Sensor SW502 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the pickup module 4 4 1 Disconnect 8700 169C Figure 4 48 4 40 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 4 7 Picker Up Sensor SW503 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the pickup module 4 4 1 Disconnect Remove 2 8700 129C Figure 4 49 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 41 Service Manual 4 4 8 Picker Extended Sensor SW504 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the pickup module 4 4 1 4 42 Remove Remove 2 O Disconnect 8700 170C Figure 4 50 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disasse
312. rdous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Disconnect 8700 06C Remove 2 Figure 4 26 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 21 Service Manual 4 3 2 Transport Feed Roll Motor M401 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Open the left side door Sher 4 22 Disconnect Remove 2 Figure 4 27 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove the rear panel from the IMAGER 4 1 2 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 3 3 Platen Motor M403 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove the rear panel from the IMAGER 4 1 2 Open the left side door Squeeze the handle on the t
313. re Version Number e Read a Block of Data from the Tag e Write a Block of Data to the Tag e Read RF Reader Board Error Code e Lock a Block on the Tag i e do not allow writing e Read the RF Tag ID e Read the RF Tag Details e Read Version Number of RF Reader Board 6 22 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation Figure 6 12 6 3 3 8 Interlocks Type of Interlocks The IMAGER uses two types of interlocks Machine interlocks interrupt specific machine processes but not the laser diode Laser interlocks interrupt only the laser diode Laser Interlock Function Refer to Figure 6 13 for a laser interlock diagram There are two laser interlock switches one for the left door SW804 and one for the platen access door SW703 The purpose of these interlocks is to prevent operators manufacturing personnel or service engineers from being exposed to any laser emission hazards after opening the left door or the platen access door Opening either of these doors disables the laser diode The two laser interlocks are wired in series and directly control a relay K1301 on the MIB whose contacts provide power 17 VDC to the LOS Opening either the left door or platen access door will cause the relay contacts to open The laser diode will be turned off as a result An auxiliary set of relay contacts is used to notify the LOS logic that a door is open The LOS logic changes the level on the interlock status signal which
314. re practitioner Do not substitute or modify any part of this equipment without approval of Eastman Kodak Company General External Cleaning This equipment may be cleaned with a damp cloth using water with mild detergent or commercial electronic equipment cleaner ii 1202688 2001 March Rev L Warnings and Cautions Do not touch Hot Surface ATTENTION CAUTION Surface Chaude Ne pas toucher Do not touch Hot surface ACHTUNG ADVERTENCIA Nicht anfassen Heisse Oberflache No tocar Superficia Caliente ATTENZIONE OPGEPAST Non toccare Superficie Calda Niet aanraken Heet Oppervlak Class 1 Laser Laser de cat gorie 1 Laser Klasse 1 Laser di Classe 1 Klass 1 Laser Front Left Rear DANGER Invisible Laser Radiation When Open Avoid Direct Exposure to Beam ATTENTION Rayonnement Laser Invisible En Cas D Ouverture Exposition Dangereuse Au Faisceau VORSICHT Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung Wenn Abdeckung Ge ffnet Nicht Dem Strahl Aussetzen VARNING Osynlig Laserstralning Laserstraining Nar Denna Del A Oppnad Stralen Ar Farlig 2001 March Rev L 1202688 iii Service Manual Kodak DryView Laser Imager US Standalone ITE MODEL 8700 MFG DATE March 2001 SIN 123711370 VOLTS 2007220 240V PIN 8 9236 5628 0 AMPS 948 517 8A CATIN 1453979 7 FREQ N137 Gma Ge EASTMAN KODAK COMPANY c us C ROCHESTER NEW YORK 14660 Made in USA LISTED FCC ID PA4870085007E2620 FCC THIS D
315. re present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Unlatch and open the filter housing Disconnect 8700 119C Figure 4 69 4 60 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 7 2 Filter Present Switch SW801 1 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Unlatch and open the filter housing o CT Disconnect Remove E ei H o o JE T 8 PARRA Figure 4 70 8700 118C 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 61 Service Manual 4 8 Frame Mounted Parts 4 8 1 Power Distribution Board PDB Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord Remove the power module 4 9 1 Remove the platen and optics module 4 6 1 Slide the transport module
316. ria aa a A A A ati 9 8 76 1202688 2001 May Rev M Item No 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 55 58 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 75 76 78 79 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 23 Electronics Enclosure Assembly Dual continued Part Number Description Qty Not Available sse SHIELD cei eA e a ee Oe ee oe aa eA ee BELA 7 Not Available SHIELDING Electrical 23 26 1004 3945 9 FASTENER 4 40 THD X 5 12 26 1002 3977 6 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 8 0 22 26 1003 7120 7 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 8 0 Sems External Tooth 21 26 1009 7311 9 NUT Lock Metric M4 with nylon insert 9 Not Available GUIDE deene e BAR BNG oa Sele nate 4 Not Available LABEL Damage Static Electricity 78 8016 5859 8 RING Retaining External E Ring 4 26 1011 4695 4 TAPE Foam 125 T X 500 W Bulk AR Not Available HARNESS ASSEMBLY Module Interconnect 1 26 1008 9104 8 WASHER Metric Plain M 4 Not Available CLAMP Nylon 0 00 cece eect eet eet eee 1 26 1007 2397 7 NUT Mach Metric
317. rong printer type in MPC or local keypad or using EC910 will display on local IMS Input System Destination panel 2 Set printer type using 3 Unprintable character in the MPC IMS Output Config and MPC IMS System User ID field Comm 3 Make sure that only the letters A Z and numbers 1 9 are in the field Images acquire but fail to print DZO from host is failing Monitor Set MPC Setup IMS Host Pixel communications using MPC to Correction to No determine if this is the case Siemens with SHPT keypad Set SHPT keypad to First copy prints but second AUTOFORMAT OFF copy fails Contrast test does not print Image size it too large IMAGER cannot print a contrast test when the image lines are greater than 1024 Go to MPC Image Show to view image size from host Contrast test from a host user Time from acquire pass to the Open the supply cartridge and prints the IMAGER internal image being erased is shorter have the host acquire and print SMPTE pattern than the time it takes to generate an image Initiate a contrast test a contrast test and wait 2 minutes Close the cartridge Both the users should print and the contrast test should exit 7 124 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 7 5 Processor Problem Description Problem Isolation Procedure Squeaking 1 Drum idler rollers Lubricate the drum idler rollers 2 Stripper idler rollers stripper rollers and exit idler rollers with Krytox
318. rror Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm L48 EOF_Timeout Summary The IMS has timed out waiting for the End of Film EOF from the optics and SCB Sequence of Events 1 The IPB issues the print command to the SCB and the film is picked up 2 When the IPB receives the SOL signal from the Optics module which is under control of the SCB the IPB strobes data to the Optics module 3 If the IPB does not receive the full number of SOL s from the optics via the SCB within about 1 minute and 45 seconds EC48 is logged e This could occur because of a film jam that prevents the film from reaching the optics or because something in the imaging chain optics parity error etc is malfunctioning e EC48 is usually accompanied by some other error such as a parity error film jam or optics error The errors accompanying EC48 may provide better troubleshooting information e The print job is retried a second time If the second attempt also results in EC48 the print job is killed and the image is deleted from memory The job is not killed if jams are occurring On Site Technician Correctable 1 Problem EC48 No end of File on every film including density tests Cause MPC SCB or MCS Config Clear Border Lines is not initialized Solution Set Clear Border lines and power cycle the IMAGER Refer to MPC help screen for more information on setting the field 2 Problem E48 and film jam errors together in the error log Cause Film jams or pic
319. rupter DS4 or order a new PCB To replace the lens cap order a new photointerrupter remove its cap and install it on the original photointerrupter DS4 Do not remove the original photointerrupter from the PCB and solder on the new one 2 Problem The reflective plate on the RPB is dirty or deformed Solution Inspect the reflective plate 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 85 Service Manual 7 6 54 EC506 No communication from processor Local Panel HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Message Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager Xis L506 Lift top cover to reset not operational PROCESSOR_COMM ERROR processor P506 Summary If the SCB does not receive communication from the drum Rotating Processor Board RPB after 10 attempts EC506 Processor Communication error is generated by the SCB The operator is instructed to open and close the top cover to clear the error Phone Fix Operator Correctable 1 Lift and lower top cover to clear 2 Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable Problem Error Code 506 Processor Communications have failed after 10ten attempts Solution The following checks should be made prior to changing any parts 1 60 Hz Phasing Pull out the processor to its extended position and move the Processor Communications Board out of the way Refer to Figure 7 21 Using a dual trace oscilloscope connect channel 1 to pin 7 of U8K1 on the System Control Board SCB Connect
320. s module has determined that the X galvo is in sync Error State If the line does not pull low EC151 Optics out of Lock is logged Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable 1 Cause Optics module is bad Solution Make the following check first a Reseat the cables to the optics module SCB and MIB b If the problem remains replace the optics module 2 Cause The control cable between SCB and optics has a loose fitting connection at the bulkhead due to the cable securing screws bottoming out before the cables are fully seated Solution First check the control cable to see if the cable is loose and the securing screws are bottomed out Then shim the screws and sockets as needed to tighten up the two cables 3 Cause This problem can also be the result of a bad circuit on the SCB The SCB may not be processing the XPLL signal properly L gt Note This error may appear alternating with EC601 Refer to the Quick Sheet for that error 7 56 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 25 EC154 NVRAM error Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is L154 NVRAM ERROR ALM 60 P154 not operational Summary The SCB NVRAM has an error Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable 1 Reinitialize the SCB NVRAM 2 Besides
321. s should remain proportional across the steps If the IMAGER densitometer readings in MPC are invalid check the densitometer e Expose a film to room light then load it as the top sheet in a cartridge and run a print lf 3 1 or 3 0 density cannot be achieved now the processor temperature may be low or high f the processor temperature checks ok the film is probably bad If processor temperatures are incorrect adjust them using MPC Refer to the service manual adjustment 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 111 Service Manual 7 6 78 EC632 Film fast Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Automatic image quality Automatic image L632 FILM_FAST None control is off P632 quality control OFF Summary EC632 Film Fast The film speed from the calibrate sheet is above 3 4 Film Speed can be viewed in MPC AIQC Dloge Phone Fix Operator Correctable Try a different cartridge If this does not fix the problem try a different lot of film gt Note Set the density and contrast settings to optimize the image until a technician can arrive When AIQC is turned off there is a DENSITY setting displayed on the local panel and at the HQ keypads The DENSITY setting is independent of the DMAX setting On Site Technician Correctable 1 Compare MPC AIQC DIogE densities to an external densitometer measuring the same calibrate sheet There may be some differences between IMAGER and externa
322. s voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the front panel 4 1 1 Loosen 8700 122C Figure 4 80 4 70 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 8 10 Left Door Solenoid Y802 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left door Disconnect solenoid connector Loosen S ol A N E O IL e 8700 138C Figure 4 81 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 71 Service Manual 4 8 11 Service Switch 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the right side panel 4 1 3 4 Remove the electronics enclosure cover 4 1 4 L gt Note When reassembling check the labels on the wires to ensure that they are connected to the correct terminals The terminal numbers are marked on the side of the switch a i sr J Di
323. sconnect 4 Remove 8700 16C Figure 4 82 4 72 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 9 Power Module Assembly 4 9 1 Power Module 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the rear panel 4 1 2 Loosen 2 8700 24A Slide module Disconnect 3 out of imager Figure 4 83 Remove 4 8700 154C Figure 4 84 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 73 Service Manual 4 9 2 Filter Capacitor C901 and Varistor V901 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Remove the power module 4 9 1 L gt Note When reassembling ensure that the wires are connected to the correct terminals If in doubt refer to the schematic located on the underside of the power supply cover Disconnect o gt S Sei Remove 2 E 8700 153C Figure 4 85 4 74 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 9 3 Input Circuit Breaker CB901 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning
324. se differences require variations in disassembly and cleaning 1 Unlatch the stripper latch es Figure 5 9 and remove the felt plate assembly Set it aside a If the blade is Kapton covered check that the Kapton is not delaminating If it is the blade must be replaced b Check that the two rollers that ride on the drum rotate freely and do not have flat areas If the rollers are defective the adjuster brackets both sides must be replaced Rotate the stripper assembly forward Then remove the attaching screw M3 and washers from each end of the stripper assembly and remove the stripper assembly Disassemble the stripper assembly as follows a Pull the end adjuster bracket assemblies free of the stripper blade Figure 5 9 b Remove two shoulder screws M2 5 to free the two mount brackets and torsion springs from the adjuster brackets c Remove the two shoulder screws M4 that secure the two rollers Discard the two torsion springs if they are the lighter type If they are the heavier type colored they must be washed see next step Place the remainder of the stripper parts in the sink or empty cartridge Exception If the stripper blade is coated with plastic mylar Kapton do not place it in the sink Set it aside for later cleaning reference procedure G Bracket Felt 8700_403C Fi
325. sensor can be rounded resulting in unreliable sensor mounting If a flag type sensor is removed it should be replaced Also the picker mid sensor can be removed and substituted for another U type sensor temporarily Once power up is completed the picker mid sensor can be removed and the IMAGER will continue to print normally Sensor Disconnect Test If you disconnect a sensor the sensor signal should be high pull up resistor is on the SCB If it is not either the SCB is bad or there is a short in the wiring Sensor Ground Test Refer to Figure 7 2 1 Disconnect the sensor and connect a jumper to pin 4 2 Connect the other end of the jumper to machine ground Caution If pin 5 white is shorted to ground the 4 amp fuse F8E1 pluggable on the MIB will blow 3 If the signal is not low either the cable harness is bad back to the SCB or the SCB is bad FLAG SENSOR Short SCB line to machine U SENSOR Short SCB line to machine ground ground The signal should be low The signal should be low 5 5 White 5 5 5v Brown 4 4 ToSCB Blue 4 4 ToSCB Black 3 3 Gnd Green 3 3 Gnd Orange 2 2 5V Red 2 2 5V Red 1 1 Gnd Black 1 1 Gnd 8700 282L Figure 7 2 Power Distribution Test Points The power distribution board has test points that can be used to measure sensor signals However the filter and back panel mu
326. sor PICKUP EE 2 BUTTON Sensor Pickup SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M4 X 0 7 X 10 0 Sems External Tooth 1 GUP Round PICKUP DEE EE 3 SLIDE SUCKER PICKUP oi anak wen HERA ah ww ake re ae 3 s OP RING Sucker PICKUP NE saci SE ad Beh se awh toad deal nwa is 3 9 HOUSING Sucker PICK D EE 3 10 26 1003 7115 7 SCREW Mach Pan Head Phil Metric M3 X 0 5 X 6 0 Sems External Tooth 3 11 12 7996 5868 2 RING Retaining External E Ring eanan r rnrn nenne 3 12 26 1011 6728 1 FITTING Elbow 10 32 UNF Male Thd X 1 8 ID Tubing 90 DEG Nylon 3 13 26 1011 6726 5 FITTING Tee For 5 32 ID Tubing Nylon 2 14 26 1011 6729 9 TUBING Silicone 125 ID X 250 OD AR Te Not Available ADHESIWVES Ee ti At ln ae Mae hee Sis AR 16 e Ee 2 TIE AMR AP es at tae co NN ied gee te ee pa Hand wha tap ae oN tac ee ed 2 17 Not Available MOUNT Cable Tie 2 18 Not Available CLAMP Cable 2202000 a aaa 1 19 78 8092 5509 0 SHIELD See Note 1 ooccoccocccccccnc 1 Note 1 Prior to Serial Numbers 87001800 order 8700 Sensor Shield Kit 78 8092 4184 3 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 39 Service Manual BLANK PAGE 8 40 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 12 Transport Module Assembly Screen 1 of 4 8700 3
327. sor on the MFB Figure 3 13 5 Move the actuator slightly and retighten the screw Move the actuator up if Channel 10 is higher Move it down if Channel 9 is higher 6 Repeat the measurement and adjustment procedures as required 7 Slide the transport back into place close the left side door and install the supply cartridge 8 Perform the pickup arm height calibration 3 10 Actuator MFB A WIES y Leg 8700 1800 Figure 3 13 2001 May Rev M 1202688 3 17 Service Manual 3 9 Multifeed Board MFB Actuator Alternative Adjustment Do this procedure only if the MFB or associated hardware has been replaced Specification ADC values within 200 of each other and within a range of 1530 to1850 Special Tools e Maintenance Personal Computer MPC e MPC for Windows software package e Dual Trace Scope or Dual Channel Digital Multimeter Measurement Connect the MPC to the MPC port on the rear of the IMAGER Power up the MPC and start the MPC for Windows program Open the Operations menu and select Diagnostics Click on the SCB button or open the Operations menu and select Subsystem SCB Select the Cmd button to display the Command window Type show adc 9 in the Command field then press Enter or click OK Record the number Type show adc 10 in the Command field then press Enter or click OK Record the number DIN Ole se Die F
328. ssembly out to its extended position Disconnect Remove 2 Remove Remove 8700 143c Figure 4 33 4 28 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 3 9 Tongue Depressor Interrupt Switch SW407 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Remove 2 ne Zz Remove 2 Disconnect 8700 144C Figure 4 34 2001 March Rev L 1202688 4 29 Service Manual 4 3 10 Tongue Depressor Solenoid Y401 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning When the power cord is plugged in hazardous voltages are present in some areas of the IMAGER These voltages can cause severe injury or death 2 Flip down the circuit breaker on the rear of the IMAGER Then unplug the power cord 3 Open the left side door 4 Squeeze the handle on the transport assembly and pull the assembly out to its extended position Remove 4 Disconnect 8700 145C Figure 4 35 4 30 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 4 Disassembly Reassembl 4 3 11 Transport Feed Roll Solenoid Y402 1 Remove the supply cartridge A Warning
329. st be removed to access the test points 7 2 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshooting 7 2 3 Measuring Sensor Signals at the SCB U Type Sensors e U Sensor blocked Low to SCB typically 53 mv e U Sensor unblocked High to SCB 5 0 volts e U Sensor open or disconnected High at SCB 5 0 volts measured at SCB sensor cable Flag Type Sensors e Flag Sensor blocked deactuated High to SCB 5 0 volts at SCB sensor cable e Flag Sensor unblocked actuated Low to SCB typically 153 mv e Flag Sensor open or disconnected High at SCB 5 0 volts Making Sensor Measurements With the sensor connected measure the signal voltage at the SCB using a voltmeter or scope e A high state should be 5 0 volts e If a high or low state is near threshold levels the SCB may interpret the signal inconsistently gt Note The SCB interprets all voltages above 2 2 volts to be high and all voltages below 2 2 volts to be low e A logic probe may also be connected to the service port pins Refer to Figure 7 3 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 3 Service Manual Sensor Active States The following table shows outputs of the sensors in the MPC Checked state Power Dist Physical Bd Test Pt Assembly Type Rollback Cart Present U Blocked L SW604 Rollback Rollback Home U Blocked L SW601 Rollback Cartridge Open U Blocked L SW603 Transport Tongue U Blocked L 19 Depress SW406 Pickup Picker Up U Blocked L 10 TP6
330. t Moves the film from the supply cartridge to the exposure module and from the exposure module to the processor module 500 Lifts the film from the supply cartridge to the transport module 60 Rollback Opens and closes the cover of the supply cartridge 700 Exposure Exposes the film Consists of a laser optics system and an exposure platen 800 Frame Not a functional module but used to identify components that are mounted to the frame and not included in other modules Power Contains the DC power supplies and AC power conditioning components 1000 Contains the control and image processing electronics 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 1 Service Manual 6 1 2 System Electronics Architecture The system electronics have been developed jointly by Kodak and two partners Analogic and General Scanning Inc They are divided into the following three functional sections e IMS Image Management System Analogic e LOS Laser Optics System GSI e MCS Machine Control System Kodak Figure 6 1 is a block diagram that summarizes the architecture of the overall system electronics It illustrates the basic connections between the three functional sections and the printed circuit boards within each section Each section is described in greater detail in subsequent paragraphs All of the IMS and the major boards of the MCS are located in the Electronic Enclosure Assembly The smaller boards of the MCS are located in the other mod
331. t the bottom leg of resistor R8K1 The signal is low when the SCB optics cable is disconnected and is pulled high by the optics module when the attenuator is in the home position 7 46 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 6 15 EC122 Optics module not present Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is L122 ALM 60 P122 not operational NO_OPTICS_MODULE Summary The SCB uses a dedicated signal OMCON to detect the presence of an optics module Error State If the OMCON signal is not detected low during power up EC 122 no optics module is logged Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable Check OMCON signal from optics module Measure on the SCB at the bottom leg of resistor R7M1 The signal is high with the SCB Optics control cable disconnected and is pulled low by the optics module when operating normally 2001 May Rev M 1202688 7 47 Service Manual 7 6 16 EC123 Optics module temperature error Local Panel Message HQ Keypad Message Error Log OMX IM 952 Host alarm Printer malfunction K202 Laser imager X is L123 ALM 60 P123 not operational OPTICS_TEMP_FAIL Summary The optics module has failed to come up to temperature within 15 minutes Sequence of Events The SCB will not run the optics diagnostics at power up until it sees the Y galvo YTempe signal pull
332. tion Motor 4 37 78 8095 9327 6 GEARHEAD Exit Ratio 6 1 See Note 1 1 38 78 8095 9505 7 FAN ASSEMBLY Densitometer 2 39 26 1003 6940 9 SCREW Metric Mach M3 X 0 5 X 25 Sems External Tooth 6 Note 1 If either Motor Assembly item 9 or Exit Gearhead item 37 are suspected to be bad order Items 9 34 and 37 8 66 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 8 Illustrated Parts Breakdown Figure 8 21 Power Module Assembly 2001 May Rev M 1202688 8 67 Service Manual 0 JO O1 P ON mb O moto 13A 13B 14 A 17 18 E aa 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 BO sA 37 2 38 BI sx 8 68 Part Number 78 8094 5738 1 78 8095 9549 5 26 1011 6642 4 26 1011 6324 9 78 8092 4153 8 Not Available 26 1011 6251 4 26 1011 6645 7 26 1011 6222 5 26 1011 6221 7 26 1004 3199 3 Not Available 78 8095 9392 0 26 1008 9104 8 26 1003 7115 7 26 1004 1109 4 Not Available 26 1011 6640 8 26 1003 7122 3 26 1008 9102 2 78 8095 9494 4 78 8094 5763 9 26 1011 7794 2 78 8094 5718 3 Not Available 26 1002 3841 4 26 1003 7119 9 26 1002 6586 2 78 8094
333. tronic Enclosure Assembly The connectors for the TDB and image interface boards are accessible from the rear of the system The boards are also removable from the rear of the system The various image interface boards are all the same size and install in the same location Only one image interface board can be installed at a time Figure 6 2 illustrates an example of one of the possible IMS configurations in which the image interface is a FIB It also shows the position and order of the 4 MDBs which are installed on the back side of the IPB The MDBs must be installed in the sequence shown They must also be the same type i e either 8 or 12 bit and either 16 or 32 megapixel 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 9 Service Manual Master Command amp Modem Port To NMB CN1401 SNTOH TDB BIRUIN Lalabas cn1111 Comm Port 0 CN1112 if Comm Port 1 IPB SCB Serial Communication To SCB CN1208 User 1 Back Channel User 0 Back Channel PRE User 1 Receive Image Data To CN1 006 User 0 Receive CN1106 DC Power To MIB CN1302 Figure 6 2 6 3 1 1 Image Processor Board IPB The IPB performs the acquisition interpolation filtering formatting and transfer of an image to the LOS The IPB has the following logical blocks to perform these tasks Microprocessor Controls the functions of the IPB and interface boards Image Interface Connects the IPB to one of the four possible image interface boards Scale LUT Maps the input pixel
334. ttenuator is stepped to the home position L gt Note If you are trying to monitor signals during power up be aware that the optics tests are performed at power up and start running a few seconds after the optics kicker solenoid is energized three times All doors must be closed for the optics tests to run Phone Fix Operator Correctable Power cycle the machine On Site Technician Correctable 1 Problem Cause Poor connection at optics SCB or MIB Solution Reseat cables Be sure to check the connection at the firewall between the electronic enclosure and the optics There have been several instances of poor connections at this juncture 2 Problem Cause Bad optics module Solution Replace optics General Troubleshooting Tip 1 At the SCB command window MPC Diag SCB Cma enter set attenuator 999 MPC sensor display MPC Diag scb sensors should show the attenuator in the home position box checked 2 At the SCB command window enter set attenuator 200 MPC sensor display should show the attenuator box unchecked e During normal operation the attenuator is stepped to the home position Once the home position is found that position is called 0 Each attenuator position is one step of the stepper motor e Closed position full attenuation clear film is typically 80 steps e Fully open position minimum attenuation dark film is typically 480 steps The attenuator home signal can be monitored on the SCB a
335. ttern on the OEM monitor Be sure the SMPTE image is at OEM defined window and level If a SMPTE pattern is not available try using a customer image with all text removed and define the sampling area to include the grey scale Another alternative is to window and level the customer image so that there are extreme blacks and whites across the whole image 2 Select the Tune window display button 3 Select the Gain Black Level button in the Video Fine Tuning window An image is acquired and then the Gain and Black Level Rectangle Selection window opens Select the Retrieve button to download the acquired image to the MPC L gt Note Each time the Gain and Black Level Rectangle Selection window is opened an image is acquired and the most recently downloaded not the most recently acquired image is displayed This means that the window can be opened multiple times while configuring a modality without having to download an image each time However be sure to download an image for each modality and be aware that the downloaded image may not match the most recently acquired image for example if the modality s screen saver kicks in after the image has been downloaded 5 Examine the downloaded image a Identify an area that includes maximum blacks but does not include any border video blanking area This is critical The only area on a SMPTE pattern that contains maximum black is the 100 square the other black bars are not maximum bla
336. ual 7 3 4 Solenoid Troubleshooting To test the solenoids in the IMAGER use MPC Diag SCB Solenoids The solenoids will be actuated for 5 seconds e The solenoid test points on the MIB can be monitored while you are doing a flex test of cables to check if anything in the circuit wiring is marginal or bad e Logic control from the SCB to the MIB can be monitored via the service port on the SCB to MIB cable Refer to the schematic for pinouts Caution Do not leave the solenoid actuated longer than the maximum actuation time indicated in the table Assembly MIB Resistor Max Actuation Time Film Pickup R4J5 Continuous duty Film Pickup Tongue Depressor R4J6 20 seconds Has 1 second startup voltage followed by 10 volt hold voltage Transport Latch Sw407 is in line with this solenoid Transport Feed 20 seconds PROBLEM Some early IMAGERS had a weak intermittent solenoid part 9532 197388 01 SOLUTION Replace If the platen hold and align solenoids are tested repeatedly they may get hot and fail to actuate Any testing should allow time for them to cool between testing 7 10 1202688 2001 May Rev M Section 7 Troubleshootin 7 4 Film Sequencing 7 4 1 Load Cartridge Sequence Refer to Figure 7 8 for a flowchart of the cartridge load process Supply door Start could not be opened Operator inserts cartridge Fute closes door open 2 Rollback home sensor hi 2 Yes Yes
337. ule communications use MPC for WIndows diagnostics 4 Select the Acquire button e f successful proceed to Step 12 e f not successful proceed to Step 5 5 Temporarily set framing parameters to crop the image to a 100 line by 100 pixel square This is done to ensure that a vertical or horizontal sync pulse is not sampled the parameters will be set for a full frame in Step 12 e Set Image Lines to 100 and Horiz Active Pixels to 100 e Set Horizontal Delay and Vertical Delay to select this 100 x 100 square from the center of the image 6 Connect the host video cable to the oscilloscope use a T connector with a 75 ohm terminator attached Measure the video signal from sync tip to maximum white level If less than 1 volt set the Double Gain parameter to 0 5 to 1 0 If more than 1 volt set the Double Gain parameter to 1 0 to 2 0 volts 7 Set the following parameters to midpoints as indicated e Clock Delay to 6 e Fine Pixel Delay to 180 e Black Level to 100 8 Select the Save button 9 Verify that the Enable LED is on This indicates that the parameter set has been loaded and the VEIB VIB EVEIB is in a ready state Refer to Figure 2 36 VEIB Figure 2 37 VIB or Figure 2 38 EVEIB 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 27 Service Manual 2 28 VEIB Main PWA PS Enable LED 11 Go LED 10 VAR Acquire LED 1 nel 73 Sync LED 9 LED 8 Port 0 Port 1 Gain Gain
338. ule purchased from GSI which contains a laser diode provided by Kodak optics and electronics The LOS electronics consist of an Optics Engine Board OEB X amp Y Drivers a Diode Driver and an Attenuator The LOS is attached to a film platen designed by Kodak and installed into the IMAGER as the Exposure Assembly The LOS electronics do not have a microprocessor to control their operation and require control from the SCB They behave like a state machine with the SCB responsible for setting up the LOS in the proper states for normal image printing or maintenance modes The LOS provides status back to the SCB Corrected 12 bit image data comes from the IPB The image data must include data for the entire image including borders A pair of ping pong FIFOs are used in the LOS to allow a line by line transfer of data from the IPB The LOS uses a nominal 700 Hz resonant scanner which scans each line 3 times in the X axis The triple pass line rate ranges from 228 0 to 238 7 Hz 2001 March Rev L 1202688 6 15 Service Manual 6 3 2 2 LOS Electronics Figure 6 6 is a block diagram of the LOS electronics and its interconnection to the rest of the IMAGER electronics The majority of the interfacing between the LOS and the rest of the system electronics is done through the OEB The LOS gets most of its power directly from the MIB with the exception of that for the laser diode For safety reasons the laser diode power is provided through
339. ules All of the boards for the LOS are located within the optics enclosure provided by GSI The IMS has interfaces to receive image data and commands from the host When it has received an image from a host it sends a command over a serial interface to the MCS The serial interface is also used to exchange status between the systems The MCS sets up the control lines for the LOS over a control and status interface and starts the print process The IMS has an interface to the LOS over which the image data is transferred New Modem 2 Serial Ports Board Image Translator Cntl Serial Port Processor Daughter Board Board Board Local Panel Beam Power Subsystem Multi Feed Board Power Distribution Board Rotating Processor Temp Status Processor Si Communication Board Board Memory Daughter Boards Image Image Management System Diode Collimator mage Data amp Pixel Clock Line Sync I 6 Status Lines I I 10 Cntl Lines I Motor Cnil i Machine 1 SensorPwr I i pode poles Interface ee Laser Board Status enuaror Optics System Motors System Figure 6 1 6 2 1202688 2001 March Rev L Section 6 Theory of Operation 6 2 Module Descriptions 6 2 1 Local Panel Assembly The Local Panel is one of the operator interfaces to the system The others are optional keypads The Local Panel has function keys for input and an LCD to display system status and error messages It is
340. us step are displayed select the Auto Adjust Stop button to stop the continuous sampling of the video If the values are close but not right on select the Auto Adjust Once button to perform a single sample and adjust cycle this can be repeated as required L gt Note The sampling circuitry in the VEIB VIB VEIB is susceptible to video noise which can affect image Dmin values The image Dmin of Kodak DryView LASER IMAGING FILM is extremely critical To ensure that image Dmin will be acceptable the following step will increase the gain slightly to clip the noise from the video signal This will decrease image Dmin and Dmax slightly 23 To ensure that image Dmin will be acceptable increase the gain as follows e For a VEIB rotate the gain pot slightly counterclockwise then select the Manual Adjust Once button The intent now is to produce a maximum value of 511 e For a VIB EVEIB add one to the displayed Digital Gain value then select the Manual Adjust Once button The intent now is to produce a maximum value of 1023 24 Increasing the gain decreases Dmax as well as Dmin To offset the gain increase increase the displayed Black Level value by one then select the Manual Adjust Once button 25 Select the Close button to accept the displayed values 26 Acquire and print a SMPTE test pattern using the lowest available contrast setting usually contrast 1 Check the black and white levels on the film If the leve
341. verified perform the following configuration procedures 2 5 1 Power Up the IMAGER Caution The IMAGER can be configured to connect with 200 220 or 240 VAC power sources Before applying power ensure that the IMAGER is set for the voltage that most closely matches the AC line voltage Refer to procedure 2 2 1 Connect the power cord to the IMAGER and the wall outlet 2 Flip up the circuit breaker at the rear of the IMAGER 3 Turn on the IMAGER 2 5 2 Connect the MPC to the IMAGER 1 Connect a straight through serial cable 9 pin female to 9 pin male between the serial port of the MPC and the MPC connector at the rear of the IMAGER 2 Install a hardlock key on the printer port of the MPC 3 Turn on the MPC and start the MPC for Windows program L gt Note If a Subsystem Not Communicating message is displayed select Preferences from the Operations menu then check the Direct Connect Baud and Com settings GO MPC Connector Figure 2 35 2001 March Rev L 1202688 2 23 Service Manual Note The MPC for Windows program is used to load configuration parameters into NVRAM within the various system components Context sensitive help is available throughout the program via the F1 key For example for a description of a particular parameter move the highlight to that para
342. video and pixel clock signals a Check for two video modes Check with the OEM to determine if the modality can operate in two different modes that require different video parameters Some OEMs have one set of video parameters for Live Scan mode and another set for Review Off Tape mode Set up for one or the other b Check for double termination Observe the host monitor while connecting the video cable to a powered up VEIB VIB EVEIB If the monitor image improves or stays the same there is no problem If the monitor image suddenly goes bad ghosting blurring faint etc the video signal may already be terminated once and connecting to the VEIB VIB EVEIB causes a double termination problem If so resolve this problem before proceeding c Check the pixel clock signal Connect the pixel clock cable to the oscilloscope do not terminate the scope The pixel clock signal must be above 0 5 volts peak to peak and must be stable A pixel clock filter may help eliminate glitches in the pixel clock but it may also make it worse If the signal is okay connect the pixel clock cable to the VEIB VIB EVEIB d Avoid ground loops To prevent a possible ground loop connect the VEIB EVEIB power cord to the same power source as the OEM modality If this cannot be done and image noise problems are experienced later during image fine tuning check for a ground loop problem as follows Temporarily disconnect the ground wire from the VEIB EVEIB Run a
343. with no line by line handshaking with this protocol The host terminates the transfer with an EOT In both protocols it is possible to transmit a 4 byte header prior to the image data to define the image size The IMS treats the header as a separate image which requires that it be terminated with an EOT 6 3 1 7 Fiber Interface Board FIB Refer to Figure 6 5 for a block diagram of the FIB The FIB has two optically coupled image source interfaces and provides an interface between the IPB and external interface boxes EIBs The source interfaces are multiplexed and allow only one source to acquire at a time The IPB determines which source interface is active via the source of the acquisition command received from the TDB Each image source interface consists of a high speed optical receiver and low speed optical transmitter The optical receiver circuit referred to as the forward channel is capable of operating at either 100 or 125 megabits second The transfer rate is jumper selectable on a per interface basis The forward channel receives image data and transfer status information from the EIB The optical transmitter circuit referred to as the back channel has a maximum transfer rate of 5 megabits second The back channel transmits commands and image acquisition parameters to the EIB The actual parameter transmission rate is approximately 833 kilobits sec Acquisition parameters must be sent to each EIB to enable the acquisition of images
344. ystem Trouble Analysis This procedure uses MPC to isolate suspected problems in the RF Tag Subsystem The MPC procedure consists of a series of three commands e showemul This command requests a read of the emulsion number on the RF tag If the test passes assume that the RF Tag subsystem is functional The other two tests are unnecessary If the test fails proceed with the other tests to isolate the problem e show rfintf This command requests a read of the firmware version of the RF Tag Interface Board If it passes you can assume that the SCB can communicate with the RF Tag Interface Board If it fails the RF Tag Interface Board is faulty or there is a bad cable connection e show rfreader This command requests a read of the version number of the RF Reader Board If it passes you can assume that the RF Tag Interface Board can communicate with the RF Reader Board If it fails the RF Reader Board is faulty assuming that the RF Tag Interface Board passed the preceding test Preliminary Procedure 1 Close the cartridge remove system power and remove the front panel 2 Check the cable connections to the Distribution Board in the Rollback Module Then replace the front panel 3 Connect MPC to the IMAGER turn on MPC and start the MPC for Windows program 4 Apply power to the IMAGER Running the Show Emulsion Test 1 Replace the film cartridge in the IMAGER with a different RF Tag cartridge In MPC select SCP Ope

SERVICE MANUAL, Rev. M

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents